JP7837788B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display of specific identification information, and as a result of this variable display of specific identification information, the machine can be controlled to a favorable state for the player by deriving a specific display result.

In pachinko gaming machines, exemplified by gaming machines, there were some that displayed multiple types of decorative identification information (decorative patterns) in a variable manner, corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information (special patterns) (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines were capable of performing a step-up effect, where the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device changed in stages. This effect involved treating the display screen of the liquid crystal display device as glass, displaying cracks (a glass plate as an image indicating impending breakage), and then displaying multiple fragment images as if the screen had actually broken (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-86392 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-127593

In gaming machines having the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, there was room to improve their marketability.

This invention was conceived in view of the aforementioned circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced marketability.

(A) A gaming machine that can display identification information in a variable manner and control the game to a state that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to perform a predetermined performance that suggests the system is controlled to the aforementioned advantageous state,
The aforementioned predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a first premonition image of cracking, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the first premonition image of cracking.
The second predetermined performance includes a third predetermined part that displays a second premonition image of cracking, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the second premonition image of cracking.
The execution periods for the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance do not overlap.
The execution period differs between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in at least multiple directions, including a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The fragment image displayed while moving in the aforementioned specific direction requires a longer period of time to become invisible in the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed while moving in the aforementioned predetermined direction.
The fragment image displayed in the fourth predetermined part moving in the specific direction requires a longer period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part moving in the specific direction.
In the first predetermined performance, a predetermined background image can be displayed as the background image before the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed.
As a background image after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed, any of a plurality of background images can be displayed, which is different from the predetermined background image and includes a first background image and a second background image that suggests a higher probability of being controlled to the favorable state than the first background image.
The object image can be displayed in one of several modes.
Depending on which of the multiple forms of object images is displayed when the predetermined background image is displayed, it is possible to suggest which of the multiple background images will be displayed after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed.
It is possible to further perform a specific effect that displays a specific fragment image in a different manner from the fragment image in the second predetermined part,
The aforementioned specific performance can be executed when the advantageous state is not controlled.
When the first predetermined performance is executed, the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in the first mode,
When the aforementioned specific performance is executed, the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a second mode different from the first mode.
In one performance mode, it is possible to switch between and display multiple types of background images, including a first specific background image and a second specific background image.
When switching the background image from the first specific background image to the second specific background image, it is possible to perform a background fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the first specific background image, and a background fade-in display that gradually decreases the transparency of the second specific background image.
When initiating the variable display of the aforementioned identification information, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the aforementioned identification information.
When the variable display of the identification information ends, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the identification information is gradually reduced.
The aforementioned identification information fade-out display and the aforementioned background fade-out display can be executed at the same time.
The aforementioned identification information fade-in display and the aforementioned background fade-in display can be executed at the same time.
The execution period for the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period for the identification information fade-out display.
The execution period for the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period for the identification information fade-in display.
It is characterized by the following:

Furthermore, the present invention may have only the inventive features described in the claims of the present invention, or it may have the inventive features described in the claims of the present invention along with other features not described therein.

This is a front view showing the gaming machine in Embodiment 1. This is a diagram showing the various control boards and other components installed in a pachinko gaming machine. This diagram illustrates the effects control commands. This is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. This is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot types. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received when a prize is won at the start. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern processing. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining whether a player has entered the competition at the start of the competition. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing for controlling the visual effects. This flowchart shows an example of the performance control process. This flowchart shows an example of the variable display start setting process. This is a diagram to explain the decorative patterns and sub-patterns. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the first performance mode, (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing the second performance mode, (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the third performance mode, and (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the fourth performance mode. Figures (A1) and (A2) show the relationship between the variable display area and decorative symbols in the first performance mode, and figures (B1) and (B2) show the relationship between the variable display area and decorative symbols in the second performance mode. (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and decorative symbols in the third performance mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and decorative symbols in the fourth performance mode, and (E) is a diagram for explaining the variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols. (A) is the action to start the change of the decorative pattern, (B) is the action to stop the change, and (C) is the loop action. (A) is a diagram comparing the duration of various actions of decorative patterns and the control of lamp illumination, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop illumination control of the lamp. Figures (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) illustrate examples of how the hold indicator works. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the first performance mode. This figure shows the flow of variable display of decorative patterns, following Figure 26. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the second performance mode. This figure shows the flow of variable display of decorative patterns, following Figure 28. This figure shows the details of the variable display flow of the decorative pattern in Figure 28. This diagram shows the flow of variable display of decorative patterns as an example of modification 1. This figure shows the flow of variable display of decorative patterns, following Figure 31. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the third performance mode. This is a diagram to explain how the decorative patterns appear. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the fourth performance mode. This diagram shows the sequence of stop displays for decorative symbols in the first performance mode (second performance mode). This diagram shows the sequence of stop displays for the decorative patterns that follow Figure 36. Figures (A) to (G) show the sequence of stop displays for decorative symbols when there are 3 reserved symbols in the first performance mode (second performance mode). Figures (A) and (B) show the sequence of stop displays for decorative symbols in the fourth performance mode (third performance mode). (A1) is a diagram showing the first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing the first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the background change. This diagram shows the background change sequence in the first performance mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first performance mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the second performance mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third and fourth performance modes. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first performance mode, (B) is in the second performance mode, and (C) is in the third and fourth performance modes. This diagram shows an example of how a demo performance for customers works. This figure shows an example of what happens when a winning combination is triggered during a customer waiting demo. This diagram shows the flow of the pseudo-consecutive win notification. (A) is a diagram showing an example of pseudo-consecutive win count display and symbol color, (B) is a diagram showing the types of pseudo-consecutive win count display and symbol color, and (C) is a diagram showing the pseudo-consecutive win count display color determination table. This diagram shows the flow of the reach animation. This diagram shows the sequence of events following Figure 50. This diagram shows examples of the operation of each part in the reach animation. This diagram shows the flow of the SP Reach animation. This diagram shows the flow of the SP Reach animation that follows Figure 53. This diagram shows examples of the operation of each part in the SP Reach animation. Figures (A1) to (A7) show a modified example of the present invention, part 2. Figures (A) to (D) show a modified example of the present invention, part 3. This is a front view showing the gaming machine in the embodiment. This is a diagram showing the various control boards and other components installed in a pachinko gaming machine. This is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. This is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. This is an explanatory diagram showing the layer configuration. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating example command formats for controlling the performance. This is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. This is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot types. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the normal state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state or the probability-changing state. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received when a prize is won at the start. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern processing. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining whether a player has entered the competition at the start of the competition. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the random value determination process when winning, and (B) is a diagram showing the fluctuating categories. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for setting the variation pattern. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process that ends after a big win. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing for controlling the visual effects. This flowchart shows an example of the performance control process. This diagram explains whether or not the pending display animation is executed and the proportion of the animation pattern that determines it. This flowchart shows an example of the variable display start setting process. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the determination ratio for whether or not to execute the continuous crackle effect in the normal state. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the dialogue preview effect setting process, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not the dialogue preview effect is executed in the normal state and the effect pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the effect patterns. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a background change is performed and the proportion of the background change effect pattern that is determined; (B) is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a reach suggestion effect is performed and the proportion of the effect pattern that is determined; and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a cut-in effect is performed and the proportion of the effect pattern that is determined. This diagram explains the types of effects that can be performed under normal conditions and the patterns of the crack effect. This diagram explains the types of effects that can be performed under normal conditions and the patterns of the crack effect. This is a diagram illustrating the types of effects that can be performed during the time-saving and probability-changing states, as well as the patterns of the crack effect. This diagram explains the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the performance. This diagram explains the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the performance. This diagram explains the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the performance. This diagram explains the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the performance. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach α. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach α. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach α. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach β. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach β. This diagram shows the details of an example of the operation of the first consecutive crack effect. This diagram shows the details of an example of the operation of the second consecutive crack effect. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the dialogue preview effect works. This diagram shows a detailed example of the operation of background change effect A. This diagram shows a detailed example of the operation of background change effect A. This diagram shows the details of an example of background change effect B in operation. This diagram shows details of some examples of how the pseudo-consecutive win animation works. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the reach indication effect works. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the reach indication effect works. This diagram shows the details of an example of how a weak development effect works. This diagram shows the details of some examples of operations in the strong development sequence A. This diagram shows the details of an example of the operation of the strong development effect B. This diagram shows the details of an example of the operation of the strong development effect B. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the cut-in animation works. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the result notification animation works when the variable display result is a jackpot. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the result notification animation works when the variable display result is a jackpot. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the result notification animation works when the variable display result is incorrect. This diagram compares the details of each performance. This diagram compares the details of each performance. This is a timing chart showing the details of the first and second consecutive crack effects. This is a timing chart showing the details of the dialogue preview effect. This is a timing chart showing the details of background change effect A. This is a timing chart showing the details of background change effect B. This is a timing chart showing the details of the pseudo-consecutive win animation. This is a timing chart showing the details of the reach-indicating animations. This is a timing chart showing the details of the weak development sequence. This is a timing chart showing the details of the strong development sequence A. This is a timing chart showing the details of the strong development sequence B. This is a timing chart showing the details of the cut-in animation. This is a timing chart showing the details of the result notification sequence. This is an explanatory diagram showing the changes in the speed of the fragment images in each effect. This diagram shows the crack patterns used in crack effects. This figure shows examples of how each cracking pattern is displayed. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern B. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern E. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern F. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern G. (A) shows the fragment images displayed during the pseudo-consecutive animation, and (B) shows the fragment images displayed during the cut-in animation. (A) shows the fragment images displayed during background change effect A, and (B) shows the fragment images displayed during strong development effect B. This figure shows a modified example 1 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example of the present invention, part 2. This figure shows a modified example 3 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 4 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 5 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 6 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 7 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example of the present invention, part 8. This figure shows a modified example 9 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 9 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 10 of the present invention.

The embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the following examples.

[Form 1] (No. 1)
The gaming machine of type 1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size is smaller than the aforementioned decorative identification information, and it is possible to perform variable display of reduced identification information corresponding to each of the multiple types of decorative identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of small symbols corresponding to decorative symbols),
The variable display of the decorative identification information includes a movable display (for example, a scroll display; see Figure 21) that moves the decorative identification information.
The variable display of the reduced identification information is a switching display that switches to other reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information (for example, a switching display; see Figure 22(E)).
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, it is possible to switch the reduced identification information multiple times during the period from when one decorative identification information is displayed until the display of that one decorative identification information ends (for example, when one decorative pattern is displayed, during the period Ta2 until the display of that decorative pattern ends, the smaller patterns are switched five times, and each is displayed for a period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). See Figure 22(E)).
The display result of the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is composed of a combination of the aforementioned decorative identification information (for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326"),
The display result of the variable display of the reduced identification information is composed of a combination of the reduced identification information (for example, a combination of small symbols such as "111" and "326"),
When a non-specific combination of the decorative identification information, which corresponds to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched in the variable display of the reduced identification information so that it does not become a combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination, before the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is derived. (For example, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop displaying a confirmed decorative symbol for a losing combination (e.g., "326"), the display is switched so that the small symbol for the losing combination of the same "326" as the decorative symbol is not displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started but before the confirmed decorative symbol for the losing combination (e.g., "326") is stopped. See Figure 22(E))
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as a result of the display of the variable display of decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched in the variable display of the reduced identification information so as not to be a combination of reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination, before the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information is derived. Therefore, it is not known in advance that a non-specific combination will be derived as a result of the display of the variable display of decorative identification information from the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of reduced identification information, thus preventing a decrease in interest.

[Form 2] (No. 2)
The gaming machine of type 2 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It comprises light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is composed of a combination of the decorative identification information that has stopped in the effective display area from among the multiple decorative identification information displayed in the display area (for example, the part where a jackpot or a miss occurs depending on the combination of decorative symbols such as "111" and "326" that have stopped and displayed at the stopping positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R).
When a non-specific combination of the decorative identification information is derived as a result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, which corresponds to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, it is possible to display the decorative identification information in a manner in which it is enlarged from its normal size and then returned to its normal size (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 can perform a variation stop action when it temporarily stops displaying the decorative pattern in a variable display based on a losing variation pattern. See Figures 36 to 38, 42, and 43).
When the decorative identification information that is stopped in the effective display area is enlarged, the decorative identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not enlarged (see Modification 3 in Figure 57).
During the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern for a predetermined light emission period, and this predetermined light emission control is also continued when the decorative identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged (for example, even when the performance control CPU 120 performs a variable stop action when temporarily stopping the display of the decorative pattern, the loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d is performed. See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the player to focus their attention on the decorative identification information that is stopped in the active display area. This is achieved when a non-specific combination of decorative identification information, which corresponds to a non-specific display result, is derived as a result of the variable display of decorative identification information. Furthermore, even when a non-specific combination that is meaningless to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept in the area where the decorative identification information is displayed. Additionally, when decorative identification information that is stopped in the active display area is enlarged, decorative identification information that is not located in the active display area is not enlarged, thus allowing the player's gaze to be concentrated on the decorative identification information that is stopped in the active area, and reducing the load on display control. Moreover, since the predetermined light emission control continues even when enlarging decorative identification information that is stopped in the active display area, the control of the light emission means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the decorative identification information includes a forward movement display (for example, a scrolling display) that moves the decorative identification information from the back to the front while increasing its transparency and then erases it (see Figures 28 to 30).
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a character image (for example, a character display unit 002SG052) and a numeric image (for example, a numeric display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decorative identification information, other decorative identification information located behind the first decorative identification information becomes visible through the first decorative identification information, the character image of the other decorative identification information is displayed, while the numerical image is not displayed, and after the first decorative identification information is erased, the numerical image of the other decorative identification information is displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 30(A) and 30(B), between the time the first decorative pattern is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the time it is displayed out of the frame, (For example, decorative pattern "2") may be partially overlapped by another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located behind it, which may become visible through decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character of the character display section 002SG052 of decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") of the number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), as shown in Figure 30(C), where the number ("3") of the number display section 002SG051 of decorative pattern "3" is displayed after decorative pattern "2" has been erased.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when displaying decorative identification information by moving it from the back to the front while increasing its transparency and then erasing it, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information becomes visible through the first decorative identification information. However, in this case, the character image of the other decorative identification information located behind is displayed, but the numerical image is not. The numerical image of the other decorative identification information is displayed only after the first decorative identification information is erased, so the numerical image of the first decorative identification information and the numerical image of the other decorative identification information do not overlap, preventing the numerical image of the first decorative identification information located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The gaming machine of type 3-2 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the decorative identification information includes a forward movement display (for example, a scrolling display) that moves the decorative identification information from the front to the back while increasing its transparency and then erases it (see Figures 31 and 32).
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a character image (for example, a character display unit 002SG052) and a numeric image (for example, a numeric display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decorative identification information, another decorative identification information located behind the first decorative identification information becomes visible through the first decorative identification information, the character image of the first decorative identification information is displayed, while the numeric image is not displayed, and the numeric image of the first decorative identification information is displayed after the other decorative identification information is erased. (For example, as shown in Figures 31(G) and 31(H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front to the back, so between the time the decorative pattern is displayed in the frame-in to frame-out of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") located behind the first decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") may become visible through decorative pattern "3" in a manner that partially overlaps it. At this time, the character of the character display section 002SG052 of decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the numeric number ("2") of the numeric display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed). Modification 1)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when displaying decorative identification information by moving it from the front to the back while increasing its transparency and then erasing it, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information becomes visible through the first decorative identification information. However, in this case, the character image of the first decorative identification information located in the front is displayed, but the numerical image is not. The numerical image of the first decorative identification information is displayed only after the other decorative identification information has been erased. Therefore, the numerical images of the other decorative identification information and the numerical image of the first decorative identification information do not overlap, preventing the numerical images of the other decorative identification information located in the back from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 4] (No. 5)
The gaming machine of type 5 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It comprises light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the decorative identification information includes a rotating display that rotates the decorative identification information to repeatedly display the front and back surfaces of the decorative identification information (see Figures 33 and 34).
During the rotation display, the decorative identification information becomes semi-transparent, and when the rotation display stops, the decorative identification information becomes opaque (see Figures 33 and 34).
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a numeric image (for example, a numeric display unit 002SG051),
During the rotational display, the numerical image on the front side of the decorative identification information, which is semi-transparent, is displayed, while the numerical image on the back side is not displayed (see Figure 34).
During the execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission manner for a predetermined light emission period, and this predetermined light emission control is also continued during the rotation display (for example, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed in the high base state, a light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed based on a loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 24(B)). Modified example: see Figure 44).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when rotating decorative identification information to repeatedly display both the front and back surfaces of the decorative identification information, the decorative identification information becomes semi-transparent, allowing both the front and back surfaces to be seen. However, while the numerical image on the front surface of the decorative identification information is displayed, the numerical image on the back surface is not displayed. Therefore, the numerical images on the front and back surfaces of the decorative identification information do not overlap, preventing the numerical image on the front surface from becoming difficult to read. Furthermore, since predetermined light emission control continues during rotational display, the control of the light emission means can be simplified.

[Form 5] (No. 6)
The gaming machine of type 5 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area where the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (for example, a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (for example, a central decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first and second areas.
When the aforementioned specific display result is derived, a reach state is reached in which the same type of decorative identification information temporarily stops in the first and second regions, and then a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the same type of decorative identification information that forms the reach state stops in the third region.
When the aforementioned reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (for example, a reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed and erased so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information that has been temporarily stopped in the first and second regions and the decoration identification information that is being variably displayed in the third region (for example, the portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect).
After the reach state is reached, until the reach line indication effect is executed, the decorative identification information being displayed in the third region is made transparent with a first transparency (for example, first transmittance F1), and after the reach line indication effect is executed, the decorative identification information being displayed in the third region is made transparent with a second transparency (for example, second transmittance F2) which is less transparent than the first transparency (see Figure 52).
After the execution of the reach line suggestion effect, the timing at which the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggestion image is removed from the third area (for example, after the execution of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the timing at which the transparency of the decorative symbol being variably displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is set to a second transparency F2 which is lower than the first transparency F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been removed from the central decorative symbol display area 5C. See Figures 50 to 52).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach is achieved, a reach line suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the ornament identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the ornament identification information being displayed variably in the third region. At the same time that the reach line suggestion image is removed from the third region, the ornament identification information being displayed variably in the third region becomes a second transparency, which is lower than the first transparency. Therefore, the ornament identification information being displayed variably in the third region does not interfere with the reach line suggestion image.

[Form 6] (No. 7)
The game machine of type 6 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
Equipped with a light-emitting means,
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area where the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (for example, a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (for example, a central decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first and second areas.
When the aforementioned specific display result is derived, a reach state is reached in which the same type of decorative identification information temporarily stops in the first and second regions, and then a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the same type of decorative identification information that forms the reach state stops in the third region.
When the aforementioned reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (for example, a reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed and erased so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information that has been temporarily stopped in the first and second regions and the decoration identification information that is being variably displayed in the third region (for example, the portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect).
When the aforementioned reach line suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to perform an enlarged display that enlarges the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first and second regions, and a separated display that separates the decorative identification information after the enlarged display has been performed (see Figures 50 to 52).
The second period from the start to the end of the separation display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the second period te1 from the start to the end of the separation display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1 < te1). See Figure 52.
The light-emitting means includes a specific light-emitting means (for example, a movable lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
During the execution of the reach line indication effect, it is possible to perform a light-off control to turn off the specific light-emitting means (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the movable lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged around (near) the display screen of the image display device 5 are turned off. See Figures 50(F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the decoration identification information being displayed variably in the third region. Furthermore, the decoration identification information stopped in the first and second regions is displayed enlarged for a first period, and then displayed spaced apart for a second period longer than the first period, thereby allowing the player to recognize the decoration identification information that forms the reach state. In addition, by turning off specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 7] (No. 8)
The gaming machine of type 7 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
Equipped with a light-emitting means,
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area where the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (for example, a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (for example, a central decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first and second areas.
When the aforementioned specific display result is derived, a reach state is reached in which the same type of decorative identification information temporarily stops in the first and second regions, and then a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the same type of decorative identification information that forms the reach state stops in the third region.
When the aforementioned reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (for example, a reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed and erased so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information that has been temporarily stopped in the first and second regions and the decoration identification information that is being variably displayed in the third region (for example, the portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect).
The light-emitting means includes a specific light-emitting means (for example, a movable lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
During the execution of the reach line indication effect, it is possible to perform a light-off control to turn off the specific light-emitting means (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the movable lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged around (near) the display screen of the image display device 5 are turned off. See Figures 50(F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the decoration identification information being displayed variably in the third region. Furthermore, by turning off specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 8] (No. 9)
The gaming machine of type 8 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It comprises light-emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The aforementioned game control means is
The variable display of the specified identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed to operate the decorative identification information in a predetermined operation mode over a first period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative pattern at the stop position of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative pattern is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special pattern ends. See Figures 23(C), 42, and 43).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern over a second period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative pattern at the stop position of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, it repeatedly executes loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d. See Figures 24(B), 42, and 43).
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is stopped in the aforementioned special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative pattern at the stop position of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the high base state, it does not execute the loop action of the decorative pattern. See Figure 44).
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3 < loop light emission period Tb4. See Figure 24(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the repeated execution of predetermined operation display control in normal conditions to encourage the player to display variable decorative identification information, while preventing excessive prompting and annoyance of variable display in special conditions where variable display is easily performed. Furthermore, since the predetermined operation display control is repeated at a shorter cycle than the predetermined light emission control, the decorative identification information can be effectively highlighted.

[Form 9] (No. 10)
The gaming machine of type 9 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
The variable display of the specified identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
Information regarding the variable display of special identification information that has not yet been started can be stored as reserved information (for example, in the part where the CPU 103 stores reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updates the number of reserved items in the start prize determination process of step S101),
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is composed of the combination of the decorative identification information that has stopped in the effective display area (for example, the part where a jackpot or a miss occurs depending on the combination of decorative symbols such as "111" and "326" that have stopped and displayed at the stopping positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R).
In the normal state, if a non-specific combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, it is possible to display the decorative identification information in a manner in which it is enlarged from its normal size and then returned to its normal size, according to the number of reserved items stored as reserved storage information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 can perform a variable stop action when temporarily stopping the display of the decorative pattern. See Figures 36 to 39).
In the aforementioned special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information is maintained at its normal size regardless of the number of reserved items stored as reserved information (for example, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, if a variable display based on a shortened variation pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved items, the variation stop action is not executed, and the display is temporarily stopped while maintaining its size. See Figures 39 and 44).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in the movement of the decorative identification information when it stops, depending on the number of reserved memories, thereby enhancing the user experience. However, in special conditions where the average variable display period is short and the decorative identification information is difficult to see, it can be stopped while maintaining its size, thus ensuring that the visibility of the decorative identification information is not compromised.

[Form 10] (No. 11)
The gaming machine of form 10 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one performance mode, it is possible to switch between and display multiple types of background images, including a first background image and a second background image (for example, in the first performance mode, it is possible to switch between displaying a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40(A1)) which represents a view of a city during the day from a distance, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40(A2)) which represents a view of the city during the day).
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased. At the same time, a background fade-in display is performed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being performed (for example, a crossfade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See Figure 40).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is started, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then erased (for example, a portion of a decorative pattern that gradually accelerates to high-speed display after the scrolling display starts, and whose transparency increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and is then faded out).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information ends, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, as the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period for the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period for the identification information fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 in which the first background image 002SG081 fades out is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of scrolling display of decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until high-speed display begins (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A21). See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this characteristic, the shorter the duration of the fade-out display, the more abruptly it appears to disappear. Therefore, if the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change may occur at the same time, the fade-out display of the identification information can be executed in a shorter period than the background fade-out display, drawing attention to the start of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 11] (No. 12)
The gaming machine of form 11 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one performance mode, it is possible to switch between and display multiple types of background images, including a first background image and a second background image (for example, in the first performance mode, it is possible to switch between displaying a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40(A1)) which represents a view of a city during the day from a distance, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40(A2)) which represents a view of the city during the day).
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased. At the same time, a background fade-in display is performed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being performed (for example, a crossfade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See Figure 40).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is started, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then erased (for example, a portion of a decorative pattern that gradually accelerates to high-speed display after the scrolling display starts, and whose transparency increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and is then faded out).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information ends, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, as the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period for the aforementioned identification information fade-out display and the execution period for the aforementioned background fade-out display are different (for example, the portion where fade-out display period A1 and fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time. See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature ensures that the synchronization of the fade-out display of the identification information and the fade-out display of the background prevents it from becoming difficult to recognize that the variable display of decorative identification information has begun.

[Form 12] (No. 13)
The gaming machine of form 12 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one performance mode, it is possible to switch between and display multiple types of background images, including a first background image and a second background image (for example, in the first performance mode, it is possible to switch between displaying a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40(A1)) which represents a view of a city during the day from a distance, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40(A2)) which represents a view of the city during the day).
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased. At the same time, a background fade-in display is performed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being performed (for example, a crossfade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See Figure 40).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is started, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then erased (for example, a portion of a decorative pattern that gradually accelerates to high-speed display after the scrolling display starts, and whose transparency increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and is then faded out).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information ends, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, as the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 in which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in is longer than the fade-in display period B21 in the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the start of the deceleration of the display speed until the temporary stop display is displayed (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B21). See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this characteristic, since fade-in displays generally give the impression of appearing abruptly the shorter the period over which they are executed, if the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change may occur at the same time, the fade-in display of the identification information can be executed in a shorter period than the background fade-in display, drawing attention to the termination of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 13] (No. 14)
The gaming machine of form 13 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one performance mode, it is possible to switch between and display multiple types of background images, including a first background image and a second background image (for example, in the first performance mode, it is possible to switch between displaying a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40(A1)) which represents a view of a city during the day from a distance, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40(A2)) which represents a view of the city during the day).
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased. At the same time, a background fade-in display is performed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being performed (for example, a crossfade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See Figure 40).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is started, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then erased (for example, a portion of a decorative pattern that gradually accelerates to high-speed display after the scrolling display starts, and whose transparency increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and is then faded out).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information ends, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, as the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period for the aforementioned identification information fade-in display and the execution period for the aforementioned background fade-in display are different (for example, the portion where fade-in display period B1 and fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for synchronization between the fade-in display of identification information and the fade-in display of the background, preventing it from becoming difficult to notice when the variable display of decorative identification information has ended.

[Form 14] (No. 15)
The gaming machine of form 14 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to perform a specific effect in which the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily paused at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a "pseudo-consecutive display" in which the decorative symbols are temporarily paused at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed, that is, whether to make one variable display appear as multiple variable displays).
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes decorative identification information of multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) including a digit image.
When the variable display is restarted in the aforementioned specific performance, a count image that can identify the number of times the variable display has been restarted (for example, a pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212) can be displayed in multiple colors (for example, blue, red) (see Figures 48 and 49).
In the aforementioned specific performance, there is a first combination in which the numerical image of the temporarily stopped decorative identification symbol and the numerical display of the count image when the variable display is resumed are of the same type, and the colors of the temporarily stopped decorative identification symbol and the count image are different; and a second combination in which both the numerical image of the temporarily stopped decorative identification symbol and the numerical display of the count image when the variable display is resumed, as well as the colors of the temporarily stopped decorative identification symbol and the count image, are of the same type.
In the aforementioned specific performance, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the first combination (for example, in a pseudo-consecutive win予告, there is a first combination where the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop and the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display are not the same color, and a second combination where the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop and the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display are the same color, and in the pseudo-consecutive win予告, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the first combination).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the enjoyment of the game by not only allowing players to see whether a specific effect is performed, but also drawing attention to the combination of numbers and colors in the display of the temporary stop-displayed decorative identification information and the count image.

[Form 15] (No. 16)
The gaming machine of type 15 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size is smaller than the aforementioned decorative identification information, and it is possible to perform variable display of reduced identification information corresponding to each of the multiple types of decorative identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of small symbols corresponding to decorative symbols),
When variable display is not being performed, a standby animation can be executed that displays a predetermined image (for example, the part in which the animation control CPU 120 can execute the "customer waiting demo animation" when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since receiving a customer waiting demo specification command output from the main board 11, without receiving any control commands such as a variable display start specification command. See Figure 46).
While the aforementioned standby animation is being performed, the decorative identification information is hidden, while the reduced identification information continues to be displayed (see Figure 46).
When the condition for starting the variable display is met while the standby animation is being performed, the variable display of the reduced identification information starts before the predetermined image is hidden, and then the decorative identification information is displayed and the variable display starts after the predetermined image is hidden (for example, when a starting win occurs while the customer waiting demo animation is being performed, the variable display of the small symbols starts before the customer waiting demo animation image 002SG400 is hidden, then the customer waiting demo animation image 002SG400 is hidden, and the background image corresponding to the animation mode at that time (in this case, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first animation mode) is displayed, and then the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display starts. See Figure 47).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display of decorative identification information begins after the predetermined image is hidden, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has started in accordance with the fulfillment of the conditions for starting the variable display. However, since the variable display of the reduced identification information begins before the predetermined image is hidden, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of specific identification information.

[Form 16] (No. 17)
The gaming machine of form 16 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
Based on multiple types of variable display patterns (see Figure 7), the variable display of the specific identification information is executed (for example, the part in step S25 where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing).
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet been started (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 in the special figure pending storage display area 5U during the pending display update process in step S161),
It is possible to display a corresponding display in the corresponding display area that corresponds to the variable display of the special identification information being executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F during the pending display update process in step S161),
In conjunction with the start of the variable display of the specified identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display that moves the first pending display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special feature pending memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F and switches it to the active display 002SG103. See Figure 25).
As a variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display that moves the decorative identification information (for example, a scrolling display; see Figure 21) and a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display (for example, a variation start action; see Figure 23(A)).
In the aforementioned normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols does not start until the hold shift display period ends, when the aforementioned variation start action is performed and the hold shift display period ends. See Figures 26(C) to (F)).
Based on variable display pattern information corresponding to multiple types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).
It is possible to perform the same switching display when a variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when a variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 or the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when a variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a reach variable pattern specification command). See Figure 25.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for effective use of the time required for the switching display by performing a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display when the variable display of specific identification information begins, and by performing a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display while the switching display is being performed. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer compared to the special state, and the interest of the start of the variable display of decorative identification information in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous, can be enhanced. In addition, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 17] (No. 18)
The gaming machine of type 17 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
Based on multiple types of variable display patterns (see Figure 7), the variable display of the specific identification information is executed (for example, the part in step S25 where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing).
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet been started (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 in the special figure pending storage display area 5U during the pending display update process in step S161),
It is possible to display a corresponding display in the corresponding display area that corresponds to the variable display of the special identification information being executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F during the pending display update process in step S161),
In conjunction with the start of the variable display of the specified identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display that moves the first pending display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special feature pending memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F and switches it to the active display 002SG103. See Figure 25).
As a variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display that moves the decorative identification information (for example, a scrolling display; see Figure 21) and a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display (for example, a variation start action; see Figure 23(A)).
In the normal state described above, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the scrolling display is not started until the switching display is finished (for example, the scrolling display (variable display) of decorative symbols is not started until the holding shift display period ends, when the first holding display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol holding memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to be displayed as the active display 002SG103, and the aforementioned variation start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of decorative symbols is started after the holding shift display period has ended. See Figures 26(C) to (F)).
Based on variable display pattern information corresponding to multiple types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).
It is possible to perform the same switching display when a variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when a variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 or the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when a variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a reach variable pattern specification command). See Figure 25.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for effective use of the time required for switching displays by performing a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display when the variable display of specific identification information begins, and by performing a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a different manner than the moving display before starting the moving display of the decorative identification information while the switching display is being performed. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not start until the switching display is completed and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer compared to the special state, and the interest when the variable display of decorative identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous, can be enhanced. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 18] (No. 19)
The gaming machine of type 18 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
Based on multiple types of variable display patterns (see Figure 7), the variable display of the specific identification information is executed (for example, the part in step S25 where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing).
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet been started (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 in the special figure pending storage display area 5U during the pending display update process in step S161),
It is possible to display a corresponding display in the corresponding display area that corresponds to the variable display of the special identification information being executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F during the pending display update process in step S161),
In conjunction with the start of the variable display of the specified identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display that moves the first pending display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special feature pending memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F and switches it to the active display 002SG103. See Figure 25).
As a variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display that moves the decorative identification information (for example, a scrolling display; see Figure 21) and a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display (for example, a variation start action; see Figure 23(A)).
In the aforementioned special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special hold memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols is not started until the hold shift display period ends, until the aforementioned variation start action is performed and the hold shift display period ends. Modified example),
Based on variable display pattern information corresponding to multiple types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the same switching display when a variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when a variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 or the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when a variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a reach variable pattern specification command). See Figure 25.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for effective use of the time required for the switching display by performing a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display when the variable display of specific identification information begins, and by performing a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display while the switching display is being performed. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in a special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of decorative identification information in the special state can be enhanced. In addition, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 19] (No. 20)
The gaming machine of form 19 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
Based on multiple types of variable display patterns (see Figure 7), the variable display of the specific identification information is executed (for example, the part in step S25 where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing).
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet been started (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 in the special figure pending storage display area 5U during the pending display update process in step S161),
It is possible to display a corresponding display in the corresponding display area that corresponds to the variable display of the special identification information being executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F during the pending display update process in step S161),
In conjunction with the start of the variable display of the specified identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display that moves the first pending display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special feature pending memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F and switches it to the active display 002SG103. See Figure 25).
As a variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display that moves the decorative identification information (for example, a scrolling display; see Figure 21) and a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display (for example, a variation start action; see Figure 23(A)).
In the aforementioned special state, while the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the movement display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols is not started until the hold shift display period ends, when the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to be displayed as the active display 002SG103, and the aforementioned variation start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started after the hold shift display period has ended. Modified example)
Based on variable display pattern information corresponding to multiple types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the same switching display when a variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when a variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in a common manner when a variable display is performed based on the first type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern specification command) and when a variable display is performed based on the second type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a reach variable pattern specification command), switching the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103. See Figure 25).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for effective use of the time required for the switching display by performing a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display when the variable display of specific identification information begins, and by performing a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a different manner than the moving display before the moving display of the decorative identification information begins while the switching display is being performed. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not begin until the switching display is completed and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in a special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of decorative identification information in the special state can be enhanced. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 20] (No. 21)
The gaming machine of type 20 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control the system to any of several types of performance modes (for example, first to fourth performance modes), including the first performance mode and the second performance mode.
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be performed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then erased (for example, in the part where the decorative pattern gradually accelerates to high-speed display after the scrolling display starts, and the transparency increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing it to fade out),
In the first performance mode, a moving display is performed to move the decorative identification information as a variable display of the decorative identification information (see Figures 20(A1) and (A2)).
In the second performance mode, a special variable display, which differs in form from the moving display, is performed as a variable display of the decorative identification information (see Figures 20(B1) and (B2)).
The duration of the fade-out display when the special variable display is executed in the second performance mode is longer than the duration of the fade-out display when the moving display is executed in the first performance mode (for example, the portion where the fade-out display period A22 when the scrolling display is executed in the second performance mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scrolling display is executed in the first performance mode (fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 45(A) and (B))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second performance mode, not only is the variable display of decorative identification information different from that of the first performance mode, but the fade-out display period from the start of the variable display until the decorative identification information disappears is also longer, allowing the decorative identification information to be viewed for a longer period of time.

[Form 21] (No. 22)
The gaming machine of form 21 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control the system to any of several types of performance modes (for example, first to fourth performance modes), including the first performance mode and the second performance mode.
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be performed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then erased (for example, in the part where the decorative pattern gradually accelerates to high-speed display after the scrolling display starts, and the transparency increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing it to fade out),
The variable display pattern of the decorative identification information can be determined to be one of several types of variable display patterns.
The duration of the fade-out display differs depending on whether a predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first performance mode or in the second performance mode (for example, the fade-out display periods A21 and A22 differ depending on whether a non-reach failure variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first performance mode or in the second performance mode. See Figures 45(A) and 45(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it difficult for players to predict which variable display pattern is being determined, as the fade-out duration differs depending on whether the game is controlled in the first or second performance mode. This enhances the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22] (No. 23)
The gaming machine of form 22 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a character image (for example, a character display unit 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, an information display unit 002SG053) which is information related to the character in the character image.
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the conditions for starting the variable display are met until the decorative identification information starts to display in a variable manner, and a post-variable display period after the decorative identification information starts to display in a variable manner (for example, the variable display period for a special pattern includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special pattern and small patterns starts until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts).
The character image is displayed during the period before variable display and the period after variable display.
The aforementioned related information image is displayed during the pre-variable display period and then erased before the post-variable display period begins (for example, the character name (character-related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 is displayed during the pre-variable display period, i.e., when the variation start action is executed, and then erased before the post-variable display period begins, i.e., before the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins. See Figures 23(A) and 26).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows players to deepen their understanding of the characters by drawing their attention to related information images before the variable display of decorative identification information begins, i.e., when it is displayed in a stationary state. Furthermore, by clearing the related information images before the variable display begins, players can be drawn to the variable display and pre-announcement effects rather than the related information images.

[Form 23] (No. 24)
The gaming machine of form 23 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
The variable display of the specified identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In the aforementioned normal state, the system can be controlled to any of several types of performance modes, including a first performance mode (e.g., first performance mode) and a second performance mode (e.g., second performance mode) (for example, first to fourth performance modes; see Figure 20).
In the aforementioned special state, the performance mode can be controlled to include a third performance mode (for example, a third performance mode or a fourth performance mode),
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a character image (for example, a character display unit 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, an information display unit 002SG053) which is information related to the character in the character image.
In the first performance mode, the decorative identification information is displayed in a manner that includes the character image and the related information image (see Figure 26).
In the second and third performance modes, the decorative identification information is displayed in a manner that does not include the related information image (see Figures 28, 29, and 33).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows players to deepen their understanding of the characters by displaying related information images in the first presentation mode, drawing their attention to these images. In contrast, in the second and third presentation modes, the related information images are hidden, allowing players to focus on variable displays and予告演出 (pre-announcement effects) rather than the related information images.

[Form 24] (No. 25)
The gaming machine of form 24 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
The variable display of the specified identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a numeric image (for example, a numeric display unit 002SG061),
Normally, when the background image is displayed, it is possible to perform a notification effect that indicates whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can perform an SP reach effect that indicates whether or not it will result in a jackpot),
In the aforementioned notification presentation, a specific background image different from the normal background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) is displayed.
When the notification effect is executed in a variable display in which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect (for example, in an SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of winning symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed (see Figure 53(F))).
Upon the end of the notification effect, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and while the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 53(G), upon the end of the SP reach effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed).
When the aforementioned normal background image is displayed, a specific image (for example, specific image 002SG075) is displayed in close proximity to the numerical image of the combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result that is displayed.
In the aforementioned special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing flames is displayed in response to the numerical display section 002SG051 of the combination of jackpot-confirming decorative symbols displayed after the SP reach performance ends (see Figures 53(H) and (I)), while in the high base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing flames is not displayed in response to the numerical display section 002SG051 of the combination of jackpot-confirming decorative symbols displayed after the SP reach performance ends (see Figures 54(P) and (S))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in normal conditions, the effect of the performance is enhanced and the excitement is heightened by displaying a specific image in response to the numerical image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification performance. However, in special conditions where the average variable display period is short, the variable display can be made to feel faster by not displaying a specific image in response to the numerical image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification performance.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine described in form 17 or form 18,
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the variable display of the specified identification information has ended, and the corresponding display (e.g., active display 002SG103) that was displayed in the corresponding display area (e.g., active display area 5F) is erased, an erase effect display (e.g., erase effect 002SG110) that emphasizes that the corresponding display has been erased can be displayed.
If the pending display is displayed when the erase effect display is shown, the erase effect display will continue to be displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending display is started (for example, the erase effect 002SG110 will continue to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 has been erased, and will be erased only after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left is started, as shown below. See Figure 25 (B3)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents a decline in the entertainment value of the performance by eliminating any gaps in the visual presentation between the end of one variable display and the start of the next. Furthermore, the erase effect display allows the player to recognize that the corresponding display for the completed variable display has been erased, while the display of a new corresponding display allows them to recognize that a new variable display has started.

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine described in form 17 or form 18,
The area where the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (for example, a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (for example, a central decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first and second areas.
In the normal state described above, the third region displays decorative identification information in a smaller size than the first and second regions (see, for example, Figure 19).
In the aforementioned special state, the decorative identification information for the first region, the second region, and the third region is displayed at the same size (see, for example, Figure 19).
The third region in the special state is positioned closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third region in the normal state (see, for example, Figure 19).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a sense of depth and enhanced interest by displaying decorative identification information in the first and second regions prominently in the normal state, and shifting the decorative identification information in the third region. However, in the special state, where the average variable display period is short, the decorative identification information is positioned closer to the center of the display area, thereby increasing the degree of recognition of the decorative identification information.

(Basic explanation)
First, we will explain the basic configuration and control of pachinko machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a typical pachinko machine).

Next, an embodiment for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings. In the following description, the front side of Figure 1 will be considered the front (front, front view) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be considered the rear (rear, back view) side. The description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front. In this embodiment, the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 refers to the surface facing the player playing the game. Furthermore, in the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach," and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game surface, and a game machine frame (frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls, which serve as the game medium, are launched from a predetermined ball launching device and fired into this game area.

Furthermore, "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/shrinking one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and the regular symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or regular symbols are displayed in an updated manner. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling or updated manner, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/shrinked. Note that variation also includes the display of a symbol blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stopped display (also called derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may also be expressed as variable display or simply variable.

Furthermore, the special symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols displayed variably in the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols." Additionally, a special symbol game using the first special symbols is called a "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbols is called a "second special symbol game." Furthermore, only one type of special symbol display device is required for the variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various visual effects. The image display device 5 may also consist of a projector and a screen. Various visual effects are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers) that serve as decorative identification information distinct from the special symbols is performed in synchronization with the first and second special symbol games. Here, in synchronization with the first or second special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed variably (e.g., vertical scrolling or updating) in the left, center, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. The synchronous execution of the special symbol games and the variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as "variable display."

Furthermore, the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5S for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a sub-symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol. The sub-symbol is displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state in the pachinko machine 1, the right-hand shooting notification image 002SG201 (see Figure 20) prompting the player to shoot to the right, and the remaining time-saving display 002SG202 (see Figure 20) indicating the remaining time-saving rounds, etc., may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the performance images such as characters. This prevents the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the performance images. This prevents the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are being displayed in a variable form. For example, it is displayed in a variable form by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variable display of the fourth symbol allows for the recognition of whether or not the decorative symbols are currently being displayed in a variable form, even if the decorative symbols are difficult to recognize. For example, the variable display of the decorative symbols may disappear from the screen for a moment, or the movable parts 32A and 32B may obscure all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the first variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the second variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the symbols displayed on the fourth symbol display device, which is installed in a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7, which is a designated location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED, are also referred to as the fourth symbols.

The lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with display areas (special symbol hold memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to the variable display. In this embodiment, a special symbol hold memory display area 5U is provided common to both the first and second special symbols. However, a first special symbol hold memory display area, which displays the first hold display representing a variable display whose execution for the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol hold memory display area, which displays the second hold display representing a variable display whose execution for the second special symbol is pending, may be provided separately.

A first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a prize ball device 6A is provided, and to the right of the prize ball device 6A, a variable prize ball device 6B is provided.

The prize ball entry device 6A forms a first starting prize entry opening, which is kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter at all times, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the first special game may be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric mechanism) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). The variable prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric mechanism with an openable and closable movable piece. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, resulting in a closed state where game balls cannot enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in the tilted position, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the open state). When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the second special game may be started. Note that the variable prize ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

General prize slots 10 are provided at predetermined locations on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations in the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable prize ball device 6B) and are kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters any of the general prize slots 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are dispensed as prize balls.

Between the prize ball entry device 6A and the variable prize ball entry device 6B, a special variable prize ball entry device 7 with a large prize entry opening is provided. The special variable prize ball entry device 7 includes a large prize entry opening door driven by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and this door forms a large prize entry opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state.

For example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric mechanism) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) it. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14) are dispensed as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize slot, more prize balls are dispensed than when a game ball enters, for example, the first starting prize slot, the second starting prize slot, or the general prize slot 10.

The entry of a game ball into any of the prize-winning slots, including the general prize-winning slot 10, is also referred to as "winning a prize." In particular, winning a prize in the starting slots (first starting prize-winning slot, second starting prize-winning slot) is also called a "starting prize."

A standard symbol display unit 20 is provided at a predetermined location on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, the lower left of the game area). For example, the standard symbol display unit 20 consists of a 7-segment LED and displays a variable representation of multiple types of standard symbols as general identification information, distinct from special symbols. Standard symbols are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" through "9" or "-". The standard symbols may also include a pattern where all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of standard symbols is also called a standard symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided through which the game ball can pass. The game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41.

Below the regular symbol display unit 20, a regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is provided. The regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of regular symbol hold memories (the number of regular symbol games currently in a pending state) by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills and numerous obstacle pins that change the direction and speed of the game balls. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet for game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a, surrounding the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable prize ball device 7 in the game board 2.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in Figure 1), movable bodies 32A and 32B are provided, which operate according to the effects. Movable body lamps 9d are also provided on the movable bodies 32A and 32B. These movable body lamps 9d, along with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker lamp 9c, are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. Note that these main lamps 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamps 9d are composed of LEDs.

A ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. This handle is operated by the player or other user to launch the game balls towards the game area using a ball-launching device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, for holding (storing) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls dispensed by a designated ball dispenser so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a dispensing section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A, which can be grasped and tilted by the player, is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is equipped with a trigger button that the player can press. Operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, allowing the player to perform predetermined instruction operations by pressing it. Operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of how the game progresses)
The player rotates the ball-shooting handle 30 on the pachinko game machine 1, launching the game ball towards the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the regular symbol game is started using the regular symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous regular symbol game (i.e., the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the regular symbol game based on that passage cannot be executed immediately), the regular symbol game based on that passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this regular symbol game, if a specific regular symbol (a regular symbol that results in a win) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Win." On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol that results in a win (a regular symbol that results in a loss) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Loss." When a "Regular Symbol Win" occurs, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time (the second starting prize entry point becomes open).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening formed in the prize ball entry device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening formed in the variable prize ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the starting entry slot during the execution of a special feature game, or during the period when the game is controlled to a jackpot state as described later (i.e., if a starting entry occurs but the special feature game based on that entry cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special feature game based on that entry will be suspended until a predetermined maximum number of entries (for example, 4) are reached.

In the special feature game, if a specific special symbol (a winning symbol, such as "7," although the actual symbol may differ depending on the type of win described later) stops and is displayed as a guaranteed special symbol, it results in a "jackpot." If a special symbol other than the winning symbol (a losing symbol, such as "-") stops and is displayed, it results in a "miss."

After the display result in the special game is "Big Win," the game is controlled to a "Big Win Game" state, which is advantageous for the player.

During a jackpot, the large prize winning slot formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 7 opens in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls entering the large prize winning slot reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize winning slot can be open in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize winning slot remains open is called a round (round game). During a jackpot, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined maximum number of times (e.g., 15 times or 2 times).

In a jackpot state, players can win prize balls by getting them into the jackpot slot. Therefore, a jackpot state is advantageous for the player. The more rounds there are in a jackpot state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Furthermore, each "jackpot" has a designated jackpot type. For example, multiple types of opening mechanisms for the jackpot entry point (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability-increasing state, etc.) are provided, and the jackpot type is determined accordingly. There may also be jackpot types that award many prize balls, types that award few prize balls, or types that award almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (time-saving control) is implemented that shortens the average special symbol variation time (the period during which the special symbols vary) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (high-open control, high-base control) is also implemented that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point, such as by shortening the average normal symbol variation time (the period during which the normal symbols vary) or increasing the probability of a "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol game. Since the time-saving mode improves the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state, in addition to the time-saving control, probability variation control is implemented that increases the probability of the displayed result being "Big Win" compared to the normal state. The probability variation state is even more advantageous for the player because it improves the efficiency of special symbol variations and makes "Big Win" more likely.

The time-saving mode and the probability-increasing mode continue until one of the following termination conditions is met first: either a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the termination condition is the predetermined number of special symbol games played, it is also called a "count-restricted time-saving mode" (count-restricted time-saving mode, count-restricted probability-increasing mode, etc.).

The "normal state" refers to any game state other than advantageous states such as the jackpot state, the time-saving state, or the probability-increasing state. It is a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the same settings as its initial state (for example, when a system reset is performed, or when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power-on).

The state in which probability variation control is being performed is also called the high probability state, and the state in which probability variation control is not being performed is also called the low probability state. The state in which time reduction control is being performed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time reduction control is not being performed is also called the low base state. Combining these, the time reduction state is sometimes called the low probability high base state, the probability variation state is called the high probability high base state, and the normal state is called the low probability low base state. A state that is both high probability and low base is also called the high probability low base state.

Furthermore, the game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the jackpot entry point) during a jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variation state after the jackpot game state.

(Regarding the progress of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or enhance the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. These effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of such displays, they may also be performed using sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting and extinguishing of game effect lamps 9, the operation of movable parts 32A and 32B, or any effect device that includes some or all of these.

As a performance effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, designated as "left," "center," and "right," begin displaying variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) is displayed in the first or second special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also displayed (derived).

During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined "reach" mode (a reach is achieved). Here, a "reach" mode refers to a mode in which, when the stopped display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 constitutes part of the jackpot combination described later, the variable display of decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped continues.

Furthermore, a reach animation is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach pattern occurring during the variable display of decorative symbols. In pachinko machine 1, multiple types of reach animations are executed, each with a different probability (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special symbol game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) resulting in a "jackpot." Reach animations include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is "Big Win," the image display device 5 displays a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as the result of the variable display of decorative symbols (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is "Big Win"). For example, identical decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are aligned and displayed on predetermined active lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

If it's a "probability-increasing jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line. If it's a "non-probability-increasing jackpot (normal jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability-increasing symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability-increasing symbols (normal symbols). After a reach pattern is reached with non-probability-increasing symbols, an upgrade animation may be performed that ultimately results in a "probability-increasing jackpot."

If the display result of the special game is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may not become a reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "non-reach miss"). Also, if the display result is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may become a reach mode, and then the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called "reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "reach miss").

The Pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects, including displaying the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays). Other effects, such as a prediction effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot, are performed during the variable display of decorative symbols. These prediction effects include those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the currently running variable display, and those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable displays whose execution is pending). As a pre-read prediction effect, the machine may also perform an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays) to a mode different from the normal mode.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may perform a pseudo-consecutive display effect by temporarily pausing the display of the decorative pattern during its variable display and then resuming the variable display, thereby making a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game, a jackpot-related animation is performed to indicate the jackpot state. This animation may include an announcement of the number of rounds or an upgrade animation indicating an increase in the value of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, when, for example, a special game is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer-waiting demo is performed).

(Circuit board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15, as shown in Figure 2. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The term "various control boards" is a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on an electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17. By operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V from an external power source like a commercial power supply can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components, including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., DC 12V or DC 5V).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special symbol games (including management of held symbols), execution of regular symbol games (including management of held symbols), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 controls the progress of the game (implementing the functions of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as the variable patterns described later, the performance control commands described later, and various tables referenced when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains its contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted, either partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 continuously counts and updates numerical data representing various random values (game-specific random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. These game-specific random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (i.e., updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal pattern hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed through or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signals indicates that the passage or entry of a game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 receives reset signals, power-off signals, and clear signals from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal used to stop the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to a press operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (for example, signals to turn on solenoids 81 and 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81 for the regular electric mechanism and solenoid 82 for the large prize door.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies performance control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the performance control board 12 as part of the control of the game's progress. The performance control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12. These performance control commands include, for example, commands specifying various decision results from the main board 11 (e.g., display results of the special feature game (including the type of jackpot), the variation pattern used when executing the special feature game (details described later)), the game status (e.g., start and end of variable display, opening status of the jackpot opening, occurrence of a jackpot, number of reserved balls, game state), and the occurrence of errors.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11. It receives performance control commands and, based on the received commands, executes various performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including the driving of movable parts 32A and 32B, error notifications, power outage recovery notifications, and other various notifications).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control executes the program stored in the ROM 121, and together with the display control unit 123, performs processing to execute the performance (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining which performance to execute). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data such as various tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation may also instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when player operation is detected, indicating the operation content as appropriate).

The display control unit 123 is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the animation based on animation execution instructions from the animation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123, based on the execution instructions for the performance control CPU 120, supplies video signals corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5, thereby displaying the performance image on the image display device 5. It also performs display processing, outputting image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM region specified in the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area switch with each V-blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area allocated as the drawing area in one V-blank, and then in the next V-blank, it switches to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V-blank is displayed, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

Furthermore, the display control unit 123 generates an image for display on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) multiple layers. Therefore, the VRAM area contains a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating an image for display on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (combining) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower levels; images from higher layers have a higher display priority on the image display device 5, while images from lower layers have a lower display priority.

The VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 1 images, a Layer 2 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 2 images, and a Layer 3 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 3 images. Additionally, the VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is the area where the image drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to create the image to be displaced, and then the displacement image is applied to this image to create the displacement image.

The display image creation area is the area where images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to form a display image for display on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area are set to have the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), images drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area are set to have a lower display priority than images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5 (display priority: medium), and images drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are set to have the lowest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: low). In other words, Layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, Layer 2 is the middle layer with a lower image display priority than Layer 1, and Layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The Layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing images to display a first interface image, which includes a special symbol hold memory display area 5U that clearly displays the first and second special symbol hold memory counts, located at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second interface image, which includes small symbols with a smaller display area than the decorative symbols and a hold memory count display, located at the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5.

The Layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area located in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn in order to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the Layer 3 image rendering area is a rendering area that renders the background image in order to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 1 image drawing area (Layer 1 image), the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 2 image drawing area (Layer 2 image), and the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 3 image drawing area (Layer 3 image) are superimposed to generate an image that can be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In particular, as mentioned above, the images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) have the highest display priority and are therefore displayed as the topmost image in the image display device 5. The images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area (decorative patterns) have a lower display priority than the images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area and are therefore displayed as middle-layer images in the image display device 5. The images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area (background image) have the lowest display priority and are therefore displayed as low-layer images in the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the overlapping areas of the upper image and the lower image are not visible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images that are displayed transparently or temporarily hidden may be provided in the display area of the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound specification signal (a signal specifying the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal specifying the on/off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals to operate the movable parts 32A and 32B to the movable parts 32A and 32B or to the drive circuits that drive the movable parts 32A and 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving speakers 8L and 8R. Based on the specified audio signal, it drives speakers 8L and 8R and outputs the audio specified by the audio signal from speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9. Based on the lamp signal, it drives the game effect lamp 9 and turns it on/off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off status of the lamp.

Furthermore, the control of audio output, lamp on/off (supply of sound specification signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of movable parts 32A and 32B (supply of signals to operate movable parts 32A and 32B, etc.) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 keeps an updatable count of numerical data representing various random values (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. These random numbers for effects may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound specification signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the pachinko machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or the sub-boards of machine 1 may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command used in this embodiment. A performance control command is, for example, a two-byte structure, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is also "0". Note that the command form shown in Figure 3(A) is just an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command consists of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in the special game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it can be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern specified in the variation pattern specification command.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a performance control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpots to use if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 3(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command that indicates a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot A", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot B", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot C", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "Big Win" and the big win type will be "Non-Probability Variation Big Win," as well as the big win type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variation of decorative symbols in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state specification command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is set as the first game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variation control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is set as the second game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variation control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is set as the third game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability variation control are performed (high probability high base state, time-saving probability variation state). Furthermore, the time-saving bonus mode is sometimes simply referred to as the "bonus mode."

Command A0XXH is a win start command (also called the "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a visual effect indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening is open during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a jackpot opening after notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening has changed from open to closed during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a win end command that specifies the display of a visual effect at the end of a jackpot game.

In the win start and win end commands, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command. Alternatively, in the win start and win end commands, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big prize slot open notification command and the big prize slot after opening notification command, different EXT data may be set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (e.g., "0" to "10").

Command B100H is a first-start-entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first start-entry

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command that notifies the first reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory count notification command that notifies the second reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. The first reserved memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start-up-entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up-entry Furthermore, the first and second reserved memory count notification commands may be sent in response to the start of the special game execution when either the first or second start condition is met (i.e., when the number of reserved memories decreases).

Instead of sending the first and second pending memory count notification commands, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. That is, a total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify of an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 3(A) are just examples, and the system may omit some of these commands, use different commands in place of these, or add other commands. For example, a command to notify the number of prize balls dispensed based on each prize ball entering a prize slot, a gate passage notification command to notify when a game ball has passed through gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display rounds for which probability variation control or time reduction control is performed may be provided.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 4, on the main board 11, numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special display result, MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and MR4 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the game's effectiveness. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game-specific random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data that represents some or all of these random values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may use a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and update various numerical data via software to count numerical data that represents some of the random values MR1 to MR4.

The random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is used to determine whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state by treating the variable display result, such as a special symbol, as a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536." The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type ("Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," or "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot") when the variable display result is a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "100."

The random value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of several pre-defined types, and takes values in the range of "0" to "997".

The random value MR4 used for determining the result of the regular symbol display is a random value used to determine whether the variable display result in the regular symbol game using the regular symbol display unit 20 is a "regular symbol win" or a "regular symbol loss," and takes values in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 5 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for both the first and second special figures. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special figures.

The display result determination table is a table referenced in special symbol games using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the confirmed special symbol resulting in a variable display is derived and displayed, this table determines, based on the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state as a "jackpot."

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) is assigned to the special symbol display result of "Big Win" or "Miss," depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data showing the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result determination table, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" than when it is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) compared to the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when it is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state, such that when the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), the probability of determining whether or not to control it to a jackpot state is higher compared to when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 6(A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is referenced to determine the jackpot type from several types based on the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot state. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special symbol that was variably displayed (variable display) in the special symbol game was a first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or a second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination is assigned to one of several types of jackpots, such as "non-probability variation jackpot," "probability variation jackpot A," "probability variation jackpot B," and "probability variation jackpot C."

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 6(B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set as follows: "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," in which probability variation control and time reduction control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot," in which only time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) and this is repeated. On the other hand, the jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 2 times (so-called 2 rounds) and this is repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state resulting from "Non-Probability-increasing Jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. Therefore, "Bonus Win A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) bonus win, "Bonus Win B" as a 5-round (5R) bonus win, and "Bonus Win C" as a 2-round (2R) bonus win.

The probability variation control and time-saving control that begin after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the end of the jackpot game state of a non-probability variation jackpot is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed, or that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state before the completion of those 100 variable displays. Therefore, if the next jackpot is one of probability variation jackpots A to probability variation jackpot C, the probability variation control and time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called continuous jackpot state where jackpot game states occur continuously without going through the normal state. In other words, the probability variation state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. Therefore, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when a winning streak is about to end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 6(A), the assignment of determination values to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot" differs depending on whether the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. That is, when the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds. On the other hand, when the variable-display special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination values are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C." This configuration allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the first start condition for starting a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is met, or whether the second start condition for starting a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is met. In particular, in special symbol games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never controlled to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which result in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are more likely to enter the second starting entry point formed by the variable prize ball entry device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent occurrences of jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, thus preventing a decrease in game enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 6(A), the assignment of determination values for the "non-probability variation" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variation jackpot and the probability of a probability variation jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game.

Therefore, as mentioned above, just as the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol, the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol. For "Probability Variation Jackpot A," which has a large number of rounds, it is set to be more likely to be determined when it is a special game of the second special symbol than when it is a special game of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, even in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a different range of predetermined judgment values than those used in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". For example, in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a smaller judgment value than in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special feature game using the first or second special feature, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 7 shows the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are pre-prepared to correspond to cases where the variable display result is "miss," specifically when the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "not a reach" and when it is "a reach," as well as when the variable display result is "jackpot." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "not a reach" is called the "not a reach variation pattern" (also referred to as the "not a reach miss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "a reach" is called the "reach variation pattern" (also referred to as the "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the "not a reach variation pattern" and the "reach variation pattern" are included in the "miss variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" is called the "jackpot variation pattern."

The jackpot variation patterns and reach variation patterns include normal reach variation patterns, where the reach animation of a normal reach is executed, and super reach variation patterns, where the reach animation of a super reach is executed. In this embodiment, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Furthermore, in this embodiment, three types of super reach variation patterns are provided: super reach (no pseudo-consecutive wins), super reach (one pseudo-consecutive win), and super reach (two pseudo-consecutive wins), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of super reach variation patterns, or two or fewer types, may be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the Super Reach variation patterns include: a variation pattern (PB1-2) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-2) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (no pseudo-consecutive spins); a variation pattern (PB1-3) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-3) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (one pseudo-consecutive spins); and a variation pattern (PB1-4) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-4) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (two pseudo-consecutive spins).

As shown in Figure 7, the special symbol variation time for the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment, during which the reach animation is performed, is set to be shorter than that for the super reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of Super Reach, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach. Therefore, in both the Normal Reach and Super Reach variation patterns, the longer the special symbol variation time, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved items, the game state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 8, if the variable display result is a non-probability-changing jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table A from PB1-1 (variation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot A to C, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table B from PB1-1 (variation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 70%.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is one or less, then the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected, and using this miss variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-1 (variation pattern for no shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss), PA2-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss), and PA2-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) miss). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 at a rate of 2%.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is 2, then the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected. Using this miss variation pattern determination table B, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined 60% of the time, PA2-1 30% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is 3, the miss variation pattern determination table C is selected. Using this miss variation pattern determination table C, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 70% of the time, PA2-1 20% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is a high-base state (short-time state or probability-increasing state), the losing variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this losing variation pattern determination table D from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach loss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern). More specifically, in the losing variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 at a rate of 10%, PA2-2 at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 at a rate of 2%.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is illustrated as determining the variation pattern according to the type of jackpot when the result is a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection ratio of any of the multiple jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied regardless of the type of jackpot, for example, depending on the game state. By doing so, the variable display is performed with a variation pattern suitable for the game state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 2 may be a backup RAM, where part or all of its contents are backed up by a backup power supply generated on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor acting as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as the special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is the data necessary to restore the control state to what it was before the power outage occurred, based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage or the like. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data storage area 002SG150, as shown in Figure 9, which is a region for storing various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data storage area 002SG150 shown in Figure 9 includes a first special symbol hold storage unit 002SG151A, a second special symbol hold storage unit 002SG151B, a regular symbol hold storage unit 002SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 002SG152, a game control timer setting unit 002SG153, a game control counter setting unit 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 002SG155.

The first special symbol hold memory unit 002SG151A stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting entry opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a starting entry (first starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

The second special symbol hold memory unit 002SG151B stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the second starting entry opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, resulting in a starting entry (second starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

As an example, the first special symbol hold memory unit 002SG151A associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the first starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition when the game ball passes through (enters), as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Furthermore, the second special symbol hold memory unit 002SG151B associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the second starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected). Based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition during the passage (entry) of the game ball, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random value MR1 for variable display result determination, the random value MR2 for win type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. This data is stored as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

Thus, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151B indicates that the execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved. This reserved information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will be achieved based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition (when the game ball passes through the first start prize entry opening) and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the second start prize (when the game ball passes through the second start prize entry opening) are stored in separate reserved storage units in association with reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol hold storage unit 002SG151C stores hold information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display unit 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol hold storage unit 002SG151C associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data such as a random value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game balls, as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating whether it is on or off for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is equipped with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating the timer values for each of several types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is equipped with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count values for each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may also be equipped with a random counter for counting some or all of the random numbers used for the game, which can be updated by the CPU 103 via software.

The random counter in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores random values not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data representing random values MR1 to MR4, as random count values. The numerical data representing each random value is updated periodically or irregularly in response to software execution by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count values may update the random count values independently of the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or it may update the random count values by applying predetermined processing, such as scrambling or arithmetic processing, to all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 stores not only the program for performance control, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns.

As an example, ROM 121 stores a performance control pattern table containing multiple types of performance control patterns used by the performance control CPU 120 to control the performance operations of various performance devices (e.g., image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). The performance control patterns consist of data indicating the control content, corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The performance control pattern table should contain, for example, performance control patterns for when the special symbol is displayed, pre-announcement performance control patterns, and various other performance control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 is provided with a performance control data storage area 002SG190, as shown in Figure 10(A), which is a region for storing various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data storage area 002SG190 shown in Figure 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 002SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 002SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 002SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose status can be updated according to the performance operation status, such as the display status of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, or performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 is equipped with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer values for each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 is equipped with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count value for each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start-up winning command buffer 002SG194A, as shown in Figure 10(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194. The start-up winning command buffer 002SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the first special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") and a storage area corresponding to the first special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0"). Furthermore, the start-up winning command buffer 002SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the second special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0"). When a starting prize is awarded at the first or second starting prize slot, two commands—a starting slot award designation command (either the first or second starting slot award designation command) and a reserved memory count notification command (either the first or second reserved memory count notification command)—are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the starting prize award reception command buffer 002SG194A are allocated to store these starting slot award designation commands and reserved memory count notification commands separately in the first and second special symbol reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted one by one to higher positions, as described later, when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which store the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition was met, are cleared during the special symbol win waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

The CPU 120 for performance control stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 002SG194A when a win occurs at the first start entry slot. Similarly, when a win occurs at the second start entry slot, the CPU 120 stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 002SG194A. During a win, commands from the start entry slot specification command to the hold memory count notification command are transmitted sequentially. Therefore, upon command reception, the start entry slot specification command and the hold memory count notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" through "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol hold memory, respectively.

As shown in Figure 10(B), the commands stored in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 002SG194A are changed each time a variable display of decorative symbols is started. The commands stored in the entry corresponding to the previously completed variable display hold memory (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") are deleted, and the contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to the hold memory of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the hold memory of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 10(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols of the first special symbol hold memory is completed, each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3", respectively. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the variable-display pending memory at that time.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the main game control processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 11 is a flowchart showing the main game control processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the main game control process shown in Figure 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, setting the registers of built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions are met when the clear signal is in the off state, backup data exists, and the backup RAM is functioning correctly. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be storable in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors are checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3; Yes), the recovery process (Step S4) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The recovery process in Step S4 sets the work area based on the contents of RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state is restored to what it was when the power supply was interrupted. For example, if the special symbols were changing, it is sufficient that the special symbol changes can be resumed from the state before the interruption.

Furthermore, if the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3; No), the initialization process (Step S6) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process in Step S6 includes a clear process that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102. The execution of the clear process sets initial values in the work area.

After the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed, the CPU 103 sets the registers of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically triggered at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, the loop process begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

The CPU 103, which has executed the main game control processing, receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 12. Upon starting the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 12, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, it performs a predetermined main-side error processing to diagnose an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and, if necessary, generates a warning based on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, it executes a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.), start information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the game entered a probability variation state, etc.), which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output processing, the main board 11 performs a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the random numbers used for gameplay via software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution and management of special symbol games, control of the jackpot game state, and control of the game state are realized.

Following the special symbol processing, the normal symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, enabling the execution and management of the normal symbol game based on detection signals from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through the gate 41), as well as the opening control of the variable prize ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal symbol holds is displayed by lighting the normal symbol hold display 25C.

After the normal pattern processing is executed, the following may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing: processing when a power outage occurs, processing for dispensing prize balls, etc. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set to transmit performance control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, interrupts are enabled, and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Figure 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process performed in step S25 shown in Figure 12 as a special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first performs the start prize determination process (step S101).

In the start-up prize determination process, the occurrence of a start-up prize is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved number of items. When a start-up prize occurs, a random value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern, and this is stored as reserved information. Alternatively, a process may be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random value. After storing the reserved information and the number of reserved items, a transmission setting is made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the occurrence of a start-up prize, the number of reserved items, and the prediction judgment. The performance control command for a start-up prize, thus set for transmission, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 12.

After executing the start-up prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag in RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to send the corresponding performance control command to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on a random value for determining the display result, it is determined (pre-determined) whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol will be a "jackpot," and if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1," and the special symbol normal processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority processing). Furthermore, the system may store the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots, and ensure that the conditions for starting the special game are met in that order (also known as "sequential execution").

When making various decisions based on random values, the various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision values compared with the random values are assigned to the decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, the various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes determining one of several variation patterns using a random value for variation pattern determination, based on a pre-determined result such as whether the display result should be "jackpot" or not. When the variation pattern is determined during the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process terminates.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special feature game (special feature variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not a reach occurs, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach effect, etc.). It is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to vary the special symbols, and measuring the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process terminates.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes stopping the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the display to stop (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbols. If the display result is "Big Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "Miss", and the game is controlled in a time-saving state or a probability variation state, and the end of the number of spins is achieved, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

Step S114, the pre-jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "4". This pre-jackpot opening process includes settings to start round execution and open the jackpot opening in the jackpot game state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot". When opening the jackpot opening, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door. At this time, for example, the maximum opening period and the maximum number of rounds executed are set, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

Step S115, the jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When returning the jackpot opening to the closed state, the process includes stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door, then updating the value of the special feature process flag to "6", and ending the jackpot opening process.

Step S116, the post-jackpot opening processing, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening processing includes determining whether the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit, and setting the game to terminate the jackpot state if the upper limit is reached. If the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5". If the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening processing ends.

The jackpot termination process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "7". This jackpot termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the duration of the ending sequence (a visual effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state) has elapsed, and various settings for initiating probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are completed, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

(Starting point prize determination process)
Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the start-up prize determination process (S101) shown in Figure 13. In the start-up prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first start-up switch 22A is ON or OFF based on a detection signal from the first start-up switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start-up prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A (002SGS101). At this time, if the first start-up switch 22A is ON (002SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special feature reserve memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for a special feature game using the first special feature, is at a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory count) (002SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special feature reserve memory count by, for example, reading the first reserve memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserve memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. If the number of reserved first special symbols stored in 002SGS102 is not at the upper limit (002SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off (002SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved special symbols has reached its upper limit (002SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is turned on or not, based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B, which is provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B (002SGS104). In this case, if the second start port switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved special symbols for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, is determined to be at a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit number of reserved symbols) (002SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol by reading the second reserved ball count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved ball count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. If the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is not the upper limit (002SGS105; N), the CPU 103 sets the value stored in the start-up buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 to "2" (002SGS106).

After executing either process 002SGS103 or 002SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols, corresponding to the value stored in the start-up buffer, is updated by adding 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start-up buffer value is "2", the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up entry-level slot and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. The second reserved symbol count value is also updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the second start-up entry-level slot and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total number of reserved symbols is also updated by adding 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, can be updated by adding 1.

After executing the processing in 002SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 (002SGS109). The numerical data representing each extracted random value and the start gate buffer value are stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol hold storage unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols or decorative symbols is a "jackpot," and further, if the variable display result is a "jackpot," to determine the type of jackpot. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbols or decorative symbols. The CPU 103, by executing the processing of 002SGS109, extracts numerical data representing all of the random values used to determine the variable display pattern, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, the transmission settings for the start-up entry designation command are configured according to the start-up buffer value (002SGS111). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the settings for transmitting the first start-up entry designation command are configured to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the first start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Conversely, when the start-up buffer value is "2", the settings for transmitting the second start-up entry designation command are configured to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the second start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The start-up entry designation command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing shown in S27 in Figure 12.

Following the processing of 002SGS111, the CPU 103 configures the settings for sending a pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (002SGS113), for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The pending memory count notification command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing shown in S27 in Figure 12.

After executing the process in 002SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). If the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. Conversely, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS116), and then the start port entry process is terminated. This ensures that even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start port entry of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of valid start ports from both can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern processing as usual)
Figure 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Figure 13 as a normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol hold memory count is "0" (step 002SGS141). The second special symbol hold memory count is the number of hold memories for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, as displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 002SGS141, the second hold memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0" or not.

If the number of reserved symbols in the second special symbol storage unit is not "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; N), the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out from the second special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 002SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 002SGS142, the second special feature hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the second special feature hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the second special feature hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the second special feature hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 002SGS143).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 002SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol hold memory count is "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special symbol hold memory count is "0" or not (step 002SGS145). The first special symbol hold memory count is the number of hold memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, as displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 002SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first hold memory count value stored in the first hold memory counter and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. Thus, the process of step 002SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 002SGS141 that the second special symbol hold memory count is "0", and it determines whether the first special symbol hold memory count is "0" or not. As a result, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the execution of the special feature game using the second special feature is not limited to prioritizing the execution of the special feature game using the first special feature. For example, the execution of the special feature game may be initiated in the order in which the game ball enters (passes through) the first and second starting prize entry points and a starting prize is generated. In this case, it would suffice to provide a table that stores data that can identify the order in which starting prizes occurred, and to determine whether to start the execution of the special feature game using the first or second special feature from that stored data.

If the number of reserved symbols in the first special symbol storage is not "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; N), then numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read from the first special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 002SGS146). The numerical data read at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 002SGS146, the first special symbol hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the first special symbol hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the first special symbol hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the first special symbol hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 002SGS147).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 002SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

In step 002SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 5 is selected and set as the table used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols, which is the special symbol display result, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data representing the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result, "jackpot" or "miss", to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 002SGS150). In step 002SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) where the probability change flag is on, then if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (probability change state), it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if not, it is determined to be a "miss". Furthermore, if the probability variation flag is off and the machine is in a low probability state (low probability, low base state in this feature), the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result will be judged as a "jackpot" if it falls within the range of 1 to 219, and as a "miss" if it does not.

Thus, in the display result determination table selected in step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability). Therefore, in the processing of step 002SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display such as the special symbol game starts is in a high probability state, different determination data (determination values) are used to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot." As a result, when the game state is in a high probability state, the probability of determining a "jackpot" is higher than when it is in a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 002SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned ON (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 6(A) is selected and set as the table used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 002SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, the system determines which of the several jackpot types it is based on whether the numerical data representing the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches the determination value assigned to each of the jackpot types in the jackpot type determination table: "non-probability jackpot," "probability jackpot A," "probability jackpot B," or "probability jackpot C" (step 002SGS154).

In step 002SGS154, the type of jackpot is determined, and the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variation state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. This is determined before the confirmed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. The determined jackpot type is then stored by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the value stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 002SGS155), in accordance with the determined jackpot type. For example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" which corresponds to a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation A" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot A, it should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation B" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot B, it should be set to "2". If it is "probability variation C" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot C, it should be set to "3". After processing in step 002SGS155, proceed to step 002SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the result is "incorrect" in step 002SGS150 (step 002SGS150; N), the process in step 002SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a confirmed special symbol in accordance with the prior determination result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determination result of the jackpot type when the game is in a jackpot state. For example, in accordance with the prior determination result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", the special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss, is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 002SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 002SGS154 is "probability variation jackpot A", the special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability-increasing jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "probability-increasing jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Note that these guaranteed special symbols are just examples; other guaranteed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as guaranteed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 002SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol is "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; Y), the system performs a predetermined demo display setting (step 002SGS158) before ending the normal special symbol processing. This demo display setting determines whether a performance control command (customer-waiting demo specification command) specifying a demonstration display (demo screen display), such as displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, has already been sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer-waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. If it has not been sent, the system performs the necessary settings to send the customer-waiting demo specification command before terminating the demo display setting.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be explained. When the performance control board 12 receives power voltage from the power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the main performance control process as shown in the flowchart of Figure 16. When the main performance control process shown in Figure 16 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Subsequently, a determination is made as to whether the timer interrupt flag is on or off (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed while waiting.

Furthermore, on the performance control board 12, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets to interrupt disable. However, if a CPU that does not automatically set to interrupt disable is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). In response to the interrupt caused by the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt processing. In this command reception interrupt processing, the performance control command is received from a predetermined input port among the input ports included in I/O 125 that receives control signals transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The performance control command received at this time is stored, for example, in a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122. Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control sets itself to enable interrupts and then terminates the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, to allow the performance control process to confirm which performance control command was received and what the performance control command identifies, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 is turned on. Furthermore, if the performance control command identifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, various performance devices are controlled, such as the display operation of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of movable parts 32A and 32B. Furthermore, the control content of the performance operations using the various performance devices is determined, decided, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a random number update process for performances is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the random numbers used for performances on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the random number update process for performances (step S77), a demo performance control process (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko game machine 1, a background display update process (step S79) for updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to another background image, and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

In this embodiment, the background display update process selects and displays one of the following: a first background image corresponding to the first performance mode, a second background image corresponding to the second performance mode, a third background image corresponding to the third performance mode, and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth performance mode. The first and second background images can be displayed when the game state is normal, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is low probability/high base, and the fourth background image can be displayed when the game state is high probability/high base. Furthermore, the switching between the first and second background images occurs when certain display conditions are met, such as when a variable display of an SP reach is executed, or when one of the background images has been displayed continuously for a predetermined period.

The menu display process includes, in addition to displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, further processing to adjust the volume output from speakers 8L and 8R, and to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9, in response to the player's operation of the push buttons 31B, etc., while the menu screen is displayed.

Furthermore, in the demo performance control processing, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer-waiting demo performance start timer, based on the receipt of a customer-waiting demo specification command, and start the customer-waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer-waiting demo performance start timer is operating or while the customer-waiting demo performance is running, the customer-waiting demo performance start timer should be cleared, the customer-waiting demo performance should be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 should be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process processing)
Figure 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 16 as part of the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 17, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a hold display update process (step S161) which updates the hold memory display (first hold display 002SG101 and second hold display 002SG102) in the special hold memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the contents of the start-winning received command buffer 002SG194A, such as a shift display. After the hold display update process is executed, one of the processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, for example, according to the value of the performance process flag provided in RAM 122.

Furthermore, in step S161, a pre-announcement setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process. This process involves determining, deciding, and setting for executing a pre-announcement effect (for example, an effect that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 when a prize is won at the start of play.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process to determine whether or not to start the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display results and variation patterns identified by the performance control command, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (confirmed decorative symbols), the mode of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the presence or absence of various performances such as reach performances and various予告 (pre-announcement) performances, as well as their mode and start timing, are determined. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute performances) is set, reflecting these determinations. Afterward, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. Upon receiving the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable parts 32A and 32B, output voice and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and turn on/off/flashe the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops displaying the confirmed decorative symbols, which are the display result of the decorative symbols, in response to, for example, when an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command is received from the main board 11 specifying that the confirmed decorative symbols should be stopped displaying. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3," and the variable display performance processing ends.

The special symbol win waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol win waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a performance control command from the main board 11 specifying the start of the jackpot game state. If it receives a performance control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it updates the value of the performance process flag to "4". If it does not receive a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state and the waiting time for such a command has elapsed, it determines that the display result in the special symbol game was "miss" and updates the value of the performance process flag to its initial value of "0". After updating the value of the performance process flag, the special symbol win waiting process terminates.

The jackpot animation processing in step S174 is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "4". In this jackpot animation processing, the animation control CPU 120 sets, for example, an animation control pattern corresponding to the animation content in the jackpot game state, and executes various animation controls in the jackpot game state based on that setting. Furthermore, in the jackpot animation processing, in response to receiving, for example, a command from the main board 11 specifying the termination of the jackpot game state, the value of the animation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the ending animation processing, and the jackpot animation processing terminates.

The ending sequence processing in step S175 is executed when the value of the sequence process flag is "5". In this ending sequence processing, the sequence control CPU 120 sets sequence control patterns corresponding to events such as the end of a jackpot game state, and executes various sequence controls for the ending sequence at the end of the jackpot game state based on these settings. Afterward, the value of the sequence process flag is updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending sequence processing ends.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the CPU 120 for performance control will be explained. Figure 18 is a flowchart of the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 17. In the variable display start setting process, the CPU 120 for performance control first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 002SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol hold memory in the start-up winning received command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number (step 002SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Furthermore, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273; Y), for example, the various command data and flags stored in the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol hold memory in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer are shifted one buffer number higher (step 002SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, and therefore it is erased.

After step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274 is executed, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) and the variation pattern (step 002 SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this embodiment, when the received variable display result specification command is a second variable display result specification command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbols) where three symbols are aligned as "7" as the stopping symbols. Furthermore, when the received variable display result specification command is a third to fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to probability variation jackpots B through C, the CPU 120 determines the stopping symbols from among multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Furthermore, when the received variable display result specification command is a fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a non-probability variation jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols where three symbols are aligned as even numbers as the stopping symbols.

Furthermore, if the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a non-probability-increasing jackpot, it may be possible to determine the stopping symbol from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"), similar to the case where the received variable display result specification command is the third to fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to probability-increasing jackpots B to C. In this case, by further standardizing the effects during variable display in jackpot games and probability-increasing states, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the game state is a probability-increasing state or a time-saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times, and furthermore, whether the time-saving state ends after 100 variable displays or continues until 10,000 variable displays, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, if the received variable display result specification command is a first variable display result specification command corresponding to a loss, and the variable display's variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, then a combination of decorative symbols (losing symbols) where three symbols are mismatched is determined as the stopping symbols. Also, if the received variable display result specification command is a first variable display result specification command corresponding to a loss, and the variable display's variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, then a combination of symbols where the left and right symbols are the same but the middle symbol is different (losing symbols) is determined as the stopping symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the CPU 120 for performance control can, for example, extract a random number to determine the stop symbol and use a stop symbol determination table, which associates data and numerical values indicating combinations of decorative symbols, to determine the stop symbol for the decorative symbols. That is, the stop symbol can be determined by selecting data indicating combinations of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether the variation pattern specification command read in step 002SGS275 is a variation pattern specification command for a super reach (variation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) accompanied by a pseudo-consecutive win (step 002SGS277). If the variation pattern specification command read in step 002SGS275 is not a variation pattern specification command for a super reach, that is, if it is a variation pattern specification command for a normal reach (step 002SGS278; N), the process proceeds to step 002SGS383.

If the variation pattern specification command read in step 002SGS275 is a variation pattern specification command for a super reach, the display colors of the stopped symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5C that form the reach state are determined in step 002SGS276 from the data indicating the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols that are determined and stored in the decorative symbol display result storage area. Then, using the pseudo-consecutive count display determination table shown in Figure 49(C), the display color of the pseudo-consecutive count display to be displayed when the first re-variable display starts, that is, the pseudo-consecutive count display indicating that two variable displays will start in that variable display, including the initial variable display (for example, "×2"), is determined and stored (step 002SGS278).

Next, in step 002SGS275, it is determined whether the variable pattern specification command read is a super reach variable pattern with two pseudo-consecutive displays (step 002SGS279). If it is determined to be a super reach variable pattern with two pseudo-consecutive displays (step 002SGS279; Y), the display color of the pseudo-consecutive display to be displayed when the second re-variable display starts is determined and stored using the pseudo-consecutive display count determination table shown in Figure 49(C). This pseudo-consecutive display count indicates that three variable displays will start in that variable display, including the first variable display (for example, "×3") (step 002SGS280).

Then, if it is determined in step 002SGS279 that the variation pattern is not one of two pseudo-consecutive wins, or if the process in step 002SGS280 is executed, a start-wait timer is set to begin displaying the number of pseudo-consecutive wins (step 002SGS281), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS282.

Next, in step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and the process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

Furthermore, the process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the illumination of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all arranged sequentially in chronological order and associated with each process data n (numbered from 1 to N).

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, and operation unit control execution data 1) (step 002 SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a variation pattern on the image display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. Also, to control the on/off operation of the various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, to enable sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13.

Next, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern specification command (step 002SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30ms. The performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative and sub-patterns to the VRAM every predetermined time. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal to the image display device 5 corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative and sub-patterns. Then, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display performance processing (step S172) (step 002SGS287), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Decorative design and small design)
Next, the decorative patterns and sub-patterns will be explained based on Figures 19 to 22. Figure 19 is a diagram illustrating the decorative patterns and sub-patterns. Figure 20 shows the configurations for the first performance mode (A1) and (A2), the second performance mode (B1) and (B2), the third performance mode (C1) and (C2), and the fourth performance mode (D1) and (D2). Figure 21 shows the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative patterns in the first performance mode (A1) and (A2), and the second performance mode (B1) and (B2). Figure 22 shows the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative patterns in the third performance mode (C1) and (C2), and the fourth performance mode (D1) and (D2), and (E) is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the variable display of the decorative patterns and sub-patterns.

In Figure 19, the sizes of the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns are shown in the proportions they appear in when displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S.

As shown in Figure 19, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R when the game state is in a low-base state (for low-base state) consist of: a number display section 002SG051 consisting of a circular number base section and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section; a character display section 002SG052 displaying 10 types of characters corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display section 002SG051 (not all characters are shown); an information display section 002SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base section and information about the characters displayed on the front of the information base section (for example, the character's name in this embodiment); and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG054 that surrounds the number display section 002SG051, the character display section 002SG052, and the information display section 002SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 002SG053 is shown to display the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various other information besides the name (for example, the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed as long as it relates to the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052.

Furthermore, when the game state is in the high-base state, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R (for the high-base state) consist of a number display section 002SG061 consisting of numbers from "0" to "9", and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG064 that surrounds the number display section 002SG061. The decorative symbols for the high-base state do not have character display sections or information display sections like the decorative symbols for the low-base state.

Furthermore, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts, as well as a small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbols consist of the numbers "0" through "9" displayed in the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In this embodiment, while the numbers of the decorative symbols and the small symbols correspond, it is not necessarily required that all the numbers of both symbols correspond. For example, the numbers of the small symbols may be fewer than the numbers "0" through "9" of the decorative symbols, ranging from "1" to "5," or they may be different symbols or figures from the numbers of the decorative symbols.

Next, we will explain the decorative patterns (for low base settings), decorative patterns (for high base settings), and small patterns.

<Display Timing of Each Symbol> The decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) are displayed almost continuously in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the power of the image display device 5 is on. However, they may be erased (hidden) when, for example, an SP reach (super reach) effect is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo effect is executed. On the other hand, the small symbols are always displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the decorative symbols while the power of the image display device 5 is on, and continue to be displayed even when the decorative symbols are erased as described above. However, they may be erased when information with a higher display priority than the small symbols (for example, an error message) is displayed.

<Variable Display Modes for Each Symbol> For decorative symbols (for low base state), variable display is performed in the first performance mode (described later) by scrolling the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a linear motion from top to bottom. In the second performance mode, variable display is performed by scrolling the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved motion from back to front.

The decorative symbols (for high base state) are displayed variably in the third performance mode described later, rotating around a vertical axis in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the fourth performance mode, the decorative symbols are displayed variably in the fourth performance mode, scrolling linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or presentation mode, the small symbols in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR will display a variable pattern through a switching display (a display where the symbols are updated) where the symbols from "0" to "9" switch.

Furthermore, while the "scrolling display" and "switching display" described above are broadly both included in "switching display" where patterns are switched, as described later, a "scrolling display" may be defined as a display where multiple patterns are updated by a pattern that is displayed in frame or fade-in within the display area, then moves, and then moves out of the display area or fades out. A "switching display" may be defined as a display where multiple patterns are updated by repeatedly showing and hiding (erasing) or rotating within a predetermined position in the display area, without moving, fading in, or fading out.

The decorative patterns (for low base state) and decorative patterns (for high base state) include not only the numerical display sections 002SG051 and 002SG061, but also the character display section 002SG052, the information display section 002SG053, and the base display section 002SG054, whereas the small patterns consist only of the numerical display section.

Furthermore, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) are displayed at the same size in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, while they are displayed at a slightly smaller size in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C than in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, creating a sense of depth. On the other hand, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) are displayed at the same size in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are arranged linearly in the left-right direction. The small symbols are displayed at the same size in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR.

Furthermore, in the low base state, the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are positioned approximately horizontally at the approximate center of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. However, the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is positioned slightly above the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, thus being positioned slightly above the approximate center of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the high base state, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is positioned approximately horizontally at the approximate center of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. Therefore, in the high base state, the decorative pattern that stops and is displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is positioned closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 than the decorative pattern that stops and is displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the low base state (see Figure 20).

Furthermore, using the size of the numerical display section 002SG051 of the decorative design (for low base state) as a reference, the numerical display section 002SG061 of the decorative design (for high base state) is larger, while the numerical display section of the small design is smaller. In other words, the numerical display sections are larger in the order of decorative design (high base state), decorative design (low base state), and small design (numerical display section size: decorative design (high base state) > decorative design (low base state) > small design). The overall size of each design also follows a similar relationship to that of the numerical display section.

Thus, in the low base state, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are made larger, and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5C are shifted to create a sense of depth and enhance interest. However, in the high base state, where the average variable display period is short, the decorative symbols are positioned closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby increasing the recognizability of the decorative symbols (see Figure 20).

Furthermore, the numerical display sections of the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns are each formed using stereoscopic images (3D images, three-dimensional images). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created using 3D computer graphics (a virtual three-dimensional object constructed (modeled) using points placed on a three-dimensional coordinate system as vertices, with information to reproduce materials on each surface, and reproduced by illuminating the object with arbitrary light intensity and light source position). However, it may also be an image that can be viewed three-dimensionally when displayed on a three-dimensional display device (for example, an image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of a right-eye image (R image) and a left-eye image (L image), a backlight that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front of the image liquid crystal panel, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel provided on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel at a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel).

Furthermore, among the decorative symbols, the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, and 9" correspond to "probability-increasing jackpots," which are controlled to a high-probability, high-base state after the jackpot ends. The even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, and 8" correspond to "non-probability-increasing jackpots," which are controlled to a low-probability, high-base state after the jackpot ends. It is also possible that even in the case of a probability-increasing jackpot, the jackpot combination may be predetermined by the normal symbols.

<Character Display Section> The character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed using a non-stereoscopic image (2D image). However, the character display section 002SG052 may also be formed using a stereoscopic image (3D image). Furthermore, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 performs predetermined actions (operations) at the start and stop of the variable display, as described later. On the other hand, the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern do not have a character display section.

<Information Display Unit> The information display unit 002SG053 for the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed using a non-stereoscopic image (2D image). Alternatively, the information display unit 002SG053 may be formed using a stereoscopic image (3D image). Furthermore, the information display unit 002SG053 displays the "name," which is information related to the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052. As described later, the "name" is erased when the variable display starts. On the other hand, the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern do not have an information display unit.

<Base Display Section> The base display section 002SG054 of the decorative design (for low base state) displays the decorative part that adorns the character on the front and is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image). The base display section 002SG064 of the decorative design (for high base state) is formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image). Both the base display section 002SG054 and the base display section 002SG064 may be formed as stereoscopic images (3D images). Furthermore, the size of the base display section 002SG064 of the decorative design (for high base state) is larger than the size of the base display section 002SG054 of the decorative design (for low base state). On the other hand, the small design does not have a base display section.

<Main Colors> The color of the numbers displayed in the number display sections 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) is "blue" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers, and "red" for probability-increasing symbols consisting of odd numbers. Furthermore, the number base sections other than the numbers, and the base display sections 002SG054 and 002SG064, may be the same color as the numbers, or they may be displayed in a different color.

Furthermore, the characters displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 should be composed of their own original colors, without being influenced by the main color. Also, as characters corresponding to the probability variation symbols, for example, if there are separate ally and enemy characters, it is preferable that the character is an ally character. Alternatively, it is preferable that the character is a central figure in the story, such as the protagonist or a character closely related to the protagonist, among the ally characters.

Furthermore, as described above, when applying the narrative concepts of allies and enemies, the preview and special reach sequences are generally presented from the perspective of the allies. If the special reach sequence involves a battle between allies and enemies, the player is notified that the outcome is favorable to them (e.g., a jackpot) if the allies win.

Furthermore, the primary color with the highest occupancy rate across the entire area of each decorative symbol (low base state) and decorative symbol (high base state) may be the same color as the number. Also, while the regular symbols consisting of even numbers were traditionally "blue" and the bonus symbols consisting of odd numbers were "red," these may be other colors as well.

Furthermore, in high-base states, as described later, the scrolling display is performed at high speed, requiring the decorative symbols to be more visually appealing than those used in low-base states. Therefore, stop symbol announcements and spin start announcements are often implemented by incorporating effect displays with the decorative symbols. Consequently, decorative symbols (high-base states) are primarily composed of the number display unit 002SG061, and are characterized by a larger size ratio compared to decorative symbols (low-base states) which are composed of both character and number display units.

Although not shown in the illustrations of this embodiment, the numbers in the decorative patterns (for the high base state) may be made more visually striking than those in the decorative patterns (for the low base state) by making their operation more complex or design-oriented, thereby enhancing the visual appeal of the high base state.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers in the small symbols is "yellow" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers, and "yellow-green" for bonus symbols consisting of odd numbers. In this embodiment, regular symbols consisting of even numbers were "yellow" and bonus symbols consisting of odd numbers were "yellow-green," but other colors may be used. Also, numbers identical to decorative symbols may be the same color as the decorative symbols.

Regarding the design of the smaller symbols, it is acceptable to simply scale down and display the same material as the numbers of the decorative symbols in the low-base and high-base states. However, rather than enhancing the visual effect through design, it is preferable that the design be simpler than the numbers of the decorative symbols (for example, flat rather than three-dimensional, and with simple colors without gloss or other finishes).

As shown in Figure 20, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation is capable of executing one of the following presentation modes: a first presentation mode (see Figures 20(A1) and (A2)), a second presentation mode (see Figures 20(B1) and (B2)), a third presentation mode (see Figures 20(C1) and (C2)), and a fourth presentation mode (see Figures 20(D1) and (D2)). The first and second presentation modes are executable when the game state is controlled to a low probability, low base state. The third presentation mode is executable when the game state is controlled to a low probability, high base state, and the fourth presentation mode is executable when the game state is controlled to a high probability, high base state.

As shown in Figure 20(A1), in the first performance mode, decorative symbols for the low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first background image 002SG081, which depicts a daytime city scene, is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20(A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scrolling display (first scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In detail, as shown in Figures 21 (A1) and (A2), each decorative pattern is displayed frame-in from the top edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards, then moves linearly downwards and is displayed frame-out from the bottom edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards. Furthermore, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed frame-in (for example, the "3" pattern) passes the decorative pattern stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative pattern (for example, the "4" pattern) is displayed frame-in and moves downwards. In other words, as shown in Figure 21 (A2), when the preceding "3" decorative symbol is passing the stopping position, the preceding "2" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol are not visible. However, after the preceding "3" decorative symbol has passed the stopping position, the preceding "3" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", they return to "0", repeating the update display from "0" to "9". Therefore, the decorative symbols from "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 screen displays the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, and small symbols. The special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F located at the bottom of the image display device 5 screen display the first reserved display 002SG101 and the second reserved display 002SG102, which correspond to variable displays whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103, which corresponds to variable displays that are currently being executed. Note that these first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in all performance modes, and therefore their explanation will be omitted below.

As shown in Figure 20 (B1), in the second performance mode, decorative symbols for the low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the second background image 002SG082, which depicts a daytime wilderness landscape, is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is achieved by a scrolling display (second scrolling display) that moves in a curved manner from the back to the front of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For details, as shown in Figures 21 (B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative patterns are displayed framing-in, approaching the center of the screen from the upper left edge of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the upper right edge of the right decorative pattern display area 5R. They then move downwards, moving away from the left and right sides of the screen, and are displayed framing-out from the lower left edge of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the lower right edge of the right decorative pattern display area 5R. The central decorative pattern is displayed enlarged, approaching the foreground from the back of the screen in the central decorative pattern display area 5C, before being displayed framing-out.

Furthermore, when the preceding decorative symbol (for example, the "2" symbol) displayed within the frame passes the stopping position of the decorative symbol, which is set at the vertical center of the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the following decorative symbol (for example, the "3" symbol) is displayed within the frame and moves toward the center of the screen. In other words, as shown in Figure 21 (B2), when the preceding "2" symbol is passing near the stopping position, both the preceding "2" symbol and the following "3" symbol are visible, but after the preceding "2" symbol has passed the stopping position, the following "3" symbol and the "4" symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", they return to "0", and the update display from "0" to "9" is repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" through "9" are displayed in a loop within each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in Figure 20(C1), in the third performance mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the third background image 002SG083, which depicts a city scene at dusk, is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20(C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by rotation in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, rotating around a rotation axis that faces vertically.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 22(C1) and (C2), the decorative pattern in the third display mode has a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b, which is the opposite surface of the first surface 5a. The first surface 5a displays the preceding decorative pattern (for example, the "3" pattern). On the other hand, when the first surface 5a is facing forward, it is not possible to determine whether the subsequent decorative pattern (for example, the "4" pattern) is displayed on the second surface 5b. In other words, because the base display section 002SG064 has low transparency (is opaque), it is not possible to see through the decorative pattern displayed on the second surface 5b from the front (to see it through the decorative pattern from the front).

Furthermore, the decorative patterns are rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in a plan view). By rotating in the order of the first face 5a, second face 5b, first face 5a, second face 5b, and so on, the numbers increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", and so on, returning to "0" after "9", and the update display from "0" to "9" is repeated. In other words, the rotation display of the decorative patterns is performed by looping the display of the decorative patterns from "0" to "9" in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 22 (C2), when the first face 5a is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from its front-facing position to display the second face 5b, the second face 5b displays the decorative pattern that follows the decorative pattern displayed on the first face 5a (for example, the decorative pattern of "3") (for example, the decorative pattern of "4"). Then, although not specifically illustrated, when the second face 5b is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from its front-facing position to display the first face 5a, the first face 5a displays the decorative pattern that follows the decorative pattern displayed on the second face 5b (for example, the decorative pattern of "4") (for example, the decorative pattern of "5").

Furthermore, the upper right portion of the image display device 5 screen displays a right-hand shooting notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "Right-Hand Shooting" to inform the player to shoot to the right. The lower left portion of the image display device 5 screen displays a time-saving display 002SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining," where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed.

As shown in Figure 20(D1), in the fourth performance mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the fourth background image 002SG084, depicting a night city scene, is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20(C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scrolling display (third scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In detail, as shown in Figures 22 (D1) and (D2), each decorative pattern is displayed frame-in from the top edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards, then moves linearly downwards and is displayed frame-out from the bottom edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards. Furthermore, when a preceding decorative pattern displayed frame-in (for example, the "3" pattern) passes the decorative pattern stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative pattern (for example, the "4" pattern) is displayed frame-in and moves downwards. In other words, as shown in Figure 22 (D1), when the preceding "3" decorative symbol is passing the stopping position, the preceding "2" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol are not visible. However, as shown in Figure 22 (D2), after the preceding "3" decorative symbol has passed the stopping position, the preceding "3" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol become visible. Thus, the decorative symbols increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", they return to "0", repeating the increase from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative symbols from "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the upper right corner of the image display device 5 screen displays a right-hand shooting notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "Right-Hand Shooting" to inform the player to shoot to the right.

Furthermore, in the second performance mode, the name displayed on the decorative symbol information display unit 002SG053 is always hidden, even when the decorative symbol is stopped. In the third and fourth performance modes, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner without including the information display unit 002SG053. Thus, in the first performance mode, displaying the information display unit 002SG053 draws attention to the character's name, allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character. In contrast, in the second and third performance modes, hiding the information display unit 002SG053 allows players to focus on the variable display and pre-announcement effects rather than the character. It should be noted that not only the name displayed on the information display unit 002SG053, but the information display unit 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in Figure 22(E), the decorative patterns and sub-patterns have different variable display modes. For example, during the period when the decorative patterns are displayed by high-speed scrolling, it takes a period of Ta2 for one decorative pattern to be displayed from the top edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until it is displayed from the bottom edge. In other words, it takes a period of Ta2 for one decorative pattern to be displayed and for that decorative pattern display to end. On the other hand, during the above period Ta2, the sub-patterns of losing combinations are switched (updated) and displayed multiple times (for example, five times).

For more details, if the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (displaying 30 frames per second), then 10 frames of a decorative pattern will be displayed from the start to the end of its display, and this period Ta2 is approximately 0.3 seconds.

On the other hand, the smaller symbols are displayed in pairs of two frames each (for example, "635", "175", "461", "532", "913", etc.), with each pair appearing every two frames (period Ta1). In other words, during the period Ta2 from the display of one decorative symbol until that symbol finishes displaying, the smaller symbols switch between five losing combinations, each displayed for the duration of period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). Although each losing combination is displayed for the duration of period Ta1, it is only for a brief moment (approximately 0.06 seconds), making it difficult to visually confirm.

Furthermore, based on the determination that the variable display result will be a losing display result, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop displaying the confirmed losing combination decorative symbol (for example, "326"), it will switch the display so that the small symbol of the losing combination ("326") is not displayed after starting the variable display of the said decorative symbol and before stopping the display of the confirmed losing combination decorative symbol (for example, "326"). Therefore, it is prevented that the small symbol of the losing combination will reveal in advance that the losing combination decorative symbol will be stopped.

Furthermore, in the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in the first, second, and fourth performance modes, and the rotating display in the third performance mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts and changes from high to low when the variable display stops. In other words, the variable display speed is variable, while the small symbols are displayed at a constant speed from the start to the stop of the variable display.

(Various actions of decorative patterns)
Next, the various operation displays of the decorative patterns will be explained based on Figure 23. Figure 23 shows (A) the action to start the variation of the decorative pattern, (B) the action to stop the variation, and (C) the loop action.

As shown in Figures 23(A) to 23(C), the decorative patterns for the low base state move within the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and rotate within those areas, in order to perform variable display. In addition to these variable display movements, various actions (operations) can be performed to change the numerical display section 002SG051 and the character display section 002SG052 of the decorative patterns.

(Action to initiate change)
As shown in Figure 23(A), when variable display is started in the first and second performance modes, the decorative pattern performs a "variation start action" in which the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 reverses the orientation of its body. Specifically, in variation start action A1, the character is in its normal orientation with both hands on its hips and facing diagonally forward to the right; in variation start action A2, it is in an orientation with both hands raised and spread out, facing forward; and in variation start action A3, the character is in an orientation with both hands on its hips and facing diagonally forward to the left. For the sake of explanation, only the state of the three frames of variation start action A1, A2, and A3 is shown here, but in reality, the character is displayed for several dozen frames within the variation start action period (A1 to A3), causing the variation start action (movement) to occur in which the orientation of the character's body changes in the order of diagonally forward to the right (A1), forward (A2), and diagonally forward to the left (A3).

Next, after the character's body faces diagonally forward to the left, the decorative pattern moves a predetermined distance (upward) from its stopping position in the opposite direction of the scroll (A4), and then begins to move downward, thereby initiating the scrolling display. These variation initiation actions A1 to A4 are executed during the variation initiation action period Tb1 (see Figure 24), which lasts from the start of the variable display of the special pattern until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern (movement of the decorative pattern downward) begins.

For the sake of explanation, only the state of the four frames of the variation initiation action A1, A2, A3, and A4 is shown here. However, in reality, the variation initiation action (movement) is performed by the character's movement display over several tens of frames during the variation initiation action period Tb1, until the character's body orientation reverses.

In this embodiment, the variation initiation action is illustrated by an example in which the character's body orientation is reversed left and right. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation initiation action can be changed to other forms. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or their body may move. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the following components—the number display unit 002SG051, the character display unit 002SG052, the information display unit 002SG053, and the base display unit 002SG054—performs an action. In other words, the variation initiation action is an action performed before the decorative pattern begins scrolling or rotating, and is a separate action that causes a change in the scrolling display, i.e., operates in a manner different from the scrolling display.

Furthermore, in the first performance mode, during the variation start action period Tb1, the character name (character-related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 is erased (hidden). In this way, the character name is made easily visible when the display is stopped, while being hidden after the scrolling display begins, thereby drawing attention to the scrolling display.

Specifically, the variable display period for the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from the start of the variable display of the special and small symbols until the start of the scrolling display of the decorative symbols, and a post-variable display period after the start of the scrolling display of the decorative symbols. The character names (character-related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 are displayed during the pre-variable display period, i.e., when the variation start action is being executed, and are then erased before the start of the post-variable display period, i.e., before the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins. In this way, by erasing the names during the variation start action period Tb1, i.e., before the scrolling display begins, attention can be drawn to the variable display and pre-announcement effects rather than the names.

Furthermore, while this embodiment exemplifies a configuration where the period from the start of variable display of special and small symbols to the start of scrolling display of decorative symbols is defined as the pre-variable display period, the present invention is not limited to this. The pre-variable display period can be any period from the fulfillment of the variable display start conditions to the start of variable display of decorative symbols; that is, from the start of variable display based on the timing of the initial win or the retention memory to the start of scrolling display of decorative symbols.

(Stopping fluctuation action)
As shown in Figure 23(B), when the variable display ends in the first and second performance modes (when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped), a "variation stop action" is performed on the decorative symbols, in which the character displayed on the character display unit 002SG052 is enlarged.

Specifically, when the scrolling decorative pattern temporarily stops at the stopping position, the character, initially in its normal orientation with hands on its hips and facing diagonally forward to the right (variation stop action B1), is enlarged to extend significantly above the base display section 002SG054 (variation stop action B2), and then reduced to its normal orientation (variation stop action B3).

For the sake of explanation, only the three frames of the motion stop action B1, B2, and B3 are shown here. However, in reality, the motion stop action (movement) is performed by the character being displayed in motion for several tens of frames during the motion stop action period Tb2, from when the character is enlarged until it returns to its original size.

In this embodiment, a mode in which the character is enlarged is used as an example of the variation stop action. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of the variation stop action can be changed to modes other than those described above. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. Furthermore, at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, or base display unit 002SG054 that forms the decorative pattern may also perform the action. In other words, the variation stop action is an action performed when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from actions that change, such as scrolling or rotating displays.

(Loop action)
As shown in Figure 23(C), when the variable display ends in the first and second performance modes (from the time the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped until they are stopped (symbol confirmed)), a "loop action" is performed in which the characters displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 repeatedly shrink and restore, and the number display unit 002SG051 repeatedly rotates horizontally around a rotation axis that faces up and down.

Specifically, in loop action C1, the character is in the normal position with both hands on its hips and facing diagonally forward to the right, and the number display unit 002SG051 is facing forward. In loop action C2, the character is displayed in a reduced size so that it fits within the base display unit 002SG054, and the number display unit 002SG051 is rotated approximately 45 degrees to the right. In loop action C3, the reduced character is enlarged and restored, and the number display unit 002SG051 is in the normal position facing forward. In loop action C4, the character is displayed in a reduced size so that it fits within the base display unit 002SG054, and the number display unit 002SG051 is rotated approximately 45 degrees to the left. This loop action executes loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 sequentially over a loop action period Tb3. After the end of the loop action period Tb3, it returns to loop action C1, and then loop actions C1 through C4 are executed again over another loop action period Tb3. In other words, the loop action executes loop actions C1 through C4 periodically.

For the sake of explanation, only the state of the four frames of loop action C1 to C4 is shown here. However, in reality, the loop action (operation) is performed by displaying the character and the number display unit 002SG051 for several tens of frames during the loop action period Tb3, from when the character is reduced in size to when it is restored, and until the number display unit 002SG051 rotates and restores itself.

In this embodiment, a loop action is exemplified in which the character is displayed in a reduced size and the number display unit 002SG051 rotates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the loop action can be changed to other forms. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. Furthermore, it is sufficient for at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, or base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern to perform an action. In other words, the loop action is an action performed from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed at the stop position until it is displayed at the stop position (pattern finalization), and is a separate action from the action that changes in the scroll display.

(Comparison of various action periods and luminescence periods)
Next, the various actions of the decorative patterns and the control of the lamp's illumination will be explained based on Figure 24. Figure 24 shows (A) a comparison of the duration of the various actions of the decorative patterns and the control of the lamp's illumination, and (B) an example of loop illumination control of the lamp.

As shown in Figure 24(A), the decorative pattern change start actions A1 to A4 (see Figure 23(A)) have an execution period of approximately 1.5 seconds (Tb1 = approximately 1.5 seconds) and consist of approximately 45 frames. The decorative pattern change stop actions B1 to B3 (see Figure 23(B)) have an execution period of approximately 0.8 seconds (Tb2 = approximately 0.8 seconds) and consist of approximately 28 frames. The decorative pattern loop actions C1 to C4 (see Figure 23(C)) have a loop action period of approximately 1.8 seconds (Tb3 = approximately 1.8 seconds) and consist of approximately 55 frames.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 24(B), the movable lamps 9d provided on the movable body 32A located at the top of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B located at the bottom of the image display device 5, as well as the main lamp 9a and frame lamp 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3, illuminate based on the loop illumination control performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the game state is in a low base state.

This loop emission control works as follows: for example, over a loop emission period Tb4 (a period of 1), the light emits "white," "blue," and "yellow" in that order. After the end of the loop emission period Tb4, it returns to "white," and then again emits "white," "blue," and "yellow" in that order during the loop emission period Tb4. This process is repeated periodically. In other words, the loop emission control periodically executes the emission of "white," "blue," and "yellow" light.

Furthermore, the loop illumination period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3 < loop illumination period Tb4). This design ensures that in low-base states, the loop action is repeatedly performed to encourage the player to display the variable decorative symbols, while in high-base states, where variable display is more easily performed than in low-base states, it prevents excessive prompting of variable display, which could become annoying. Additionally, because the loop action is repeated at a shorter cycle than the loop illumination control, the decorative symbols can be effectively highlighted.

In this embodiment, the loop light emission control is exemplified as a form in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" light emission is performed periodically. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emission color and pattern of the lamp in one cycle can be changed in various ways. For example, a light emission pattern in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" light are emitted in that order, followed by "yellow," "white," and "blue" light emission, may be performed periodically, or a light emission pattern in which four or more colors are emitted in sequence may be performed periodically.

Furthermore, the various actions of the decorative symbols shown in Figure 24(A) are executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the performance mode is the first or second performance mode, but are not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the performance mode is the third or fourth performance mode. Also, the loop illumination control of the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b shown in Figure 24(B) is executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the performance mode is the first or second performance mode, but is not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the performance mode is the third or fourth performance mode.

(Pending display)
Next, the hold indicator will be explained based on Figure 25. Figure 25 shows diagrams illustrating examples of the hold indicator's operation, with (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4).

As shown in Figure 25 (A1), when the game is in standby mode (number of reserved balls "0"), the reserved ball display area 5U and the active display area 5F located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 do not display any reserved balls. The special reserved ball display area 5U consists of four display areas. The first display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-1" in the start-up winning command buffer 002SG194A, the second display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-4".

As shown in Figure 25 (A2), when a starting win (for example, a first starting win) occurs during game standby, the first reserve display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U. Next, the first reserve display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upwards to the left (see Figure 25 (A3)), then moves diagonally downwards to the left towards the active display area 5F in a parabolic arc. Upon reaching the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 25 (A4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 25 (A2), at the moment a starting win occurs, the first reserve indicator 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U and not in the active display area 5F. However, when the first reserve indicator 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the first starting win, the variable display of the small symbols begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols.

However, although the variable display has started, as shown in Figure 25 (A4), the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved display area 5U, has not moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. In other words, the shift display has not finished, so if the scrolling display of decorative symbols starts while the shift display is still ongoing, it becomes unclear which of the first reserved displays 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponds to, which may cause discomfort to the player.

Therefore, the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special hold memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed as the active display 002SG103. The scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols does not begin until the hold shift display period has ended. The aforementioned variation start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols begins only after the hold shift display period has ended.

Next, as shown in Figure 25 (B1), when the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"), the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved display 002SG101 in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

As shown in Figure 25 (B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F is erased, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased only after the next variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has started, as shown below. In this way, by avoiding a gap in the performance between the end of one variable display and the start of the next, the enjoyment of the performance can be maintained. Additionally, the erase effect 002SG110 allows the player to recognize that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display has been erased, while simultaneously recognizing the start of a new variable display by the display of the new active display 002SG103.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, is started, the first reserved display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upward to the left (see Figure 25 (B3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left towards the active display area 5F in a parabolic arc. Upon moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 25 (B4)).

Furthermore, the first hold indicator 002SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins to move horizontally to the left as the first hold indicator 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, moves (see Figure 25 (B3)), and moves from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 25 (B4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 25 (B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased upon the end of the variable display, as shown in Figure 25 (B3), the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has not yet moved to the active display area 5F. However, at the moment the movement display of the first reserved display 002SG101 begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols.

However, although the variable display has started, as shown in Figure 25 (B4), the first reserved symbol 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, has not yet finished moving (shifting) to the active display area 5F. Therefore, if the scrolling display of decorative symbols starts in this state, it becomes unclear which first reserved symbol 002SG101 corresponds to the scrolling display, potentially causing discomfort to the player.

Therefore, until the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, moves to the active display area 5F and is switched to display as active display 002SG103, the aforementioned variable start action is executed before the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative symbols begins. The scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative symbols begins only after the hold shift display period has ended.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special symbol hold memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are configured in a common manner for the first to fourth performance modes. Therefore, the shift display shown in Figure 25 is executed in a common manner for the first to fourth performance modes. However, for example, if a special symbol hold memory display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each performance mode are provided, it may be possible to execute a shift display in a manner corresponding to each performance mode.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 25, the CPU 120 for performance control executes a shift display that switches the first reserve display 002SG101 and the second reserve display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 using a common operation mode (for example, a mode in which the reserve display moves in an arc from the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F) for multiple types of variation patterns (for example, non-reach variation patterns and reach variation patterns). However, it may be possible to execute shift displays with multiple operation modes corresponding to each variation pattern and each performance mode. Also, it may be possible to execute shift displays with different operation modes depending on whether the game state is a low base state or a high base state.

Furthermore, the common behavioral patterns for multiple types of shift display variations include those in which at least one of several elements—such as the display mode from the time the held display switches to the active display, the display speed, and the shift display period—is common.

In this embodiment, upon the occurrence of a starting prize, the first reserve display 002SG101 (or second reserve display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U, and then the first reserve display 002SG101 (or second reserve display 002SG102) is moved and displayed (shifted) from the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the number of reserves is "0", upon the occurrence of a starting prize, the first reserve display 002SG101 (or second reserve display 002SG102) may not be displayed in the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U, and the active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the active display area 5F.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a switching display (shift display) that switches the held display corresponding to the variable display to the active display when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the first held display 002SG101 is shown moving non-linearly (for example, in an arc) from the first display area from the left in the special symbol held memory display area 5U toward the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display may be moved linearly toward the left. Also, the switching display (shift display) may not only slide the held display, but may also erase the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F and the first held display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol held memory display area 5U, and then start displaying the new active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display in the active display area 5F.

(Examples of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, examples of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be explained based on Figures 26 to 35. Figure 26 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the first performance mode. Figure 27 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 26. Figure 28 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the second performance mode. Figure 29 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 28. Figure 30 is a diagram showing the details of the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in Figure 28. Figure 31 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns as a modified example 1. Figure 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 31. Figure 33 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the third performance mode. Figure 34 is a diagram to explain how the decorative patterns look. Figure 35 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the fourth performance mode.

Furthermore, in the following diagrams representing the display screen of the image display device 5, lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without labels do not represent images displayed on the screen, but are intended to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in the first performance mode)
First, we will explain examples of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the first performance mode, based on Figures 26 and 27.

Figure 26(A) shows the state in the first performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their respective stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still being displayed variably. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 002SG103 corresponding to this variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 002SG101 (first hold memory count "2").

Next, as shown in Figure 26(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 26(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the variation start action of the decorative symbols (see Figure 23(A)) begins in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area. Furthermore, a shift display begins in which the two first held displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 26(D)). Furthermore, the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins moving horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 26(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 26(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 26(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins.

As shown in Figure 26(E), when the shift display, in which the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, moves to the active display area 5F, the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are completed, and the upward action A4 is started. When the upward movement (action A4) is completed, as shown in Figure 26(F), the downward movement begins, and the scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 26(F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are completed, and the upward action A4 begins. Once the upward movement (action A4) is complete, downward movement begins, and scrolling display commences, as shown in Figure 26(G).

Next, as shown in Figure 26(G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C are completed, and the upward action A4 begins. Once the upward movement (action A4) is complete, downward movement begins, and scrolling display commences, as shown in Figure 26(H).

Thus, as the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins and the variable display of the small symbols begins, the variable display of the ornamental symbols that are currently displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the middle ornamental symbol display area begins in that order. However, the scrolling display of the ornamental symbols displayed in ornamental symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 002SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, from the start of the shift display until the end of the shift display, the decorative symbols perform a variation start action, even though they do not scroll, thus allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when scrolling display begins, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increase in scrolling speed (movement speed) from low to medium to high speed. Simultaneously, the transparency of the images gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes nearly 100%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, as shown in Figures 26(F) and (G), starts at low speed immediately after the variable display begins, progresses through medium speed as shown in Figure 26(H), and then to high speed as shown in Figures 27(I), (J), and (K). As the transparency increases with speed, it becomes extremely difficult to visually identify each decorative pattern at high speed. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 26(G) to 27(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5R are initially displayed at a low speed, then progress to a medium speed, and finally to a high speed, with a fade-out display being implemented where the transparency increases with acceleration.

(Example of variable display operation in the second performance mode)
Next, we will explain examples of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the second performance mode, based on Figures 28 and 29.

Figure 28(A) shows the state in the second performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their respective stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still being displayed variably. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 002SG101 (first hold memory count "2"). Also, in the second performance mode, the name of the decorative symbol information display unit 002SG053 is always hidden, including when the decorative symbols are stopped.

Next, as shown in Figure 28(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 28(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the variation start action of the decorative symbols (see Figure 23(A)) begins in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area. Furthermore, a shift display begins in which the two first held displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 28(D)). Furthermore, the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins moving horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 28(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 28(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 28(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has started.

As shown in Figure 28(E), when the shift display, which moves the first held display 002SG101 from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, is completed, actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are completed, and the backward action A4 is started. When the backward movement towards the back of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in Figure 28(F), the forward movement is started, and the scrolling display begins.

Next, as shown in Figure 28(F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are completed, and the backward movement action A4 begins. Once the backward movement (action A4) is complete, as shown in Figure 28(G), forward movement begins and scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 28(G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C are completed, and the backward movement action A4 begins. Once the backward movement (action A4) is complete, as shown in Figure 28(H), forward movement begins and scrolling display starts.

Thus, as the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins and the variable display of the small symbols begins, the variable display of the ornamental symbols that are currently displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the middle ornamental symbol display area begins. However, the scrolling display of the ornamental symbols displayed in ornamental symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 002SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, from the start of the shift display until the end of the shift display, the decorative symbols perform a variation start action, even though they do not scroll, thus allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when scrolling display begins, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increase in scrolling speed (movement speed) from low to medium to high speed. Simultaneously, the transparency of the images gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes nearly 100%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, as shown in Figures 28(F) and (G), starts at low speed immediately after the variable display begins, progresses through medium speed as shown in Figure 28(H), and then to high speed as shown in Figures 29(I), (J), and (K). As the transparency increases with speed, it becomes extremely difficult to visually identify each decorative pattern at high speed. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 28(G) to 29(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5R are initially displayed at a low speed, then progress to a medium speed, and finally to a high speed, with a fade-out display being implemented where the transparency increases with acceleration.

Thus, the scrolling display in the second display mode is configured to move and disappear while increasing the transparency (transparency) from the back of the screen to the front. Specifically, as shown in Figures 30(A) and 30(B), in the scrolling display, the decorative patterns move in a curved manner from the back to the front. Therefore, between the time a decorative pattern is displayed in frame-in and out of frame-out in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located behind a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") may become visible through decorative pattern "2". At this time, the character of the decorative pattern "3" in the character display unit 002SG052 is displayed, while the number ("3") in the number display unit 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed). As shown in Figure 30(C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number ("3") in the number display unit 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed.

Furthermore, while the other decorative pattern "3," located behind the first decorative pattern "2," becomes visible through the first decorative pattern "2," in this case, the character of the other decorative pattern "3" located behind it is displayed, while the number of the number display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. Because the number of decorative pattern "3" is displayed only after the decorative pattern "2" has been erased, the number "2" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "3" do not overlap, preventing the decorative pattern "2" located in the foreground from becoming difficult to distinguish.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 30(A), the decorative pattern moves and disappears while increasing its transparency from the time it is framed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until it is framed out as shown in Figure 30(C). However, at the start of variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative pattern is faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed. Therefore, it moves from the back of the screen to the front of the screen while increasing its transparency as it fades out according to the display speed. Consequently, from the start of scrolling display until high-speed display begins, it appears as shown in Figures 30(A) to 30(C). However, after the fade-out display period ends and high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative pattern even at the back of the screen.

(Example of variable display operation as variation 1)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns as Modification 1 is started will be explained based on Figures 31 and 32. In this Modification 1, the decorative patterns are displayed by scrolling in a curved manner, similar to the second display mode, but they move in the opposite direction to the second mode, that is, from the front of the screen to the back.

The flow shown in Figures 31(A) to 31(D) is the same as that shown in Figures 28(A) to 28(D), therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

As shown in Figure 31(E), when the shift display, in which the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are completed, and the backward action A4 begins. Once the forward movement towards the front of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in Figure 31(F), the backward movement begins, and the scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 31(F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are completed, and the forward movement action A4 begins. Once the forward movement (action A4) is complete, as shown in Figure 31(G), the backward movement begins and the scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 31(G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C are completed, and the forward movement action A4 begins. Once the forward movement (action A4) is complete, as shown in Figure 31(H), the backward movement begins and the scrolling display starts.

Thus, as the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins and the variable display of the small symbols begins, the variable display of the ornamental symbols that are currently displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the middle ornamental symbol display area begins. However, the scrolling display of the ornamental symbols displayed in ornamental symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 002SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, from the start of the shift display until the end of the shift display, the decorative symbols perform a variation start action, even though they do not scroll, thus allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when scrolling display begins, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increase in scrolling speed (movement speed) from low to medium to high speed. In proportion to the increase in display speed, the transparency of the images also gradually increases, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes almost 100%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is initially displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in Figures 31(F) and (G), then progresses to medium speed as shown in Figure 31(H), and finally to high speed as shown in Figures 32(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transparency also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually identify each decorative pattern at high speeds. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 31(G) to 32(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5R are initially displayed at a low speed, then progress to a medium speed, and finally to a high speed. A fade-out display is also implemented, where the transparency increases as the speed increases.

Thus, the scroll display in Modification 1 is configured to move and disappear while increasing transparency (transparency) from the front to the back of the screen. Specifically, as shown in Figures 31(G) and 31(H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front to the back. Therefore, between the time a decorative pattern is displayed in the frame-in and out-of-frame areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") positioned so as to partially overlap one decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") on the back side may become visible through decorative pattern "3". In this case, the character of the character display section 002SG052 of decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") of the number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed).

Furthermore, while the other decorative pattern "2," located behind the first decorative pattern "3," becomes visible through the first decorative pattern "3," in this case, the character of the other decorative pattern "2" located behind it is displayed, while the number of the numerical display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. Because the decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, the number "3" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "2" do not overlap, preventing the "3" of the decorative pattern located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

Furthermore, in this modified example 1, the decorative pattern moves and disappears while increasing its transparency (transparency) from the time it is framed in to frame out of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, at the start of variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative pattern fades out in proportion to the increase in display speed. Therefore, it moves from the back of the screen to the front of the screen while increasing its transparency (transparency) as it fades out according to the display speed. Consequently, from the start of scrolling display until high-speed display begins, it appears as shown in Figures 31(F) to 31(H). However, after the fade-out display period ends and high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative pattern even at the back of the screen.

(Example of variable display operation in the third performance mode)
Next, we will explain examples of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the third performance mode, based on Figures 33 and 34.

Figure 33(A) shows the state in the third performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were rotated and displayed in the respective decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still in variable display mode. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 002SG103 corresponding to this variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 002SG101 (first hold memory count "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-hand shooting notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the decorative symbols, on a higher layer (in front of them).

Next, as shown in Figure 33(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 33(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, is started, the variable display of the small symbols begins. However, because the base state is high, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 23(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display begins, in which the two first held displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 33(D)). Furthermore, the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins to move horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 33(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 33(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 33(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has started.

As shown in Figure 33(F), when the shift display, which moves the first held display 002SG101 from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, is completed, the rotation display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins. In the high base state, the rotation display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously.

Thus, when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins, the rotation display of the decorative symbols that are stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously. However, the rotation display of the decorative symbols displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the rotation display begins only after the first held display 002SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display has ended) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, when the rotation display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the rotation display speed (movement speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. Simultaneously, the transparency of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes almost 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 33(E) and 33(F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are initially at low speed after the start of variable display, progress through medium speed as shown in Figure 33(G), and then to high speed as shown in Figure 33(H). Since the transparency also increases with increasing speed, at high speed, it becomes extremely difficult to visually identify each decorative pattern.

As shown in Figure 34, the rotation display in the third display mode rotates the decorative pattern to repeatedly display the first face 5a and the second face 5b. During the rotation display, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent, and becomes opaque when the rotation display stops. Furthermore, the numerical display section 002SG051 on the first face 5a of the decorative pattern, which is semi-transparent during the rotation display, is displayed, while the numerical display section 002SG051 on the second face 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in Figure 34(A), when the decorative pattern is rotated at a low speed and displayed in a semi-transparent state with a transmittance of the first transmittance, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R shows that the number "326" displayed on the first side 5a is visible, but the number "437" displayed (or planned to be displayed) on the second side 5b (the reverse side) is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34(B), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a medium speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transmittance is higher than the first transmittance (second transmittance), the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R shows that the number "437" displayed on the second side 5b is visible, but the number "548" displayed (or planned to be displayed) on the first side 5a (reverse side) is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34(C), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at high speed, and the transparency is higher than the second transparency (third transparency), in a semi-transparent state, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is such that the number "763" displayed on the first side 5a is visible, albeit with difficulty, while the number "874" displayed (or planned to be displayed) on the second side 5b (the reverse side) is difficult to see. Note that during high-speed rotation, both the first side 5a and the second side 5b become difficult to see.

In this way, when rotating the decorative pattern to repeatedly display both its front and back surfaces, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent. Therefore, both the front surface (e.g., the first surface 5a) and the back surface (e.g., the second surface 5b) of the decorative pattern become transparent and visible. However, in this case, the numbers on the front surface (e.g., the first surface 5a) are displayed, while the numbers on the back surface (e.g., the second surface 5b) are not. This prevents the numbers on the front and back surfaces from overlapping, thus preventing the numbers on the front surface from becoming difficult to read. Furthermore, even when variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in a high base state, a loop emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 24(B)) may be used to repeatedly execute an emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow. This simplifies the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d.

(Example of variable display operation in the fourth performance mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the fourth performance mode will be explained based on Figure 35.

Figure 35(A) shows the state in the fourth performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their respective stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still in variable display mode. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 002SG103 corresponding to this variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 002SG101 (first hold memory count "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-hand shooting notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the decorative symbols, on a higher layer (in front of them). (See Figure 23(A))

Next, as shown in Figure 35(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 35(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, is started, the variable display of the small symbols begins. However, because the base state is high, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 23(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display begins, in which the two first held displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 35(D)). Furthermore, the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins to move horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 35(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 35(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 35(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has started.

As shown in Figure 35(F), when the shift display, which moves the first held display 002SG101 from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, is completed, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously.

Thus, when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols that are stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously. However, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display of the first held display 002SG101, which is displayed in the first display area from the left, moving to the active display area 5F is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 002SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display has ended) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, when scrolling begins, the scroll speed (movement speed) of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increases from low speed to medium speed to high speed. In proportion to the increase in display speed, the transparency of the image also gradually increases, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes almost 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 35(E) and 35(F), the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are initially displayed at low speed, then progress to medium speed as shown in Figure 35(G), and finally to high speed as shown in Figure 35(H). Since the transparency also increases with increasing speed, at high speed, it becomes extremely difficult to visually distinguish each decorative pattern.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the CPU 120 for performance control is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs the action to start the variation of the decorative symbols, and prevents the scrolling display of the decorative symbols from starting until the shift display that switches the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F as the active display 002SG103 is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed, switching the corresponding hold display to an active display. Furthermore, while the shift display is active, a variation start action is performed, causing the decorative symbols to operate in a manner different from the moving display. This allows for effective use of the time required for the shift display. Additionally, since the variation start action is performed when the shift display is active in a high-base state (which is more advantageous than a low-base state), it enhances the excitement of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols in the high-base state.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 during the performance control process processing in step S76. It is possible to perform a common shift display whether the variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern specification command) or a second type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a reach variable pattern specification command). Therefore, even when variable displays are executed based on different types of variable display patterns, a common shift display is performed, thus reducing the number of shift display patterns.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a low base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs a change start action for the decorative symbols and does not start the scrolling display of the decorative symbols until the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is switched to display as an active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in a high base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it does not perform a change start action for the decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a high base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it may perform a change start action for the decorative symbols and not start the scrolling display of the decorative symbols until the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is switched to display as an active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed, switching the corresponding hold display to an active display. Furthermore, while the shift display is active, a variation start action is performed, causing the decorative symbols to operate in a manner different from the moving display. This allows for effective use of the time required for the shift display. Additionally, since the variation start action is performed when the shift display is active in a high-base state (which is more advantageous than a low-base state), it enhances the excitement of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols in the high-base state.

Furthermore, even in a high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 during the performance control process processing in step S76. Since it is possible to perform a common shift display whether the variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern specification command) or a second type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a reach variable pattern specification command), a common shift display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns, thus reducing the number of shift display patterns.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 42 and 43, a configuration is illustrated in which, after the shift display that switches the held display corresponding to the variable display to the active display upon the start of the variable display of the special symbol has finished, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. As long as the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins after the shift display that switches the held display corresponding to the variable display to the active display upon the start of the variable display of the special symbol has finished, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin while the shift display is in operation.

(Examples of operation of each part when the symbols are stopped and displayed)
Next, examples of the operation of each part when the symbols stop will be explained based on Figures 36 to 40. Figure 36 is a diagram showing the flow of the stop display of decorative symbols in the first performance mode (second performance mode). Figure 37 is a diagram showing the flow of the stop display of decorative symbols following Figure 36. Figure 38 shows the flow of the stop display of decorative symbols when the number of reserved memories is 3 in the first performance mode (second performance mode) (A) to (G). Figure 39 shows the flow of the stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth performance mode (third performance mode) (A) and (B).

(Example of symbol stop display operation in the first performance mode [number of reserved items: 2 or less])
First, we will explain, based on Figures 36 and 37, examples of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols stop displaying in the variable display based on the losing variation pattern when the number of reserved memories is two or less in the first performance mode. Note that the second performance mode is almost the same as the first performance mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 36(A), when decorative patterns are being displayed at high speed and scrolling in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for stopping the display of each decorative pattern approaches, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, which was being displayed at high speed, decreases, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transparency (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 36(B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 36(C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 36(D)). Then, a variable stop action (see Figure 23(B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 36(E)). After that, a loop action (see Figure 23(C)) begins while the pattern is temporarily stopped and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special pattern is finished.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily paused, as shown in Figure 36(F), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which was being displayed at high speed, decreases, and a fade-in display is executed, gradually decreasing the transmittance (transparency), thereby improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 36(F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 36(G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 36(H)). Then, a variable stop action (see Figure 23(B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 37(I)). After that, a loop action (see Figure 23(C)) begins while the pattern is temporarily stopped and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special pattern is finished.

When the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 37(J), the display speed of the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, which were being displayed at high speed, decreases, and a fade-in display is executed, gradually decreasing the transparency (transparency), improving the visibility of the decorative symbols (see Figure 37(K)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 37(K)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 37(L)). Then, a variable stop action (see Figure 23(B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 37(M)). After that, a loop action (see Figure 23(C)) begins while the pattern is temporarily stopped and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special pattern is finished.

Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the loop action of the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R ends and they are displayed in a stopped state, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 37(M)).

(Example of the symbol stop display operation in the first performance mode [number of reserved memories: "3"])
Next, we will explain the operation of each part when the decorative symbols stop displaying in the variable display when there are 3 reserved memory slots in the first performance mode, based on Figures 38(A) to (G). In the second performance mode, only the background image is different, and everything else is almost the same as the first performance mode, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 38(A), when decorative patterns are being displayed at high speed and scrolling in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for stopping the display of each decorative pattern approaches, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, which was being displayed at high speed, decreases, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transparency (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 38(B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 38(C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character's variation stop action (see Figure 23(B)) displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 23(C)) is executed after the temporary stop display.

When the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, which were being displayed at high speed, decreases, and a fade-in display is executed, gradually decreasing the transparency (transparency), improving the visibility of the decorative symbols (see Figure 38(D)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 36(E)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character's variation stop action displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 (see Figure 23(B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 23(C)) is executed after the temporary stop display.

When the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, which were being displayed at high speed, decreases, and a fade-in display is executed, gradually decreasing the transparency (transparency), improving the visibility of the decorative symbols (see Figure 38(F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 38(G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character's variation stop action displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 (see Figure 23(B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 23(C)) is executed after the temporary stop display.

Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the loop action of the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R ends and they are displayed in a stopped state, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 38(G)).

(Example of the symbol stop display operation in the fourth performance mode)
Next, we will explain the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are stopped in the variable display in the fourth performance mode, based on Figures 39(A) and (B). In the third performance mode, only the background image is different, and everything else is almost the same as the fourth performance mode, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 39(A), when decorative patterns are being displayed at high speed and scrolling in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for stopping the display of each decorative pattern approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in each display area 5L, 5C, and 5R decreases simultaneously, and a fade-in display is executed, in which the transparency (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of each decorative pattern (see Figure 39(B)).

Then, the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right are simultaneously temporarily displayed at the stopping positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this point, the transparency of the decorative patterns becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character's movement stop action (see Figure 23(B)) displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 23(C)) is not executed after the temporary stop display.

Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbols ends, the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are also displayed in a stopped state, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 39(C)).

Thus, in a low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is two or less and a variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed), the variation stop action adds variety to the movement of the decorative symbols when they temporarily stop, thereby enhancing the entertainment value. On the other hand, in a low base state where the number of reserved memories is three, or in a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative symbols are difficult to see, if a variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, the variation stop action is not executed. Instead, the symbols are temporarily stopped while maintaining their size, thus preventing any loss of visibility of the decorative symbols.

In this embodiment, the animation (moving image) data for the various movements of the decorative patterns could be created by combining materials for each period, such as 1. from the start of variable display to just before high-speed variable display, 2. high-speed variable display, 3. from low-speed variable display to the stop of variable display, and 4. stopped pattern. However, regarding 2. high-speed variable display, as shown in Figures 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the transparency of the decorative patterns is high and they are almost transparent. Even though it is possible to recognize that they are being displayed rapidly, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize which decorative pattern has passed (represented by arrows in Figures 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). Therefore, having separate animation data for each type of decorative pattern (depending on which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from) is largely meaningless and only burdens the capacity of ROM 121. For this reason, it is preferable to use common data for the high-speed variable display animation, regardless of which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Example of background change behavior)
Next, an example of background change operation will be explained based on Figures 40 and 41. In Figure 40, (A1) is the first background image, (A2) is the first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the background change. Figure 41 is a diagram showing the flow of background change in the first performance mode.

As shown in Figure 40, in the first performance mode, the background image can be switched between a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40(A1)) representing a distant view of a city during the daytime, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40(A2)) representing a scene within the city during the daytime. The background image switch is triggered when a predetermined switching condition (for example, when an SP reach fails) is met. In this embodiment, the switch is performed at a predetermined timing in the variable display following an SP reach failure (for example, at the start of the variable display).

In this embodiment, the first performance mode is illustrated by an example where the display switches between the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not specifically shown, it may be possible to selectively display three or more background images, including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A. Furthermore, the conditions for switching are not limited to those described above. They may also be met when a specific performance other than an SP reach is executed, when one background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period, or when a selection is made by the player.

Furthermore, while the start timing of the switching display in this embodiment is set to the start timing of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be any timing during the variable display period, such as before the decorative pattern enters a "reach" state.

As shown in Figure 40(B), when the display switches from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or when the display switches from the first predetermined background image 002SG081A to the first background image 002SG081), a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image 002SG081, which is displayed with 100% opacity, is gradually increased until it disappears. At the same time, a fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is hidden with 0% opacity, is gradually decreased. In other words, a crossfade display is executed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1 = fade-in display period B1). The fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are, for example, approximately 6 seconds, during which approximately 210 frames of images are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 41(A), while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, its transmittance (transparency) increases over time, making it difficult to see (see Figure 41(B)). Meanwhile, the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, displayed on a lower layer of the first background image 002SG081, decreases, gradually becoming visible again (see Figure 41(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 decreases further, while the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A increases (see Figures 41(D) and 41(E)). Finally, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 becomes 100% and it is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A becomes 0% and it becomes easily visible (see Figure 41(F)).

In this embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, meaning that the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 have the same duration. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Only a portion of the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may begin after the fade-out display period A1 has ended.

Furthermore, while this embodiment exemplifies a configuration where the transparency always increases at a constant rate during the fade-out display of the background image or decorative pattern, and decreases at a constant rate during the fade-in display of the background image or decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this. The transparency during the fade-out and fade-in displays of the background image is not necessarily limited to increasing or decreasing at a constant rate. For example, the transparency may slowly increase or decrease during the first period, and then rapidly increase or decrease during the second period.

Furthermore, while this embodiment illustrates a configuration in which background images are switched and displayed in one performance mode (for example, a first performance mode or a second performance mode), the present invention is not limited to this. It is also applicable to configurations where the background image switches from a first background image corresponding to the first performance mode to a second background image corresponding to the second performance mode, and where the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display period of the second background image are synchronized.

(Examples of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, examples of the operation of each part in the variable display in each performance mode will be explained based on Figures 42 to 45. Figure 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the first performance mode. Figure 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the second performance mode. Figure 44 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the third and fourth performance modes. Figure 45 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of the variable display in (A) the first performance mode, (B) the second performance mode, and (C) the third and fourth performance modes.

(First performance mode)
As shown in Figure 42, in the first performance mode, when the number of reserved symbols is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach failure variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are rapidly displayed in a variable manner as the variable display of the special symbols begins, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, after which the scroll display begins. In addition, a shift display of the reserved symbols is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 45(A)).

Furthermore, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate to high-speed display after scrolling begins, and their transparency increases proportionally to the speed, resulting in a fade-out display. This fade-out display period A21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is met at the start of the variable display, a fade-out display will begin at the same time as the start of the variable display, in which the transparency (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 will gradually increase, while a fade-in display will begin, in which the transparency (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A will gradually decrease until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping time approaches for the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the central decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decelerate and become slow-speed displays. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the central decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in that order, temporarily stopping. During the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After the variable display ends and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the loop action for the decorative symbols ends and they are displayed in a stopped state. After a symbol confirmation period (for example, 500ms), the next variable display becomes available.

The fade-out display period A1, during which the first background image 002SG081 fades out, is longer than the fade-out display period A21, which is the period from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin scrolling until they reach high-speed display (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A21).

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1, during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in, is longer than the fade-in display period B21, which is the period from when the display speed deceleration begins in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until a temporary stop is displayed (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B21).

Furthermore, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is in operation, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly execute a lighting pattern of white, blue, and yellow in that order, based on loop lighting control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 24(B)). In addition, background music (BGM) is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second performance mode)
Next, as shown in Figure 43, in the second performance mode, when the number of reserved symbols is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach failure variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are rapidly displayed in a variable manner as the variable display of the special symbols begins, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, after which the scroll display begins. In addition, a shift display of the reserved symbols is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 45(B)).

Furthermore, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate to high-speed display after scrolling begins, and their transparency increases proportionally to the speed, resulting in a fade-out display. This fade-out display period A22 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is met at the start of the variable display, a fade-out display will begin at the same time as the start of the variable display, in which the transparency (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 will gradually increase, while a fade-in display will begin, in which the transparency (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A will gradually decrease until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping time approaches for the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the central decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decelerate and become slow-speed displays. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B22 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the central decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in that order, temporarily stopping. During the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After the variable display ends and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the loop action for the decorative symbols ends and they are displayed in a stopped state. After a symbol confirmation period (for example, 500ms), the next variable display becomes available.

The fade-out display period A1 for the first background image 002SG081 is set to be longer than the fade-out display period A22 for the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, from the start of scrolling until high-speed display begins (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A22). This is because, since a shorter fade-out period generally gives the impression of a sudden disappearance, for fade-out displays that may occur at the same time as the variable display of decorative patterns and background changes (for example, at the start of variable display), the fade-out display of the decorative patterns is set to be shorter than the fade-out display of the background image, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in is set to be longer than the fade-in display period B22 during which the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is slowed down to a temporary stop (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B22). This arrangement allows for a more abrupt appearance of the decorative pattern, as a shorter fade-in period generally creates a more sudden effect. Therefore, for fade-in displays that may occur at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change (for example, when the variable display stops), the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is executed in a shorter time than the fade-in display of the background, drawing attention to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 during the second performance mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 during the first performance mode (fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 45(A) and (B)). This design not only differs the scroll display pattern of the decorative symbols in the second performance mode compared to the first, but also lengthens the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scroll display until the display becomes high-speed and the decorative symbols become difficult to see. This allows the decorative symbols to be viewed for a longer period.

In this embodiment, as a variable display of decorative patterns in the second performance mode, a second scroll display is applied, which differs in manner from the first scroll display that moves linearly from top to bottom in the first performance mode. This second scroll display moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the back to the front. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The special variable display, which differs in manner from the first scroll display, may not only involve the curvilinear movement of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from back to front as described above, but may also include various other scroll displays, such as the curvilinear movement of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from front to back as described in Modification 1, or a scroll display that moves linearly or curvedly from bottom to top.

Furthermore, the fade-out display periods A21 and A22 differ depending on whether the non-reach-miss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first performance mode or in the second performance mode. This design, where the fade-out display period is the same despite the different performance modes, makes it difficult for the player to predict that the determined variation pattern is the non-reach-miss variation pattern PA1-1, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A1, during which the first background image 002SG081 fades out, and the fade-out display period A22, from the start of scrolling display of decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until high-speed display, are different. In other words, by not executing (not synchronizing) the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 at the same time (for example, at the start of variable display), it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to recognize that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. Specifically, if the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first background image 002SG081 will disappear together, making it difficult to recognize that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern disappear first, it is possible to make the decorative pattern stand out.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1, during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in, and the fade-in display period B22, from the start of the deceleration of the display speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the temporary stop display, are different. In other words, by not executing the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 at the same time (for example, when the variable display stops), it is possible to prevent the display of the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to recognize. Specifically, if the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A will appear together, making it difficult to recognize that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, it is possible to make the decorative pattern stand out.

Furthermore, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is in operation, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly execute a lighting pattern of white, blue, and yellow in that order, based on loop lighting control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 24(B)). In addition, background music (BGM) is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Third and fourth performance modes)
Next, as shown in Figure 44, when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-3 is performed in the third and fourth performance modes, the small symbols are rapidly displayed in a variable manner as the variable display of the special symbols begins, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously displayed in a rotating or scrolling manner without any variation start action being performed. In addition, a shift display of the hold display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 45(C)).

Furthermore, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate to high-speed display after scrolling begins, and their transparency increases proportionally to the speed, resulting in a fade-out display. This fade-out display period A23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping time approaches for decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative patterns in these areas simultaneously and gradually decelerate, becoming slow-speed displays. Simultaneously, the transparency (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, the decorative symbols in display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all stop and are displayed simultaneously. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action seen in the first and second performance modes are not executed; the variable display simply ends, and the decorative symbols, along with the smaller symbols, stop and are displayed. After a symbol confirmation period (for example, 500ms), the next variable display becomes available.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when scrolling is performed in the first performance mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when rotation display is performed in the third performance mode or when scrolling display is performed in the fourth performance mode. Similarly, the fade-out display period A22 when scrolling display is performed in the second performance mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when scrolling display is performed in the first performance mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 45(A) to (C)).

Furthermore, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is in operation, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b illuminate in accordance with the output of the high-bass music's rhythm, melody, and beat, based on the light emission control corresponding to the high-bass music pattern. Additionally, the high-bass music is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the high-base state, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b are shown to illuminate in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-base music, based on the light emission control corresponding to the high-base music pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the high-base state, a light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed based on loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 24(B)), and background BGM may be output from speakers 8L and 8R. This simplifies the light emission control of the performance control CPU 120.

(Example of demonstration performance while waiting for customers)
Next, the customer waiting demo performance will be explained based on Figures 46 and 47. Figure 46 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo performance. Figure 47 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a starting prize is awarded during the customer waiting demo performance.

As shown in Figure 46, the "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect that notifies the player that the game is in a customer waiting (game waiting) state. This effect is initiated by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the customer waiting demo specification command output from the main board 11, without receiving any control commands such as the variable display start specification command.

Specifically, although not shown in the diagram, after the initial operation of the movable parts 32A, 32B, etc., is performed during the initial operation control process following power-on, the menu/volume/brightness adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 46(A)). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since power-on without any variable display being performed, the menu/volume/brightness adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 disappears, the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is displayed, and the customer waiting demo performance begins (see Figure 46(B)).

In the customer waiting demo sequence, a video is displayed sequentially introducing multiple ally characters (which may include enemy character images) and content from various sequences (see Figures 46(B) to (E)). Then, while an image of the ally characters gathered together remains displayed (see Figure 46(F)), the movable body 32A descends from its origin position to the sequence position. After a predetermined time has elapsed, it rises back to its origin position (see Figures 46(G) to (H)). Finally, the first background image 002SG081, corresponding to the normal state, is displayed as the background image, and the sequence ends (see Figure 46(I)). Once the customer waiting demo sequence ends, the menu/volume/brightness adjustment display indication 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 46(J)).

Furthermore, if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) elapses after the customer waiting demo performance ends without any variable display, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the waiting state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be executed repeatedly multiple times during the waiting state, or it may be stopped after a predetermined number of executions. Also, the presentation style of the customer waiting demo performance as a waiting effect is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, during the customer waiting demo performance (see Figures 46(B) to (H)), the small symbols are continuously displayed in display area 5S, while the decorative symbols are hidden in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, even though the decorative symbols are hidden, the small symbols are still displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

This section explains an example of what happens when a winning combination is triggered while a customer-waiting demo is being performed.

As shown in Figure 47(A), when the customer waiting demo sequence is running and a first starting win occurs (the condition for starting the variable display is met), as shown in Figure 47(B), the variable display of the small symbols begins in the display area 5S while the customer waiting demo sequence image 002SG400 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 47(C), the customer waiting demo image 002SG400 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, the special symbol hold memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are displayed, and the first hold display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol hold memory display area 5U. Then, the movement display (shift display) of the first hold display 002SG101 from the special symbol hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F begins, and the variation start action of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins in the order of left, right, and center.

As shown in Figure 47(D), when the shift display of the first held display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed, as shown in Figure 47(E), the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R move upward in sequence, ending the variation start action, and the scrolling display begins (see Figure 47(F)).

Thus, when a winning combination occurs while the customer-waiting demo sequence is running, the variable display of the small symbols begins before the customer-waiting demo sequence image 002SG400 disappears. Then, the customer-waiting demo sequence image 002SG400 disappears, and the background image corresponding to the current sequence mode (in this case, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first sequence mode) is displayed. After that, the decorative symbols are displayed and scrolling begins.

In other words, if the display of decorative symbols scrolls while the demo image 002SG400 is still displayed, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the scroll display started in conjunction with the first winning combination. Therefore, by starting the variable display of small symbols, switching from the demo image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, and then starting the scroll display only after the hold display shift has finished, the player can be made to recognize that the scroll display started in conjunction with the first winning combination. On the other hand, if the display switches from the demo image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, and then starts the scroll display only after the shift display has finished, the time lag between the first winning combination and the start of the scroll display becomes larger. Therefore, for the small symbols, the variable display starts before the demo image 002SG400 disappears, ensuring that the display corresponds to the variable display of decorative symbols.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 46(A), (I), and (J), when the customer waiting demo performance ends and the decorative symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, if it is the first or second performance mode, the loop action of the displayed decorative symbols (see Figure 23(C)) is executed, and loop illumination control (see Figure 24(B)) is performed in the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable lamp 9d. On the other hand, if it is the third or fourth performance mode, the loop action of the displayed decorative symbols (see Figure 23(C)) is not executed, and illumination control is performed in the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable lamp 9d in accordance with the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-bass music.

Thus, in a low base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is executed repeatedly at a shorter cycle than the loop illumination control, drawing attention to the decorative symbols. This allows for variable display of the decorative symbols, and thus encourages the resumption of gameplay. Conversely, in a high base state, neither the loop action of the decorative symbols nor the loop illumination control is executed, allowing attention to be drawn to the high base state's effects (third and fourth effects modes). The loop action of the decorative symbols does not necessarily have to be executed in the first and second effects modes, nor is it necessary to execute it in the third and fourth effects modes.

Furthermore, the fact that the decorative symbol loop action does not execute while the variable display is stopped in the high-base state suggests that it is unlikely the player would end their game in the high-base state, and that they are simply away from their seat. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to sit down just because it is a non-operational pachinko machine 1 with the variable display not displayed. Moreover, appealing with the loop action would deter other players from mistakenly sitting down.

Furthermore, while the "loop action" in this embodiment focuses solely on "movement," it is also possible to implement animations such as a shifting or shimmering highlight on the decorative pattern while it remains stationary, without any changes in its position, movement, or deformation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, and other performance images (not shown) such as character images, which are displayed as background images in the high-bass state, may be animated, such as moving and displaying in sync with the high-bass music or at a predetermined movement speed. In this case, although the loop action of the decorative symbols is not executed while the variable display in the high-bass state is stopped, the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 may continue.

(Example of pseudo-consecutive win notification operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo-consecutive win notification will be explained based on Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a diagram showing the flow of the pseudo-consecutive win notification. Figure 49 shows (A) an example of pseudo-consecutive win count display and symbol color, (B) a diagram showing the types of pseudo-consecutive win count display and symbol color, and (C) a pseudo-consecutive win count display color determination table.

As shown in Figure 48, the "pseudo-consecutive display notification" is a feature that, at a predetermined timing between the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols and the display result being derived and displayed, temporarily pauses the display of the decorative symbols. It then entices the player to wonder whether the variable display will resume or not, that is, whether a single variable display will be made to appear as multiple variable displays.

As shown in Figure 49(A), the pseudo-consecutive win notification can be executed in two ways: a "single pseudo-consecutive win pattern" where the total number of variable displays is two (initial variable display and one re-variable display), and a "double pseudo-consecutive win pattern" where the total number of variable displays is three (initial variable display and two re-variable displays). If the Super Reach (single pseudo-consecutive win) variation pattern is selected, the "single pseudo-consecutive win pattern" is executed; if the Super Reach (double pseudo-consecutive win) variation pattern is selected, the "double pseudo-consecutive win pattern" is executed. The probability of winning a jackpot is higher with the "double pseudo-consecutive win pattern" than with the "single pseudo-consecutive win pattern."

Specifically, as shown in Figure 48(A), when the variable display that executes the pseudo-consecutive win notification is initiated, a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the variable display. Then, a decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, creating a near-win state (see Figure 48(B)). Afterward, the pseudo-consecutive win decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is displayed at a reduced speed just before its stopping position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48(C)).

Subsequently, in the case of a variable display where a pseudo-consecutive win notification is executed, the pseudo-consecutive win symbol is temporarily displayed at the stopping position in the central symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48(D)), and a pseudo-consecutive win count indicator 002SG212, "×2", indicating the start of the first re-variable display, i.e., the start of the second variable display, is displayed above the central symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48(F)). The variable display of the symbols then resumes in the left symbol display area 5L, the central symbol display area 5C, and the right symbol display area 5R (see Figure 48(G)). In the case of a variable display where a pseudo-consecutive win notification is not executed, the pseudo-consecutive win symbol passes the stopping position in the central symbol display area 5C, and a symbol with a number one greater than the temporarily displayed symbol is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 5L and 5C, resulting in a losing variable display result (see Figure 48(E)).

In Figure 48(G), after the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes, in the case of a "pseudo-consecutive-win pattern" pseudo-consecutive-win notification, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbols that were being displayed variably in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped (see Figure 48(L)), and decorative symbols with the same numbers as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, creating a reach pattern (see Figure 48(M)), which then develops into an SP reach performance.

Furthermore, in Figure 48(G), after the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes, in the case of the "two-time pseudo-consecutive-win pattern" pseudo-consecutive-win notification, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. Then, a decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, returning to a reach state. After that, the pseudo-consecutive-win decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is displayed at a reduced speed just before the stopping position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48(H)).

Next, the pseudo-consecutive decorative symbols are temporarily displayed at the stopping position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48(I)), and a pseudo-consecutive count indicator 002SG213, "×3," indicating the start of the second re-variable display, i.e., the start of the third variable display, is displayed above the central decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48(J)). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the central decorative symbol display area 5C, and the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 48(K)).

Subsequently, the decorative symbols that were variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped (see Figure 48(L)), and decorative symbols with the same numbers as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, creating a reach pattern (see Figure 48(M)), which then develops into an SP reach演出 (SP reach animation).

Furthermore, the pseudo-consecutive win notification includes an introductory part (see Figures 48(A)-(C), (G), (J), (K), (L)) that builds anticipation for whether or not the variable display will resume, and a result notification part (see Figures 48(D)-(F), (H), (I), (M)) that announces whether or not the variable display has resumed.

As shown in Figure 49 (B1), in the pseudo-consecutive win notification, after the pseudo-consecutive win symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the central symbol display area 5C, when the variable display resumes, a pseudo-consecutive win count display that can identify the number of times the variable display has resumed is displayed. Specifically, a pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 (see Figures 48 (F) and (G)) indicating "×2" is displayed to indicate that the first re-variable display has started, i.e., the second variable display has started, and a pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 (see Figures 48 (J) and (K)) indicating "×3" is displayed to indicate that the second re-variable display has started, i.e., the third variable display has started.

The pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 shown in Figure 49(B1) and the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 shown in Figure 49(B2) can be displayed in either blue or red. Furthermore, as explained in Figure 19, regular symbols consisting of even numbers are displayed in blue, while probability-increasing symbols consisting of odd numbers are displayed in red. The display color for these pseudo-consecutive win count displays is determined in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280 of the variable display count setting process explained in Figure 18, using the pseudo-consecutive win count display color determination table shown in Figure 49(C).

Specifically, in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, when determining the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count indicator 002SG212, if the variable display result is "probability-changing jackpot," a display color that is not identical to the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color is blue and pseudo-consecutive win count indicator color is red / symbol color is red and pseudo-consecutive win count indicator color is blue) is determined at a rate of 10%, and a display color that is identical to the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo-consecutive win count indicator color are blue / symbol color and pseudo-consecutive win count indicator color are red) is determined at a rate of 90%.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "non-probability-changing jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color is blue and pseudo-consecutive win count display color is red / symbol color is red and pseudo-consecutive win count display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 30%, and a display color that is the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo-consecutive win count display color are blue / symbol color and pseudo-consecutive win count display color are red) is determined at a rate of 70%.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is "miss," a display color that is not identical to the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo-consecutive win count display color is red / pattern color is red and pseudo-consecutive win count display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 90%, and a display color that is identical to the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo-consecutive win count display color are blue / pattern color and pseudo-consecutive win count display color are red) is determined at a rate of 10%.

Thus, in the pseudo-consecutive win notification, there are two possible combinations: a first combination where the displayed decorative symbol and the displayed color of the pseudo-consecutive win count are not the same color, and a second combination where the displayed decorative symbol and the displayed color of the pseudo-consecutive win count are the same color. In the pseudo-consecutive win notification, the probability of the game being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when it is restarted with the first combination.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a jackpot, and the stop symbol is determined to be a normal symbol (blue) in step 002SGS276, the probability of determining the same color (blue) for the pseudo-consecutive count display in the first and second pseudo-consecutive counts will be higher than the probability of determining the different color (red). On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, and the stop symbol is determined to be a normal symbol (blue) in step 002SGS276, the probability of determining the same color (blue) for the pseudo-consecutive count display in the first and second pseudo-consecutive counts will be lower than the probability of determining the different color (red).

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot, and the probability variation symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the probability of determining the same color, red, for the pseudo-consecutive count display of the first and second pseudo-consecutive counts will be higher than the probability of determining the different color, blue. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, and the probability variation symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the probability of determining the same color, red, for the pseudo-consecutive count display of the first and second pseudo-consecutive counts will be lower than the probability of determining the different color, blue.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276 (see Figure 49 (B1)), for the first pseudo-consecutive spins where the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 shows "×2", the second combination ("×2", blue), where the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the numbers and display colors of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type (blue), is determined with a higher probability than the first combination ("×2", red), where the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the numbers of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type but the display colors are different (red).

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive win, where the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 shows "x3," the third combination ("x3," blue), where the number on the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same (blue), is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x3," red), where both the number on the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the display color on the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 are different (red).

On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss, if the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the proportion of times the same color (blue) is determined for the pseudo-consecutive count display of the first and second pseudo-consecutive counts will be lower than the proportion of times the different color (red) is determined.

When the variable display result is a jackpot, and the probability variation symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, for the first pseudo-consecutive spins where the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 is "x2", the third combination ("x2", red), where the decorative symbol displayed at the temporary stop and the numbers in the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same (red), is determined at a higher rate than the fourth combination ("x2", blue), where the decorative symbol displayed at the temporary stop and the numbers and display color in the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different (blue).

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive win, where the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 shows "×3", the second combination ("×3", red), where the decorative symbol displayed during the temporary stop and the numbers and display colors of the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 are of the same type, is determined more frequently than the first combination ("×3", blue), where the decorative symbol displayed during the temporary stop and the numbers of the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 are of the same type but the display color is different (blue).

On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss, and a normal symbol ("3", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the probability of determining the same color, blue, as the pseudo-consecutive count display for the first and second pseudo-consecutive counts will be lower than the probability of determining the different color, red.

In this pseudo-consecutive win notification, there are two possible combinations: a first combination where the numbers on the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive win count displays 002SG212 and 002SG213 are the same type, but the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo-consecutive win count displays are different; and a second combination where both the numbers and display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo-consecutive win count displays are the same type. In the pseudo-consecutive win notification, the probability of the game being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the variable display is resumed with the second combination than when it is resumed with the first combination. Therefore, not only is the outcome of the pseudo-consecutive win notification uncertain, but if it is executed, attention can be drawn to the combination of the numbers and colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo-consecutive win count displays 002SG212 and 002SG213, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the pseudo-consecutive win notification, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when a super-reach variation pattern with two pseudo-consecutive wins is determined than when a super-reach variation pattern with one pseudo-consecutive win is determined. Therefore, by making it so that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when both the decorative symbol temporarily stopped on the first pseudo-consecutive win and the number and color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display are the same type in the second combination, compared to when both are the same type in the second combination, the number and color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display is the same type in the second pseudo-consecutive win, the number of pseudo-consecutive wins and the number and color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display can be drawn more attention.

Furthermore, if, during the second pseudo-consecutive spin, both the decorative symbol displayed during the temporary stop and the number and color of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display are the same type in the second combination, the decorative symbol becomes a probability-increasing symbol. Therefore, it may be possible to ensure that the probability-increasing jackpot state is controlled more frequently when a super-reach variation pattern with two pseudo-consecutive spins is determined than when a super-reach variation pattern with one pseudo-consecutive spin is determined.

Furthermore, while this embodiment illustrates a configuration in which the display color for the pseudo-consecutive win count is determined from multiple colors according to the numbers on the decorative symbols displayed during the temporary stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color for the pseudo-consecutive win count may be a predetermined color for each pseudo-consecutive win count.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display modes of the pseudo-consecutive count indicators 002SG212 and 002SG213 were exemplified as "×2" and "×3," but the present invention is not limited to these. The pseudo-consecutive count indicator can be changed to various modes as long as the pseudo-consecutive count can be specified. For example, it can be displayed in various modes such as "nth consecutive" (where n is an integer of 2 or more), "nth time," or "nth re-variation."

In this embodiment, the only two patterns in the pseudo-consecutive win notification where the numbers on the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive win count display are the same type and color are when the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is a normal symbol ("2", blue) and the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 is ("x2", blue), and when the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is a normal symbol ("3", red) and the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 is (x3, red). However, other patterns may also exist, such as when the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is a normal symbol ("4", green) and the pseudo-consecutive win count display is (x4, green). The color of the numbers on the decorative symbols, the color of the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive win count display, and the pseudo-consecutive win count can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the number on the decorative symbol displayed in the pseudo-consecutive win notification is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number displayed in the pseudo-consecutive win count notification, the system determines whether or not to make the pseudo-consecutive win count display color the same as the number on the decorative symbol displayed in the pseudo-consecutive win count notification. While the system exemplified a configuration where the expectation level is higher when the color is the same as the number on the decorative symbol displayed in the pseudo-consecutive win count notification, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number on the decorative symbol displayed in the pseudo-consecutive win count notification is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number displayed in the pseudo-consecutive win count notification, the system may choose not to determine the pseudo-consecutive win count display color and instead uniformly set it to a predetermined display color (e.g., white).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the pseudo-consecutive win notification, after a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach state, the pseudo-consecutive win symbol with the words "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, thereby initiating the re-variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo-consecutive win symbols can be changed in various ways. Alternatively, after a decorative symbol with a different number than the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the re-variable display may begin when the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L or the right decorative symbol display area 5R, or the pseudo-consecutive win symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

Furthermore, in the pseudo-consecutive win notification, the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R do not necessarily have to be the same as the confirmed decorative symbols that are displayed at the end of the variable display. Also, for example, if a normal symbol is temporarily displayed during the first pseudo-consecutive win, a probability-changing symbol (i.e., a different symbol from the first pseudo-consecutive win) may be temporarily displayed during the second pseudo-consecutive win. Moreover, the number of pseudo-consecutive wins is not limited to the two mentioned above; three or more pseudo-consecutive wins (re-variable display) may be possible.

(Example of a reach animation)
Next, we will explain examples of the operation of the reach animation based on Figures 50 to 52. Figure 50 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach animation. Figure 51 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach animation following Figure 50. Figure 52 is a diagram showing examples of the operation of each part in the reach animation. In the following, we will explain examples of the operation of the reach animation in the first animation mode, but similar reach animations may be performed in the second to fourth animation modes as well.

As shown in Figure 50(A), when a variable display based on a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern is initiated, a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the variable display (see Figure 50(B)). Then, a decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a predetermined reach mode, initiating the reach animation (see Figure 50(C)). At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C. Furthermore, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B are lit based on the loop light emission control described above (see Figure 24(B)).

Furthermore, while Figures 50(B) and (C) illustrate a configuration in which the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The decorative symbols may be temporarily displayed simultaneously in both the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R.

As shown in Figure 50(D), when the reach animation begins, the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are enlarged, and the reach line effect display 002SG250, which serves as a reach line suggestion image, is displayed superimposed on the variable-display decorative symbols (almost transparent and invisible) in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, thus initiating the reach line suggestion animation. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display that emphasizes the reach line connecting the decorative symbols temporarily displayed at the stopping positions in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and suggests that the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C will stop and display on the reach line.

Furthermore, in Figure 50(D), the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are not enlarged only for the character in the character display unit 002SG052, as in the variable stop action described above. Instead, the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative symbol are all enlarged at the same ratio. By using this enlarged display, which differs from the manner when the variable display is stopped, it is possible to recognize that the variable display has not stopped, but rather entered a reach state.

As shown in Figure 50(D), when the reach effect is initiated, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is initially displayed small, superimposed on the variable-display decorative symbol near the stopping position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. It then gradually extends linearly toward the stopping positions (left and right) of the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (see Figure 50(E)). After reaching the left and right edges of the display screen (see Figure 50(F)), its appearance changes to expand vertically (see Figure 50(G)), and then its transparency gradually increases through a fade-out display (see Figure 50(H)), finally disappearing and becoming invisible (see Figure 51(I)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50(F), in the reach line indication effect, it is possible to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 (by enlarging it). Additionally, when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changed, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B, which are located around (near) the display screen of the image display device 5, are turned off. This makes the area around the display screen darker than usual, thus making the reach line effect display 002SG250 more prominent.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50(D), after the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are enlarged, the left decorative symbol begins to move to the left, and the right decorative symbol begins to move to the right, that is, in a direction that separates them from each other (see Figure 50(E)). Then, while separating from each other, they rotate by a predetermined angle around a rotation axis that points in the vertical direction (see Figure 50(F)), and when they reach the furthest separated positions on the left and right sides of the display screen, the movement and rotation display ends, and they are temporarily stopped (see Figure 50(G)).

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 50(H), the decorative patterns on the left and right, which were displayed at the separated positions while still enlarged, are reduced in size and rotated as they move from the separated positions towards the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and are then restored to their normal display positions.

Then, as shown in Figure 51(I), when the decorative patterns are restored to the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and hidden, the decorative patterns that were variably displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decrease in scroll speed and transparency, fading in (see Figures 51(J) to (K)). Finally, the transparency of the decorative patterns becomes 0% (opaque), and they are displayed scrolling at a slow speed (see Figure 51(L)).

As shown in Figure 52, the CPU 120 for performance control can perform an enlarged display, which enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and a separated display, which separates the decorative symbols after the enlarged display has been performed. Since the second period te1, from the start to the end of the separated display, is longer than the first period td1, from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1 < te1), the player can recognize the decorative symbols forming a reach state.

Furthermore, since the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to its end is longer than the period tf1 for the enlarged decorative pattern to be restored to its original state (td2 < tf1), the decorative pattern forming the reach state can be recognized by the player, and when it is restored, it can be quickly reduced in size to prepare for the next animation.

Furthermore, when the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are enlarged, the left-right dimensions of the central decorative symbol display area 5C, where attention is focused on which decorative symbol will be displayed, narrow, making it difficult to see the variable display of the decorative symbols. Therefore, by performing a movement display that separates the left and right decorative symbols, the left and right decorative symbols, which have entered a reach state due to the enlarged display, are emphasized, and then attention can be quickly drawn to the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5C.

Furthermore, while the example given illustrates the reach line effect display 002SG250 being displayed immediately after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, thus entering a reach state, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed simultaneously with the entry into a reach state.

Furthermore, while the movable lamp 9d is shown as being turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 changes after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lamp may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Also, it is not limited to turning it off; the brightness may be reduced compared to when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a specific light-emitting means that is turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 changes is illustrated by using movable lamps 9d built into movable bodies 32A and 32B provided above and below the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific light-emitting means is not limited to those provided on movable bodies that can operate as described above, as long as it is a lamp provided around the image display device 5. For example, it could be a plurality of board-side lamps including the attacker lamp 9c provided on the game board, or the main lamp 9a or frame lamp 9b provided on the game machine frame 3. In particular, if the lamp is provided near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, turning it off can make the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out.

Furthermore, after the execution of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the timing at which the transparency of the variable-display decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is set to a second transparency F2, which is lower than the first transparency F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, is after the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been removed from the central decorative symbol display area 5C. This ensures that the variable-display decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5C do not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a form is illustrated in which the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the central decorative pattern display area 5C, and then the transparency of the decorative pattern in the central decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transparency may change to the second transparency F2 almost simultaneously with the erasure of the reach line effect display 002SG250 from the central decorative pattern display area 5C, or the transparency may change to the second transparency F2 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the erasure of the reach line effect display 002SG250 from the central decorative pattern display area 5C.

(Example of SP Reach animation operation)
Next, we will explain examples of the operation of the SP Reach演出 (SP Reach演出) based on Figures 53 to 55. Figure 53 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP Reach演出. Figure 54 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP Reach演出 that follows Figure 53. Figure 55 is a diagram showing examples of the operation of each part in the SP Reach演出.

As shown in Figure 53(A), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when controlled to a low base state, after the reach pattern described in Figure 50(C) is reached, the reach title display 002SG070 indicating the type of SP reach performance is displayed, notifying the reach title, and an SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as a notification performance to indicate whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figures 53(B) and (C)). In the SP reach performance, a fifth background image 002SG085 is displayed, which is different from the normal background images, the first background image 002SG081 and the second background image 002SG082, and represents space corresponding to the SP reach performance. Note that the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image with different appearances depending on the type of SP reach performance.

Next, from the moment the battle concludes until a predetermined valid operation period has elapsed, the operation prompt display 002SG071, consisting of the words "Press!!" prompting the user to press the push button 31B, and a button display 002SG072, which mimics the push button 31B, are displayed to initiate the operation (see Figure 53(D)).

Then, when an operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation validity period, or when no operation is detected and the operation validity period expires, the operation prompt display 002SG071 and the button display 002SG072 disappear, and the process ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color, the movable body 32B rises from its origin position to the performance position, an effect display 002SG073 emphasizing the movable body 32B is displayed, and a predetermined performance sound effect is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 53(E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the allied character has won the battle against the enemy character is shown, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP Reach animation is displayed as the background image, and a combination of symbols that guarantees a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed (see Figure 53(F)).

Then, as shown in Figure 53(G), upon the end of the SP reach sequence, the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. While the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that guarantees a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed. Afterward, character 002SG074 appears, holding a lit igniter. After appearing in the frame from the lower right edge of the display screen, the character runs to the left, igniting the number display sections 002SG051 of each decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see Figure 53(H)).

As shown in Figure 55(A), the specific image 002SG075, which represents a flame displayed by igniting at a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 of each symbol, increases along the periphery of the number display section 002SG051, as shown in Figures 55(B) to (D), and is displayed near the numbers on the number display section 002SG051. Furthermore, the flame image constituting the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in a loop of three images with different characteristics (specific image 002SG075A, specific image 002SG075B, and specific image 002SG075C), as shown in the enlarged view in Figure 55(D), creating the illusion of a flickering flame. Finally, the specific image 002SG075 disappears, the small symbols and decorative symbols stop, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 53(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position. Instead, the result notification display 002SG078, indicating that the ally character has lost the battle against the enemy character, is displayed (see Figure 53(K)). Then, in the notification performance, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that is not a winning combination (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 53(L)).

Then, as shown in Figure 53(M), upon the end of the notification animation (SP Reach animation), the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. While the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that results in a loss (for example, "232") is temporarily displayed. Subsequently, without displaying the specific image 002SG075, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed in a stopped state, and the loss result is derived and displayed (see Figure 53(N)).

Furthermore, in the variable display of the Super Reach variation pattern when controlled to a high base state, after a notification animation is performed indicating that the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 53(E)), and after a result display (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, in the notification animation, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP Reach animation is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed (see Figure 54(O)).

Then, as shown in Figure 54(P), upon the end of the notification animation (SP Reach animation), the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. While the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, a combination of symbols that guarantees a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed. Subsequently, without displaying the specific image 002SG075, each decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 54(Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position. Instead, the result notification display 002SG078, indicating that the ally character has lost the battle against the enemy character, is displayed (see Figure 53(K)). Then, in the notification performance, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that is not a winning combination (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 54(R)).

Then, as shown in Figure 54(S), upon the end of the notification animation (SP Reach animation), the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. While the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, a combination of symbols that results in a loss (for example, "232") is temporarily displayed. Subsequently, without displaying the specific image 002SG075, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed in a stopped state, and the loss result is derived and displayed (see Figure 54(T)).

Thus, in a low-base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in conjunction with the numerical display section 002SG051 of the jackpot-confirming decorative symbol that was displayed after the notification effect ended, thereby enhancing the effect and creating excitement (see Figures 53(H) and (I)). However, in a high-base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in conjunction with the numerical display section 002SG051 of the decorative symbol that was displayed after the notification effect ended (see Figure 54(S)), thereby giving a sense of speed to the variable display.

In this embodiment, while an example is shown where, in a low-base state, a specific image 002SG075 representing flames is displayed in close proximity to the numerical display section 002SG051 of the winning combination of decorative symbols displayed after the SP reach animation ends, the specific image is not limited to the flame-representing image 002SG075 described above. Other images (e.g., light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may also be applied.

Furthermore, the motion display of a specific image may include not only the flickering of flames as described above, but also the rotation of the specific image around the numerical display unit 002SG051, or changes in its shape or display color.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a specific image 002SG075 is displayed around the number display unit 002SG051 by the character 002SG074 acting on each decorative pattern temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image may be displayed without the character 002SG074 acting on each decorative pattern temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 56. Figure 56 shows (A1) to (A7) as a second modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, the variable stop action involved the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 being enlarged when the decorative pattern was temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a moving manner, moving in the opposite direction after passing the stop positions in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then returning to the stop position.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 56(A1) and (A2), the decorative pattern moves gradually downward in the direction of the white arrow while slowing down as it approaches the stopping position. When it reaches the stopping position and displays a temporary stop (see Figure 56(A3)), the base display unit 002SG054 and the information display unit 002SG053 remain temporarily stopped at the stopping position, while the number display unit 002SG051 and the character display unit 002SG052 continue to move downwards, passing the stopping position.

In this case, the distance L2 traveled by the numerical display unit 002SG051 from the time it passes the stopping position until the temporary stop display is shown is greater than the distance L1 traveled by the character display unit 002SG052 from the time it passes the stopping position until the temporary stop display is shown (L1 < L2).

Subsequently, the digit display unit 002SG051 and the character display unit 002SG052, having passed the stopping position, move upwards. The character display unit 002SG052 temporarily displays at the stopping position (see Figure 56(A5)), while the character display unit 002SG052 again passes the stopping position and moves upwards (see Figure 56(A6)). Thus, the distance L3 traveled from when the digit display unit 002SG051 passes the stopping position upwards until it displays a temporary stop is smaller than the distance L2 traveled from when the digit display unit 002SG051 passes the stopping position downwards until it displays a temporary stop (L3 < L2). Finally, the digit display unit 002SG051 moves downwards and displays a temporary stop at the stopping position (see Figure 56(A7)).

Furthermore, in Figure 56 (A6), the action in which only the character display unit 002SG052 passes the stop position and moves upward is an upward action that differs in nature from the variation start action A4 shown in Figure 23 (A), thus allowing the difference from the variation start action to be recognized.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches its stopping position, instead of displaying a temporary stop at that moment, the display shows at least some of the multiple display units that make up the decorative pattern moving to the opposite side and returning to the stopping position after passing the stopping position. This makes it appear as if some of the display units have passed by due to momentum, thus adding realism.

Furthermore, by temporarily stopping one of the multiple display units (for example, the base display unit 002SG054 and the information display unit 002SG053) at the stop position, while allowing the other second display units (for example, the numeric display unit 002SG051 and the character display unit 002SG052) to pass through the stop position, it is possible to create movement while ensuring that the stop position remains clear. Moreover, by making the travel distances of one of the second display units, the numeric display unit 002SG051, and the other, the character display unit 002SG052, different, it is possible to display actions that match the size and appearance of the display units.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 57. Figure 57 shows (A) to (D) as the third modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, when a decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first performance mode, as shown in Figure 21(A2), the decorative symbols before and after the temporarily stopped decorative symbol at the stop position are not temporarily stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a variable display based on a losing variation pattern, as shown in Figure 57(B), when any decorative symbol (for example, decorative symbol "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, some of the decorative symbols before and after it (for example, decorative symbols "2" and "4") may also be temporarily stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, when a variable-display decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see Figures 57(A) and (B)), and a variable-stop action is performed (see Figures 57(C) and (D)), it is preferable that the variable-stop action is performed only on the decorative pattern temporarily stopped at the stop position, and not on decorative patterns temporarily stopped in areas other than the stop position.

By doing this, when a losing combination of decorative symbols is derived as a result of the variable display of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged. This allows the player's attention to the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in these areas, and even when a losing combination that is meaningless to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept in the area where the decorative symbols are displayed. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged, decorative symbols not located in these areas are not enlarged. This allows the player's gaze to be concentrated on the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in these areas, and also reduces the load on the display control.

Furthermore, since loop illumination control continues even when the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged (see Figures 42 and 43), the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d can be simplified. Note that if multiple effective stop positions are set, a variable stop action may be performed for the decorative symbols temporarily displayed at each effective stop position.

(Other variations)
Furthermore, when the variable display mode changes to a reach mode and then develops into an SP reach performance, a specific operation including a first predetermined operation in which the left and right decorative symbols forming the reach mode move toward the front of the display screen and a second predetermined operation in which they move toward the back of the display screen may be used to move only the number display unit 002SG051 to a predetermined position on the display screen where the SP reach performance is displayed (for example, the upper left and right sides of the display screen). In this case, it is preferable that the movement speed of the decorative symbols is faster in the second predetermined operation than in the first predetermined operation.

Furthermore, in a system where the decorative symbols are displayed using the number display unit 002SG051 and the information display unit 002SG053 when the variable display is stopped, the number display unit 002SG051 may be enabled to perform a number variation start action different from that of the scrolling display when the variable display starts. Additionally, the information display unit 002SG053 may be enabled to perform an information display variation start action in conjunction with the number variation start action of the number display unit 002SG051. In this case, the information display variation start action may be completed before the number variation start action is completed, causing the information display unit 002SG053 to be erased.

While embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and any modifications or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are also included.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which either the first or second performance mode can be executed in a low base state, the third performance mode can be executed in a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth performance mode can be executed in a high-probability, high-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute three or more performance modes in a low base state, or three or more performance modes in a high base state.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which a first scrolling display in the vertical direction is performed in the first display mode, a second scrolling display that curves and moves from the back to the front in the second display mode, a rotating display in the third display mode, and a third scrolling display in the vertical direction in the fourth display mode, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the manner of variable display of decorative patterns in each display mode can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a scenario where a jackpot state is applied as an example of a favorable state for the player, the present invention is not limited to this. Other favorable states such as a time-saving state, a probability variation state, or a minor win state may also be applied.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the normal state is set to a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to perform variable displays and have a shorter average variable display period than the normal state, are set to a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be set to a low-probability state and the special states to a high-probability state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the present invention was illustrated as being applied to a pachinko game machine 1 that has a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a probability variation state (high probability high base state) as game states, and can be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variation state at the end of a big win game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on the fact that the variable display result was displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result was not a miss in the low probability state, or a time-saving state based on the fact that the variable display was executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to an advantageous state in the low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after a RAM clear (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a big win can be designated as Time-Saving State A, the time-saving state controlled based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state during a low-probability state after the end of an advantageous state or a RAM clear (cold start of pachinko machine 1) can be designated as Time-Saving State B, and the time-saving state controlled based on a specific result being displayed during a portion of the cases where the variable display result was not a miss in the low-probability state can be designated as Time-Saving State C.

Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine capable of controlling the aforementioned time-saving state C, multiple types of variable display results that result in winning the time-saving state C may be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed may differ depending on the type of variable display result when the time-saving state C is won.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used spherical game balls (pachinko balls) as an example of a game medium, it is not limited to spherical game media; for example, non-spherical game media such as tokens may also be used.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine, it can also be applied to slot machines, for example, where a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, and one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device capable of displaying multiple types of identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded according to the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to Big Bonus, Regular Bonus, Assist Time (AT), and the special state corresponds to Assist Time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of this invention can be applied to enclosed gaming machines and slot machines that enclose a gaming medium and award points based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of gameplay only needs to be one that allows for gameplay; it is not limited to pachinko machines or slot machines, but may also be a general-purpose game machine.

[Examples]
Furthermore, embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

[Form 1-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
Before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment images in the second predetermined part are displayed, the type of background image displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different.
Before a specific effect is executed and after the fragment images in that effect are displayed, the type of background image displayed on display layers with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs (see Figures 90-93, 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display images indicating impending breakage and fragments, and specific effects that display fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, since the background image differs before and after the fragments are displayed in both the predetermined and specific effects, even effects that similarly display fragments can give suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 1-2]
The gaming machines of type 1-2 are,
In a single variable display, both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed.
When a specific animation is performed without a predetermined animation being executed, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the predetermined animation is performed without the specific animation being executed (see Figures 90-93).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows viewers to focus on the execution of predetermined and specific performances, thereby enhancing their interest.

[Form 1-3]
Gaming machines of types 1-3 are,
The background image includes a first background image and a second background image which is more advantageous than the first background image.
The first predetermined part can be executed when the first background image is displayed.
During the execution of the second predetermined part, the second background image is displayed.
The second background image can be displayed even when a second background animation different from the predetermined animation is performed.
When the second background image is displayed through a predetermined animation, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the second background image is displayed through a second background prompt animation (see Figure 87).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows viewers to focus on whether the second background image is displayed through a predetermined animation or a second background teasing animation, thereby increasing interest and engagement.

[Form 1-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-1 is,
In a variable display, both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed.
The specified performance is a performance that can be executed before the decorative identification information enters a reach state.
A specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decorative identification information has entered a reach state.
When a predetermined animation is performed before a specific animation is executed, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when it is not performed (see Figures 90-93).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased interest by creating anticipation that both predetermined and specific effects will be performed.

[Form 1-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-2 is,
The specified performance is a performance that can be executed before the decorative identification information enters a reach state.
A specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decorative identification information has entered a reach state.
The background image includes a first background image before the decorative identification information reaches a certain state, a second background image which is more advantageous than the first background image before the decorative identification information reaches a certain state, a third background image which is more advantageous than the third background image after the decorative identification information reaches a certain state,
The fragment images in the second designated part are displayed together with the second background image.
In certain effects, fragment images are displayed together with the fourth background image (see Figures 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows viewers to focus on the relationship between predetermined effects, specific effects, and background images, thereby enhancing their interest.

[Form 1-4-3]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-3 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the second background image which is superimposed on it.
The fragment images in the specific performance are transparent images that allow recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed fourth background image (see Figures 116, 117, and 130).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to enhance the effects of the second predetermined part and specific effects.

[Form 1-4-4]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-4 is,
The fragment images can be rotated.
When the fragment image reaches a first angle due to the rotational movement, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the second background image that is superimposed on the fragment image.
When the fragment image is rotated to a second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the second background image that is superimposed on the fragment image (see Figures 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 1-4-5]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-5 is,
When the first fragment image among multiple fragment images is at a first angle, the second fragment image among multiple fragment images will be at a second angle (see Figures 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 1-5]
Gaming machines of types 1-5 are,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance are, in common, displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The time required for a fragment image displayed in a manner that moves in a specific direction to become invisible in the display area of the display means is longer than for a fragment image displayed in a manner that moves in a predetermined direction (see Figure 141).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 1-6]
Gaming machines of type 1-6 are,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
In a specific performance, the fragment images are displayed in a manner that they move without changing speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see Figure 129).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the natural display of fragmented images.

[Form 1-7-1]
The gaming machine of type 1-7-1 is,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance are, in common, displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance have the same duration required for them to become invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figures 132 and 137).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the correlation between predetermined effects and specific effects, thereby enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 1-7-2]
The gaming machine of type 1-7-2 is,
The visibility of the fragment images displayed as they move in a specific direction differs between the time the display starts and the time before they become invisible within the display area of the display means (see Figures 132 and 137).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 1-7-3]
The gaming machine of type 1-7-3 is,
In a specific performance, the fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction takes longer to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction in a predetermined performance (see Figure 141).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the natural display of fragmented images.

[Form 1-8]
Gaming machines of type 1-8 are,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance can be rotated.
The number of rotational movements performed from the time the first fragment image among multiple fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is the same as the number of rotational movements performed from the time the second fragment image among multiple fragment images in the specific effect is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the correlation between predetermined effects and specific effects, thereby enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 2-1]
The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when transitioning from a first predetermined part to a second predetermined part, and at a second timing when fragment images in a specific effect are displayed.
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to see the fragment image for the first period, but it is possible to see the fragment image for the second period after the first period has elapsed (see Figures 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display images indicating impending breakage and fragments, and specific effects that display fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This enables surprising players at various timings, and further reduces the sense of incongruity when fragments are displayed using effect images, allowing for the execution of predetermined and specific effects more effectively.

[Form 2-2]
The gaming machine of type 2-2 is,
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display duration (see Figures 120 and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the correlation between predetermined effects and specific effects, thereby enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 2-3]
The gaming machine of type 2-3 is,
The execution period for the first prescribed part is longer than the execution period for the second prescribed part.
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the execution period of the first predetermined part and the execution period of the second predetermined part (see Figure 120).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a seamless transition from displaying fragment images to using effect images.

[Form 2-4]
The gaming machine of type 2-4 is,
The display pattern of the effect image is the same for the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 102, 103, and 109).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the correlation between predetermined effects and specific effects, thereby enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 3-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
In a specific performance, the fragment images are displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed and moves over the duration of the display period of the fragment images (see Figures 105, 112, 122, 127, and 129).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display images of impending breakage and fragments, and specific effects that display only fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, because the speed at which the fragments move differs between the predetermined and specific effects, even effects that display fragments in the same way can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 3-2]
The gaming machine of type 3-2 is,
In a variable display, a predetermined effect can be executed multiple times, while a specific effect can only be executed once.
When a predetermined sequence of events is performed multiple times, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the predetermined sequence of events is performed only once.
The probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher when a specific effect is executed once than when a predetermined effect is executed multiple times (see Figures 90-93).
A gaming machine characterized by the following:
This feature allows viewers to focus on the execution of predetermined and specific performances, thereby enhancing their interest.

[Form 3-3]
The gaming machine of type 3-3 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and at the second timing when fragment images are displayed in a specific effect, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 105(C) and 112(C)).
A gaming machine characterized by the following:
This feature allows for differences in the display patterns of effect images between predetermined and specific effects, thereby enhancing the overall experience and enjoyment.

[Form 3-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-1 is,
In a specific performance, the fragment images are displayed in a manner that moves at a speed greater than a first speed during a first period from the start of display until a specific timing, and are displayed in a manner that moves at a second speed during a second period from the specific timing until they become invisible within the display area of the display means.
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figure 129).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 3-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-2 is,
At the timing when fragment images are displayed in a specific effect, it is possible to display an effect image.
The display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period, but does not overlap with the second period (see Figures 127, 129, and 138).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the effectiveness of specific effects.

[Form 3-5]
Gaming machines of type 3-5 are,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance can be rotated.
The number of rotational movements performed from the time the first fragment image among multiple fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational movements performed from the time the second fragment image among multiple fragment images in a specific effect is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figure 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 4-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an opaque image in which at least a portion of the superimposed background image is difficult to recognize.
The fragment images in specific effects are transparent images that allow recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figures 105, 112, 116, 117, 122, 127, and 139).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display images of impending breakage and fragments, and specific effects that display fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, because the display manner of the fragments differs between the predetermined effects and the specific effects, even effects that similarly display fragments can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 4-2]
The gaming machine of type 4-2 is,
A specific effect is an effect that includes displaying special images along with the display of fragment images.
In certain effects, the fragment images and special images are in a superimposed relationship.
In a specific performance, among multiple fragment images, the first fragment image is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image.
In a specific performance, among multiple fragment images, the second fragment image is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the special image.
In a specific performance, the third fragment image among multiple fragment images is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image and at least a portion of the special image (see Figure 139).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for different display patterns of fragment images for each effect, thereby enhancing the effect of each effect.

[Form 4-3-1]
The gaming machine of type 4-3-1 is,
In certain effects, the fragment images can be rotated.
When the first fragment image reaches a first angle due to the rotational movement, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image.
When the first fragment image reaches a second angle due to rotation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image (see Figures 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 4-3-2]
The gaming machine of type 4-3-2 is,
In a specific animation, when the first fragment image among multiple fragment images is at a first angle, the second fragment image among multiple fragment images will be at a second angle (see Figures 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 5-1]
The gaming machine of type 5-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance are, in common, displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The time required for fragment images displayed in a manner that moves in a specific direction to become invisible in the display area of the display means is longer than for fragment images displayed in a manner that moves in a predetermined direction (see Figures 105, 112, 122, and 127).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display both a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, and specific effects that display only the fragment image without showing the premonition image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment image moves is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the time required for it to disappear differs. Therefore, even though the effects display the same fragment image, they give suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 5-2]
The gaming machine of type 5-2 is,
The visibility of the fragment images displayed as they move in a specific direction differs between the time the display starts and the time before they become invisible within the display area of the display means (see Figures 134 and 138).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 5-3]
The gaming machine of type 5-3 is,
In a specific performance, the fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction takes longer to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction in a predetermined performance (see Figure 141).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences between predetermined and specific performances, enhancing interest through diverse presentation methods.

[Form 5-4]
The gaming machine of type 5-4 is,
In the second predetermined part, all fragment images are hidden in a manner that moves outward from the display area of the display means (see, for example, Figure 140(A)).
In a specific performance, the first fragment image among the fragment images is hidden in a manner that moves outward from the display area of the display means.
In a specific performance, a second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image, is hidden from view in the display area of the display means before it moves out of the display area (see, for example, Figure 140(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how fragment images are presented between predetermined and specific sequences, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 6-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image; a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from a first crack pattern to a second crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image; and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect that displays an object image and, in response to the movement of the object image, starts displaying multiple fragment images in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of a first crack pattern is displayed to when a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part may or may not be executed.
In a predetermined animation sequence, the period from the display of the image indicating the second type of crack to the display of the fragment image is longer than the period from the display of the object image to the display of the fragment image in a specific animation sequence.
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period of time from when it is displayed until it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means.
In a specific performance, the fragment image requires a second period, different from the first period, from the time it is displayed until it becomes invisible within the display area of the display means (see Figures 106-108, 116, 117, 123, and 124).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display both a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, and specific effects that display only the fragment image without showing the premonition image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, because the time between the display of the object image and the display of the fragment image, as well as the display period of the fragment image, differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 6-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-2 is,
The second prescribed part has a longer execution period than the first prescribed part (see Figures 116, 117, 122, and 127).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the entertainment value of a particular performance from diminishing due to a monotonous production structure.

[Form 6-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-3 is,
If the second predetermined part is executed and the third predetermined part is not executed thereafter, a fourth predetermined part can be executed which continues to display a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern for a longer period than the display period of the fragment image in the third predetermined part (see Figure 123).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a favorable indication that the third predetermined part will not be executed.

[Form 6-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-1 is,
The specified performance is a performance that sets the decorative identification information to a reach state.
There are two patterns: a first pattern in which a predetermined animation is performed and the decorative identification information enters a "reach" state, and a second pattern in which the decorative identification information enters a "reach" state without the predetermined animation being performed.
When the variable display is performed using the first pattern, the expected probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the variable display is performed using the second pattern (see Figure 123).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows viewers to focus on the execution of a predetermined sequence of events, thereby increasing their interest and engagement.

[Form 6-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-2 is,
In a variable display, both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed.
The specific performance can be executed after the third designated part has been performed.
When the third predetermined part is executed before the execution of a specific performance, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when it is not executed (see Figures 90 to 93).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows us to draw attention to the execution of the third predetermined part of the predetermined performance, thereby enhancing the audience's interest.

[Form 6-5]
The gaming machine of type 6-5 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part, and at the second timing when fragment images are displayed in a specific effect, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 106(G) and 108(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in the display patterns of effect images between predetermined and specific effects, thereby enhancing the overall experience and enjoyment.

[Form 6-6]
The gaming machine of type 6-6 is,
The prescribed performance is a performance that sets the decorative identification information to a reach state.
In the third predetermined part, it is possible to highlight the decorative identification information of the reach state.
In the third predetermined part, the period during which the decorative identification information of the reach state is highlighted is longer than the display period of the fragment image (see Figures 107(I) to 107(K)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a favorable indication that the device has reached a "reach" state.

[Form 6-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-1 is,
In the first predetermined part, it is possible to display an action-enhancing image in response to the movement of the object image.
It can be displayed in a display layer with a higher priority than a specific display layer.
At the timing when displaying the crack pattern and pre-crack images begins, an action-enhanced image is displayed (see Figure 106 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for seamless transformation of images showing signs of cracking into images depicting crack patterns.

[Form 6-7-2]
The gaming machine of type 6-7-2 is,
It is possible to display small fragment images along with motion-enhanced images.
The display period for the small fragment image is longer than the display period for the motion-enhanced image (see Figure 106(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a favorable indication that the crack precursor image has changed into a crack pattern.

[Form 6-7-3]
The gaming machine of type 6-7-3 is,
In the second predetermined part, an effect image can be displayed in response to the movement of the object image.
When displaying effect images, do not display motion enhancement images (see Figures 106(H) and 123).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences between the first and second predetermined parts, preventing the predetermined performance from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-7-4]
The gaming machine of type 6-7-4 is,
The time required for the small fragment image in the first predetermined part and the fragment image in the third predetermined part to become invisible in the display area of the display means are different (Figure 123).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 6-8]
The gaming machines of type 6-8 are,
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the superimposed background image,
The fragment images in the specific effects are opaque images in which at least a portion of the superimposed background image is difficult to recognize (see Figures 116, 117, and 130).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in the display of fragment images between predetermined and specific effects, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 6-9]
The gaming machine of type 6-9 is,
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without any change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
In a specific performance, the fragment images are displayed in a manner that they move without changing speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see Figure 129).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the natural display of fragmented images.

[Form 6-10]
The gaming machine of form 6-10 is,
The period required from when the fragment image in a specific effect is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the display means is longer than the period required from when the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the display means (see Figures 123 and 124).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences between predetermined and specific performances, enhancing interest through diverse presentation methods.

[Form 7-1]
The gaming machine of type 7-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
A motion detection means capable of detecting the player's movements,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute action-promoting effects that encourage the player to take action in response to the motion detection means.
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
It is possible to display an action-enhancing image in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
The action acceleration effect displays an action acceleration image throughout the action validity period, and when the player's action is detected, it changes the display mode of the action acceleration image from an action acceleration mode to an action completion mode.
When the action acceleration effect causes the action acceleration image to change from the action acceleration state to the action completion state, a specific effect can be executed.
During at least a portion of the execution period of a particular performance, it is possible to view both the action acceleration image of the completed action and the fragment image in the particular performance.
The display period of the fragment images in a specific performance is shorter than the display period of the action acceleration images in the action acceleration mode, and longer than the display period of the action acceleration images in the action completion mode (see Figures 102, 103, 112, 120, and 127).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined animations that display images indicating impending breakage and fragments, and specific animations that display fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and also prevents the entertainment value of specific animations from diminishing due to a monotonous animation structure.

[Form 8-1]
The gaming machine of type 8-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
Before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed, the type of background image displayed on the display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different.
Before the execution of the third predetermined part and when the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different (see Figures 102, 103, 105, 120, and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of the first and second predetermined effects, which display the premonition image of the breakage and the fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, since the background image differs before and after the fragment image is displayed in both the first and second predetermined effects, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 8-2]
The gaming machine of type 8-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part (see Figures 102, 103, 105, 120, and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 9-1]
The gaming machine of type 9-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
The display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when transitioning from a first predetermined part to a second predetermined part, and at a second timing when transitioning from a third predetermined part to a fourth predetermined part.
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to see the fragment image for the first period, but it is possible to see the fragment image for the second period after the first period has elapsed (see Figures 102, 103, 105, 120, and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, the use of effect images reduces the sense of incongruity when the fragment image is displayed, allowing for the execution of the first and second predetermined effects more effectively.

[Form 9-2]
The gaming machine of type 9-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part (see Figures 102, 103, and 105).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 10-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed and moves over the display period of the fragment image (see Figures 102, 103, 110, 111, 120, 126, and 129).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, because the speed at which the fragment image moves differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even effects that display fragment images in the same way can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 10-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and at the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 102(G) and 110(H)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in the display patterns of effect images between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 10-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-1 is,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves at a speed greater than a first speed during a first period from the start of display until a specific timing, and is displayed in a manner that moves at a second speed during a second period from the specific timing until it is hidden.
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figure 129).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 10-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-2 is,
When the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, the effect image can be displayed.
In the fourth predetermined part, the display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period, but does not overlap with the second period (see Figures 110 and 129).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the effectiveness of specific effects.

[Form 10-4]
The gaming machine of form 10-4 is,
In the second predetermined part, all of the fragment images are hidden in a manner that moves outward from the display area of the display means (see Figure 140(A)).
In the fourth predetermined part, the first fragment image among the fragment images is hidden in a manner that moves outward from the display area of the display means.
In the fourth predetermined part, the second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image, is hidden in the display area of the display means before it moves out of the display area (see Figure 140(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first predetermined presentation and the second specific presentation, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 10-5]
The gaming machine of form 10-5 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the superimposed background image,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image that can recognize at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figures 116, 117, and 130).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-6-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-1 is,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
In the fourth predetermined part, the fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part (see Figures 75 and 133).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-6-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-2 is,
The visibility of the fragment images displayed as they move in a specific direction differs between the time the display starts and the time before they disappear (see Figures 75 and 133).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-1 is,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are capable of rotation.
The number of rotational movements performed from the time the first fragment image among multiple fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational movements performed from the time the second fragment image among multiple fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figure 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-2 is,
When the fragment image reaches a first angle due to the rotational movement, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image.
When the fragment image reaches a second angle due to rotation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image (see Figures 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-3 is,
When the first fragment image is at a first angle, the second fragment image among the multiple fragment images will be at a second angle (see Figures 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-8]
The gaming machine of form 10-8 is,
In a variable display, both the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed before the decorative identification information enters a reach state.
The second prescribed performance is a performance that can be executed after the decorative identification information has entered a reach state.
When the first predetermined performance is performed before the second predetermined performance is performed, the probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when it is not performed (see Figures 90 to 93).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows us to draw attention to the execution of the first predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest and engagement.

[Form 10-9]
The gaming machine of form 10-9 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part (see Figures 120 and 126).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of cracks in a specific pattern.

[Form 11-1]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an opaque image in which at least a portion of the superimposed background image is difficult to recognize.
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is a transparent image that can recognize at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figures 105, 102, 103, 122, and 120).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display images of the impending breakage and fragments, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, because the display patterns of the fragments differ between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even effects that similarly display fragments can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 12-1]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in at least multiple directions, including a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The time required for a fragment image to disappear from the display area of the display means is longer for a fragment image that is moved in a specific direction than for a fragment image that is moved in a predetermined direction.
The fragment image displayed in the fourth predetermined part moving in a specific direction takes longer to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part moving in a specific direction (see Figures 102, 103, 110, 111, 120, and 126).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment image moves is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the time required for it to disappear differs. Therefore, even effects that display fragment images in the same way can give suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 13-1]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image; a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from a first crack pattern to a second crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image; and a third predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part which displays an object image and a crack precursor image of a third crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a fifth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image in accordance with the movement of the object image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The length of the execution period differs between the first prescribed part and the fourth prescribed part.
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part may or may not be executed.
The period from the start of the second prescribed part to the transition to the third prescribed part is longer than the period from the start of the fourth prescribed part to the transition to the fifth prescribed part.
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period of time from when it is displayed until it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means.
In the fifth predetermined part, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from the time it is displayed until it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figures 102, 103, 106, 107, 123, and 120).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, because the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed, as well as the display period of the fragment image, differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 13-2]
The gaming machine of form 13-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, a crack precursor image can be displayed in a first crack pattern according to the movement of the object image.
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the third pre-crack state to the third crack state (see Figures 106 and 102).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of cracks in a specific pattern.

[Form 14-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part that displays a premonition image of cracking, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the premonition image of cracking,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a cracking premonition image, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking premonition image,
The second predetermined performance can be executed at a specific timing after the first predetermined performance has been executed.
The length of the execution period is the same for both the first prescribed part and the third prescribed part.
The length of the execution period is the same for the second prescribed part and the fourth prescribed part.
When the second predetermined performance is executed after the first predetermined performance, the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part is hidden in the display area of the display means, and then the third predetermined part is started (see Figures 99, 100, and 118).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the continuous execution of the first and second predetermined sequences, which display images of impending breakage and fragments, thereby continuously surprising the player. Furthermore, since the third predetermined sequence begins after the fragment images from the second predetermined sequence are hidden, it prevents a decrease in the effectiveness of the presentation due to the display of new impending breakage images even though fragment images have already been shown.

[Form 14-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The starting position for displaying the fragment images differs between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part (see Figures 99, 100, and 141).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 14-3]
The gaming machine of form 14-3 is,
In both the second and fourth designated parts, special images can be displayed along with the fragment images.
The special images in the second designated part are displayed in the first manner.
The special image in the fourth designated part is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner (see Figures 99(F) and 100(F)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how special images are presented between the first and second predetermined sequences, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 14-4]
The gaming machine of form 14-4 is,
The display duration of the fragment images differs between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part, while the display duration of the special images is the same (see Figure 118).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 14-5]
The gaming machine of form 14-5 is,
There are two patterns: a first pattern in which the second predetermined performance is performed after the first predetermined performance, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined performance is not performed after the first predetermined performance.
The probability of the game being controlled to a favorable state is higher when the game progresses according to the first pattern than when the game progresses according to the second pattern (see Figure 84).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows us to draw attention to the execution of the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest and engagement.

[Form 14-6]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that it moves without changing speed throughout the display period of the fragment image (see Figure 129).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a greater connection between the first and second predetermined performances, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 14-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-1 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and at the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image is the same for the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 99(C), 100(C), and 118).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the connection between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby increasing the effectiveness of both.

[Form 14-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-2 is,
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display duration (see Figure 118).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the connection between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby increasing the effectiveness of both.

[Form 15-1]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
When it is announced through a notification sequence that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, a premonition image of the second type of crack is displayed, and multiple fragment images corresponding to the premonition image are displayed.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part requires a first period of time before it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means.
When it is announced through a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period before it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figures 102, 103, 115, 120, and 128(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a predetermined sequence of events that displays images of impending breakage and fragments, thereby surprising the player. Furthermore, by displaying the impending breakage image along with fragment images that have a different duration of disappearance than the fragment images in the predetermined sequence, the player can be informed that they will not be controlled to an appropriately advantageous state.

[Form 15-2]
The gaming machine of form 15-2 is,
The pre-breakdown image displayed when it is announced that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state has a longer display period than the pre-breakdown image in the first predetermined part (see Figure 120).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a favorable indication that the system is not controlled to a favorable state.

[Form 15-3]
The gaming machine of form 15-3 is,
In the second designated part, among multiple fragment images, there is a first fragment image with the largest display size.
When it is reported that the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, there is a second fragment image among the multiple fragment images that has the largest display size,
The first fragment image has a larger display size than the second fragment image (see, for example, Figures 103(J) and 115(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in how fragment images are presented, thereby increasing their appeal.

[Form 15-4]
The gaming machine of form 15-4 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the superimposed background image,
When it is reported that the system is not controlled to a favorable state, the fragment image is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figure 130).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in how fragment images are presented, thereby increasing their appeal.

[Form 15-5]
The gaming machine of type 15-5 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image when it is notified that the system is not controlled to a favorable state are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction (see, for example, Figures 75 and 134).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a more coherent presentation of fragment images, enhancing their appeal.

[Form 15-6]
The gaming machine of form 15-6 is,
In both the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and the second timing when a fragment image is displayed upon notification that the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 102(G) and 115(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in the display patterns of effect images, enhancing their appeal.

[Form 16-1]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
When it is announced through a notification effect that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the premonition image of the second crack pattern can be displayed.
When a crack precursor image of the first crack pattern is displayed, the light-emitting means emits light according to the first light-emitting pattern.
When a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern is displayed, the light-emitting means emits light according to the second light-emitting pattern.
The light emission of the light-emitting means according to the first light emission pattern continues until the second predetermined part is executed.
The illumination of the light-emitting means according to the second light-emitting pattern continues after the notification performance in which it is announced that the system is not controlled to an advantageous state has ended, until predetermined conditions are met (see Figures 102, 103, 115, 120, and 128(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a predetermined animation that displays a premonition image of a break, thereby surprising the player. Furthermore, by using the premonition image of a break and a second light emission pattern that continues until predetermined conditions are met after the end of the notification animation, the player can be notified that they are not being controlled to an appropriately advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
When it is announced through a notification sequence that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the premonition image of the second crack pattern can be displayed.
The type of background image differs before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image is displayed in the second predetermined part (see Figures 102(A) to 102(F), and Figures 103(I) to 103(K)).
The display of the background image differs before the notification of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state is given, and when the fragment image is displayed after it is announced that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state (see Figures 115(A), 115(B), 115(D), 120, and 128(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a predetermined animation that displays a premonition image of a break, thereby surprising the player. Furthermore, by using the premonition image of a break and changing the display pattern of the background image before it is announced whether or not the game will be controlled to a favorable state, the player can be properly informed that the game will not be controlled to a favorable state.

[Form 18-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, a fifth predetermined part that starts the first movement of the movable body, and a sixth predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
In the sixth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body ends after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 102, 103, 105, 120, and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of cracking and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, by activating a movable part to display the fragment image after displaying the premonition image of cracking, a more impactful effect can be provided.

[Form 18-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part (see Figures 120 and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 18-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-1 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part, and at the second timing when transitioning from the fifth predetermined part to the sixth predetermined part, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 102(G) and 105(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in the display patterns of effect images, enhancing their appeal.

[Form 18-3-2]
The gaming machine of type 18-3-2 is,
The first movement is the movement of the movable body from the origin position toward the advance position.
The effect image is displayed when the movable body is positioned in the extension position (see Figure 105(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a sense of unity by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of effect images, thereby enhancing the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 18-3-3]
The gaming machine of type 18-3-3 is,
The duration of the first movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image.
The display period of the fragment image in the sixth predetermined part is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 122).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to enhance the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 18-4]
The gaming machine of form 18-4 is,
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the second predetermined performance and suggests that the system will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating a movable body.
As the movable body moves, a display area superimposed on the movable body can be displayed,
In the suggestive presentation, an image highlighting the movable body is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body, whereas in the fifth predetermined part, an image highlighting the movable body is not displayed in conjunction with the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 122).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the image that emphasizes the movable body.

[Form 19-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern along with the first movement of the movable body, and a fifth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
In the fifth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body is completed before the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 102, 103, 113, 114, 120, and 128(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display images of impending breakage and fragments, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, by operating a movable part to display the impending breakage image, a more impactful effect can be provided.

[Form 19-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part (see Figures 120 and 128).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 19-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-1 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part, and at the second timing when transitioning from the fourth predetermined part to the fifth predetermined part, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 102(G) and 113(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in the display patterns of effect images between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 19-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-2 is,
The second movement is the movement of the movable body from the advanced position toward the origin position.
The effect image is displayed when the second operation begins (see Figure 113(F)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a sense of unity by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of effect images, thereby enhancing the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 19-3-3]
The gaming machine of type 19-3-3 is,
The duration of the second movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image.
The display period of the fragment image in the fifth predetermined part is longer than the period of the second movement of the movable body (see Figure 128).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to enhance the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 19-4]
The gaming machine of form 19-4 is,
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the second predetermined performance and suggests that the system will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating a movable body.
As the movable body moves, a display area superimposed on the movable body can be displayed,
In the suggestive presentation, an image highlighting the movable body is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body, whereas in the fourth predetermined part, an image highlighting the movable body is not displayed in conjunction with the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 128).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the image that emphasizes the movable body.

[Form 20-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which, in response to the first movement of a movable body, the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect until a fragment image corresponding to the premonition image of cracking is displayed.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
In a specific performance, the movable body is capable of performing a second action different from the first action, and the movable body starts this second action after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display pre-breakage images and fragment images, as well as specific effects, at different timings, thereby surprising players at various points in time. Furthermore, by operating a movable part to display fragment images without displaying pre-breakage images, it is possible to provide a more impactful presentation.

[Form 20-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-1 is,
The first movement is the movement of the movable body from the origin position toward the advanced position.
The effect image is displayed when the first operation begins (see Figure 109(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a sense of unity by linking the movement of the movable parts with the display of effect images, thereby enhancing the visual effect of specific effects.

[Form 20-2-2]
The gaming machine of type 20-2-2 is,
The effect image can be displayed over a display period that includes the first and second display periods.
The length of the first movement period of the movable body and the length of the first display period of the effect image are approximately the same.
The display period of the fragment images in a specific effect is longer than the duration of the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 125).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the enhancement of the visual effects of specific performances.

[Form 20-3]
The gaming machine of form 20-3 is,
It is possible to perform an effect that is different from a specific effect, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state by operating a movable body.
As the movable body moves, a display area superimposed on the movable body can be displayed,
In suggestive effects, a highlight image of the movable body is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body, whereas in specific effects, a highlight image of the movable body is not displayed in conjunction with the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 125).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the effect of certain visual effects from being diminished by images that emphasize moving parts.

[Form 21-1]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
The first predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack premonition image of the first crack pattern,
The second predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack premonition image of the second crack pattern,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
Even if a crack precursor image of the first or second crack precursor is displayed, the background image can be seen together with the crack precursor image.
When no crack precursor image of the first or second crack pattern is displayed, the image displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is displayed with first visibility.
When the image of the first type of crack precursor is displayed, the background image is displayed with a second level of visibility that is less visible than the first level of visibility.
When a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern is displayed, an image displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is displayed with a second level of visibility over a predetermined range, and an image displayed with a first level of visibility over a specific range different from the predetermined range (see Figures 102(E), (F), 104(C), 120, and 121).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance, each displaying a different crack pattern in a premonition image, at different timings. This allows for surprising the player at various times, and furthermore, because the visibility of the background image visible along with the premonition image differs depending on the type of crack pattern, even performances that similarly display premonition images can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 21-2]
The gaming machine of form 21-2 is,
The boundary between a predetermined range and a specific range can be displayed with a third level of visibility that is more visible than the first and second levels of visibility (see Figure 104(C) enlarged view).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to enhance the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 21-3]
The gaming machine of form 21-3 is,
A special display layer with a higher priority than the designated display layer can display a corresponding image that supports variable display.
When a crack precursor image is displayed in the second crack pattern, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed over a predetermined range, but not superimposed over a specific range (see Figure 104(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of a suitable corresponding image even while the second predetermined performance is being executed.

[Form 21-4]
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is,
The display period for the pre-cracking image of the second crack pattern is longer than the display period for the pre-cracking image of the first crack pattern (see Figure 121).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the premonition images are presented between the first and second predetermined sequences, thereby enhancing the overall experience and appeal.

[Form 22-1]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
The first predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack premonition image of the first crack pattern,
The second predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack premonition image of the second crack pattern,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The visibility of the background image differs depending on whether the image showing the first type of crack precursor is displayed or the image showing the second type of crack precursor is displayed.
The pre-cracking images for the second type of cracking lasted longer than the pre-cracking images for the first type of cracking.
There are multiple types of images showing the precursor to the second type of cracking.
When a pre-cracking image of the second type of second crack pattern is displayed, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when a pre-cracking image of the first type of second crack pattern is displayed (see Figures 101-103, 119, and 120).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance, each displaying a different crack pattern in a premonition image, at different timings. This allows for surprising the player at various times, and furthermore, the player will pay attention to the type of premonition image in the second crack pattern, giving a suitably different impression even when the same premonition image is displayed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22-2]
The gaming machine of form 22-2 is,
The visibility of the background image displayed below a predetermined display layer differs depending on whether a crack precursor image of the first type of second crack pattern is displayed or a crack precursor image of the second type of second crack pattern is displayed (see Figures 102 and 101).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in how images showing signs of cracking are presented, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-3]
The gaming machine of form 22-3 is,
In both the first and second predetermined effects, it is possible to display effect images of a specific color.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect at the second timing (see Figures 102 and 101).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in the display patterns of effect images, enhancing their appeal.

[Form 23-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to perform a change effect that alters the display mode of the corresponding image that supports variable display.
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
In the special display layer, it is possible to display corresponding images that support variable display.
The first pre-crack image can be displayed in the first predetermined display layer, which has a higher priority than the special display layer.
The second pre-break image can be displayed in the second predetermined display layer, which has a lower priority than the special display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer.
The first predetermined effect is an effect that displays the first premonition image of a break,
The second prescribed effect is an effect that displays a second premonition image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
When the first crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases.
When the second crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease.
If the first predetermined effect is executed, the change effect will not be executed.
When the second predetermined performance is executed, the change performance can be executed (see Figures 102-104, 120, 121, and 148).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined animation displaying a first premonition image and a second predetermined animation displaying a second premonition image at different timings, thereby surprising players at various times. Furthermore, even in animations that similarly display premonition images, the display layer and the presence or absence of change animations differ, creating distinctly different impressions and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 23-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-1 is,
The transformation effect is an effect that displays a predetermined object image and changes the display mode of the corresponding display by having the predetermined object image perform an action that affects the corresponding display.
A predetermined object image can be displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see Figure 148).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a change effect without significantly reducing the effect of the second predetermined effect.

[Form 23-2-2]
The gaming machine of type 23-2-2 is,
In response to the movement of a predetermined object image, a change-enhancing image can be displayed on a display layer above the special display layer so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image (see Figure 148).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the appropriate execution of the change effect even while the second predetermined effect is being performed.

[Form 24-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
A first predetermined performance can be executed that suggests the game is controlled to a favorable state.
A second predetermined performance can be executed that suggests the game is controlled to a favorable state.
After the execution of the second prescribed performance, a special performance can be performed.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern, and displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern, and displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The fragment images in the first predetermined presentation and the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation have different display modes.
The fragment images in the second predetermined performance include images in a suggestive manner that indicate that a special performance will be performed.
The display period of the fragment image in the second predetermined performance is longer than the display period of the fragment image in the first predetermined performance (see Figures 102, 120, 125, 149, and 150).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined sequence and a second predetermined sequence, which display images of impending breakage and fragments, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, since the display patterns of the fragment images differ between the first and second predetermined sequences, and the relationship between the fragment images in the second predetermined sequence and the subsequent sequence can be enhanced, even sequences that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 24-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-2 is,
There are two types of special performances: the first special performance and the second special performance.
When the second special effect is performed, the probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the first special effect is performed.
The suggestive mode includes a first suggestive mode that suggests the first special performance will be performed, and a second suggestive mode that suggests the second special performance will be performed (see Figures 149, 150, and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-1 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined presentation includes a suggestive form and a transparent form that allows at least a portion of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer to be visible.
Images of fragments in the transparent mode are displayed more frequently than images of fragments in the suggestive mode (see Figure 151).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-3-2]
The gaming machine of type 24-3-2 is,
The fragment images can be rotated.
In the second predetermined presentation, the fragment image in the transparent mode has a greater amount of rotational movement than the fragment image in the suggestive mode (see Figure 151).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-4]
The gaming machine of form 24-4 is,
The second prescribed production includes the first prescribed part and the second prescribed part,
In the first predetermined part, multiple fragment images of the suggestive form are displayed, and multiple fragment images of the transparent form are displayed.
In the second predetermined part, a single fragment image of the suggestive form is displayed, and multiple fragment images of the transparent form are displayed (see Figure 150).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of type 25 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the preceding performance (Figure 109(C)) can be executed.
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined effect includes displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 137 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form (Figures 137 (B2) to (B5)).
The execution period of the preliminary sequence is longer than the display period of the cracked image in the first embodiment (see Figures 125 and 137).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the preceding animation creates anticipation for the crack, and the crack image in the first mode conveys a sense of speed, thereby achieving a desirable crack pattern.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the preceding performance (Figure 109(C)) can be executed.
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined effect includes displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 137 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form (Figures 137 (B2) to (B5)).
The combined period for displaying the cracked image in the first mode and the period for displaying it in the second mode is longer than the execution period of the preceding sequence (see Figures 125 and 137).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the crack pattern is made more memorable by making the period during which the cracked image is in its first and second forms longer than the duration of the preceding sequence.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of type 27 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap for at least part of the time.
The display period for the effect image is shorter than the display period for the cracked image.
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to see the cracked image throughout the first period, but it is possible to see the cracked image throughout the second period after the first period has elapsed.
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figures 118-128 and 75-138).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image serves to hide the initial visible portion of the cracked image, fulfilling its purpose while preventing the effect image from being emphasized more than the cracked image.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of type 28 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
The predetermined effect is an effect that includes displaying a cracked image in a first form, and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form.
The display means displays an effect image when displaying the cracked image in the first embodiment, and hides the effect image at the timing before displaying the cracked image in the second embodiment (see Figures 118 to 128 and 75 to 138).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the cracked image from appearing unnatural by obscuring the initial visible portion of the cracked image with the effect image.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of type 29 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 136 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form (Figures 136 (B2) to (B5)).
In the second embodiment, the transparency of the cracked image differs between the first timing and the second timing during the display period of the cracked image (see Figures 124 and 136).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when the cracked image of the second embodiment is displayed.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of type 30 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to perform certain effects that suggest the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined effect includes displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 75 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form (Figures 75 (B2) to (B5)).
The specific effect includes displaying a cracked image in the third form (Figure 136 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third form to the fourth form (Figures 136 (B2) to (B5)).
The transparency of the cracked image at a predetermined timing after the start of display of the cracked image in the second embodiment is different from that of the cracked image at a specific timing after the start of display of the cracked image in the fourth embodiment (see Figures 120, 124, 75, 136, and 140(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when the cracked image of the second embodiment is displayed compared to when the cracked image of the fourth embodiment is displayed.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to perform certain effects that suggest the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed in normal conditions, and includes the following: after displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 75 (B1)), the cracked image is changed from the first form to a second form (Figures 75 (B2) to (B5)).
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed in a special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, and includes the performance of displaying a cracked image in a third form (Figure 136 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third form to a fourth form (Figures 136 (B2) to (B5)),
The transparency of the cracked image at a predetermined timing after the start of display of the cracked image in the second embodiment is different from that of the cracked image at a specific timing after the start of display of the cracked image in the fourth embodiment (see Figures 87-89, 120, 124, 75, 136, and 140(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when the cracked image of the second embodiment is displayed compared to when the cracked image of the fourth embodiment is displayed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Background images can be displayed on display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a display layer with a higher priority than a specific display layer.
The light emission control means is,
When a cracked image is displayed, the emission control of the light-emitting means is performed using a specific brightness data table.
The light emission control of the light emission means is performed using a specific luminance data table until a specific timing during the display period of the cracked image, and thereafter the specific timing, the light emission control of the light emission means is performed using a luminance data table corresponding to the background image (see Figures 118 to 120 and 123).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal control of the light emission of the light emission means when a cracked image is displayed.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap for at least part of the time.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image at the timing when the effect image is displayed (see Figures 118 to 124).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when a cracked image is displayed.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see Figure 118), but does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (see Figure 125).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of cracked images using multiple display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see Figure 118), and outputs a sound indicating that the system is controlled to an advantageous state when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (see Figure 128).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of cracked images using multiple display patterns that give different impressions depending on the game state.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
The cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The crack precursor image is an image that can be displayed before the crack image is displayed when the crack image is displayed according to the first pattern.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see Figure 118), but does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (see Figure 125).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of cracked images using multiple display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
The cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The means of sound output is,
It is possible to output a predetermined sound when a crack warning image is displayed.
It is possible to output a specific sound when a cracked image is displayed.
The specific sound output by the sound output means is louder than a predetermined sound (see Figure 145).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a clear distinction between when the pre-cracking image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed, effectively creating a more impactful impression when the cracked image is shown.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of type 38 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
The cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
It is possible to display an image indicating a crack in conjunction with the movement display of the object image.
The means of sound output is,
When a crack warning image is displayed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the object image.
When a cracked image is displayed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to that cracked image (see Figure 145).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a clear distinction between when the pre-cracking image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed, effectively creating a more impactful impression when the cracked image is shown.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value, and as a result, the operating speed of the fragment image of the first size and the fragment image of the second size, which is smaller than the first size, are different.
In the second pattern, the amount of variation is zero, meaning that the operating speed of the third-size fragment image and the fourth-size fragment image, which is smaller than the third size, are the same (see Figures 130 and 131).
It is characterized by the following.
According to these characteristics, the first pattern involves fragments that are affected by animation differently depending on their size. Smaller fragments fly faster, while larger fragments fall somewhat slower, resulting in a shattering pattern that can be used when you want to show realistic movement. The second pattern, on the other hand, involves fragments that are affected by animation in the same way regardless of size, resulting in a similar flying and falling pattern. This allows you to select the appropriate shattering pattern depending on the scene.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of type 40 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The fragment images are displayed in a manner that shows them falling from the moment the display starts.
There are two display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first and second patterns differ in their gravity settings, resulting in different falling speeds for the fragment images (see Figures 130 and 131).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the creation of diverse patterns by varying the parameter values and thus the speed at which the fragment images fall, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The setting of the gravity direction differs between the first and second patterns, resulting in different directions of movement when the fragment images are displayed as they move (see Figures 130 and 131).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the creation of diverse patterns by varying parameter values and thus the direction in which the fragment images progress, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are three display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1, Pattern 2, and Pattern 3.
The first pattern comprises a first parameter relating to the display of the fragment image and a second parameter relating to the display of the fragment image.
The second pattern consists of the first parameter and the second parameter,
The third pattern consists of the first parameter and the second parameter,
The first, second, and third patterns share the same value for the first parameter, but the second parameter differs (see Figures 130 and 131).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by fixing the value of the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment images, while varying the value of the second parameter, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns, thereby creating stable and diverse display patterns for fragment images.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are three display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1, Pattern 2, and Pattern 3.
The first pattern comprises a first parameter relating to the display of the fragment image and a second parameter relating to the display of the fragment image.
The second pattern consists of the first parameter and the second parameter,
The third pattern consists of the first parameter and the second parameter,
In the first and second patterns, the value of the first parameter is the same, but the value of the second parameter is different.
The second and third patterns have different values for the first parameter, but the second parameter is the same (see Figures 130 and 131).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the construction of stable and diverse fragment image display patterns by creating common parts for each pattern while using different parameter values.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed under normal conditions.
The cracked image in the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
Before the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, and after the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer differs.
Before the cracked image is displayed by the second pattern, and after the cracked image is displayed by the second pattern, the type of background image displayed in display layers with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs (see Figures 87, 89, 102-104).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for different impressions to be created and enhances interest when displaying a cracked image under normal conditions compared to when displaying it under special conditions.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of type 45 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
The predetermined effect is an effect that includes displaying a cracked image in a first form, and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form.
The means of display are,
In the normal state and in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, a cracked image can be displayed.
When displaying the cracked image in the first embodiment, an effect image is displayed, and the effect image is hidden at the timing before displaying the cracked image in the second embodiment (see Figures 87, 89, 102, and 103).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the cracked image from appearing unnatural by obscuring the initial visible portion of the cracked image with the effect image.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of type 46 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed under normal conditions.
The cracked image in the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The cracked image displayed by the first pattern and the cracked image displayed by the second pattern are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The cracked image displayed by the first pattern and the cracked image displayed by the second pattern move at different speeds (see Figures 87, 89, 102-104).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects during the special state by displaying cracked images in a way that doesn't disrupt the tempo of the special state.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of type 47 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed under normal conditions.
The cracked image in the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The expected probability of being controlled to a favorable state when a cracked image is displayed by the first pattern is different from the expected probability of being controlled to a favorable state when a cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 84, 86(C), 87, and 89).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for greater attention to be drawn to the image's display pattern, as the expected degree of control to a favorable state differs depending on the cracked image's display pattern.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of type 48 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images of type 1 can be displayed on a predetermined display layer.
Multiple fragment images of the second type can be displayed on a specific display layer with a lower priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
The display period for the first type of fragment image and the display period for the second type of fragment image overlap in at least part.
The first type of fragment image is a depiction of a character,
The second type of fragment image has a transparent appearance that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image displayed in a display layer lower than a specific display layer (see Figures 137 and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the creation of a memorable visual effect by overlapping the display periods of two different types of fragment images with varying display modes.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of type 49 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images of type 1 can be displayed on a predetermined display layer.
Multiple fragment images of the second type can be displayed on a specific display layer with a lower priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
The display period for the first type of fragment image and the display period for the second type of fragment image overlap in at least part.
The display method differs between the first type of fragment image and the second type of fragment image.
The display period for the first type of fragment image is longer than the display period for the second type of fragment image (see Figures 137 and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the creation of a memorable visual effect by overlapping the display periods of two different types of fragment images with varying display modes.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of type 50 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
A means of display, and comprising,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The movable body is capable of superimposing itself onto the display area of the display means.
The display period of the fragment images and the operation period of the movable body overlap at least partially.
The fragment images displayed in the first display area, where the movable object does not overlap, are displayed in greater quantity than the fragment images displayed in the second display area, where the movable object does overlap (see Figures 137 and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of fragments effectively while the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
A means of display, and comprising,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The movable body is capable of superimposing itself onto the display area of the display means.
The display period of the fragment images and the operation period of the movable body overlap at least partially.
The first fragment image among multiple fragment images is displayed in a manner that it moves from a first region, which is a display area where the movable body does not overlap, into a second region, which is a display area where the movable body overlaps.
The second fragment image among multiple fragment images is displayed in a manner that moves within the first region so as not to enter the second region (see Figures 137 and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a dynamic presentation by providing fragment images that do not enter the area where the moving object is superimposed, thereby conveying the idea that the object has broken, while also providing fragment images that pass through the area where the moving object is superimposed.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
A means of display, and comprising,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The movable body is capable of superimposing itself onto the display area of the display means.
The display period of the fragment images and the operation period of the movable body overlap at least partially.
Even after the movable body superimposed on the display area of the display means moves to a position where it no longer superimposes on the display area, the fragment image continues to be displayed (see Figures 137 and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of fragment images in a suitable manner, ensuring that no fragment images are missed, even when the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a premonition image of cracking, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images of a first type corresponding to the premonition image of cracking.
The display means is capable of displaying multiple fragment images of the second type when a crack precursor image is displayed.
The second type of fragment image takes less time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the first type of fragment image (see Figures 106 and 107).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects in displaying fragmented images.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of type 54 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer.
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first pattern is one in which the first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The second pattern is one in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
Before the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, and after the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer differs.
Before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern, and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern, the type of background image displayed in display layers with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs (see Figures 102, 103, and 108).
It is characterized by the following.
This characteristic means that a specific character appears in common across multiple cracked image display patterns, thus increasing the level of attention given to that particular character.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of type 55 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
A specific character can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a lower priority than the second display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the fourth display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first pattern is one in which a first type of cracked image is displayed when a specific character is in motion.
The second pattern is one in which a second type of cracked image is displayed when a specific character is in motion.
The means of display are,
When displaying the first type of cracked image using the first pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character, and the effect image is hidden at a predetermined timing after the first type of cracked image has been displayed.
In the second pattern, when displaying the second type of cracked image, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character, and the effect image is hidden at a specific timing after the second type of cracked image has been displayed (see Figures 102, 103, and 108).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the cracked image from appearing unnatural by obscuring the initial visible portion of the cracked image with the effect image.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on specific display layers that have a higher priority than special display layers.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first pattern is one in which multiple fragment images of the first type are displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The second pattern is one in which multiple fragment images of a second type are displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The first type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed and moves over the display period of the first type of fragment image.
The second type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that it moves without changing speed throughout the display period of the second type of fragment image (see Figures 102, 103, and 108).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhancing the visual effect by changing the speed at which the fragment images move depending on the type of display pattern of the fragment images.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of type 57 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer.
It is possible to display the cracked image on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first pattern is one in which the first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The second pattern is one in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The expected degree to which the game is controlled to a favorable state differs depending on whether the cracked image is displayed using the first pattern or the second pattern (see Figures 102, 103, 106, and 107).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances anticipation for a specific character and increases interest by drawing attention to the display pattern of the cracked image after that character is shown.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 58 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game surface, and a game machine frame (frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls, which serve as the game medium, are launched from a predetermined ball launching device and fired into this game area.

Furthermore, "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/shrinking one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and the regular symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or regular symbols are displayed in an updated manner. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling or updated manner, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/shrinked. Note that variation also includes the display of a symbol blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stopped display (also called derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may also be expressed as variable display or simply variable.

Furthermore, the special symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols displayed variably in the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols." Additionally, a special symbol game using the first special symbols is called a "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbols is called a "second special symbol game." Furthermore, only one type of special symbol display device is required for the variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various visual effects. The image display device 5 may also consist of a projector and a screen. Various visual effects are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers) that serve as decorative identification information distinct from the special symbols is performed in synchronization with the first and second special symbol games. Here, in synchronization with the first or second special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed variably (e.g., vertical scrolling or updating) in the left, center, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. The synchronous execution of the special symbol games and the variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as "variable display."

Furthermore, the upper left corner of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5S for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols. The small symbols are displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the first reserve memory count, second reserve memory count, reserve display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state in the pachinko machine 1, right-hand shooting notification images prompting the player to shoot to the right, and time-saving display showing the remaining number of time-saving rounds, etc., may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the performance images (object images) such as characters. This prevents the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserve memory count, second reserve memory count, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the performance images. This prevents the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are being displayed in a variable form. For example, it is displayed in a variable form by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. Because the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable form, even if the decorative symbols are difficult to recognize, such as when the display content including the variable display of the decorative symbols momentarily disappears from the screen, or when the movable body 32 obscures all or part of the screen of the image display device 5, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable form. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the first variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the second variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

The lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with display areas (special symbol hold memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying hold displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. The hold displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display corresponding displays. In this embodiment, a special symbol hold memory display area 5U is provided common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but a first special symbol hold memory display area that displays a first hold display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol hold memory display area that displays a second hold display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special symbol is pending, may be provided separately. In this embodiment, the special symbol hold memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a hold display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state, and a display area that displays a hold display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variation state. Furthermore, the Active Display Area 5F is a display area that shows the active display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is normal, and a display area that shows the active display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is shortened time or probability variation.

A first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a prize ball device 6A is provided, and to the right of the prize ball device 6A, a variable prize ball device 6B is provided.

The prize ball entry device 6A forms a first starting prize entry opening, which is kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter at all times, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the first special game may be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric mechanism) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 59). The variable prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric mechanism having a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, resulting in a closed state where no game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in the tilted position, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the open state). When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the second special game may be started. Furthermore, the variable prize ball device 6B is not limited to those described above, as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

General prize slots 10 are provided at predetermined locations on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 58, three locations in the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable prize ball device 6B) and are kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters any of the general prize slots 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are dispensed as prize balls.

Between the prize ball device 6A and the variable prize ball device 6B, a special variable prize ball device 7 with a large prize opening is provided. The special variable prize ball device 7 includes a large prize opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 59), forming a large prize opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state.

For example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric mechanism) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) it. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14) are dispensed as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize slot, more prize balls are dispensed than when a game ball enters, for example, the first starting prize slot, the second starting prize slot, or the general prize slot 10.

The entry of a game ball into any of the prize-winning slots, including the general prize-winning slot 10, is also referred to as "winning a prize." In particular, winning a prize in the starting slots (first starting prize-winning slot, second starting prize-winning slot) is also called a "starting prize."

A standard symbol display unit 20 is provided at a predetermined location on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 58, the lower left of the game area). For example, the standard symbol display unit 20 consists of a 7-segment LED and displays a variable representation of multiple types of standard symbols as general identification information, distinct from special symbols. Standard symbols are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" through "9" or "-". The standard symbols may also include a pattern where all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of standard symbols is also called a standard symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided through which the game ball can pass. The game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41.

Below the regular symbol display unit 20, a regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is provided. The regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of regular symbol hold memories (the number of regular symbol games currently in a pending state) by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills and numerous obstacle pins that change the direction and speed of the game balls. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet for game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3. Side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a, surrounding the game area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the game board 2. These main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32, which operates according to the effects, is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 58). The movable body 32 is equipped with a movable body lamp 9d. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable prize ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. These attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." These main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f are sometimes collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. Note that these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f are composed of LEDs (see Figure 93). Further details about the various lamps will be described later.

A ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. This handle is operated by the player or other user to launch the game balls towards the game area using a ball-launching device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, for holding (storing) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls dispensed by a designated ball dispenser so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a dispensing section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A, which can be grasped and tilted by the player, is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is equipped with a trigger button that the player can press. Operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 59).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, allowing the player to perform predetermined instruction operations by pressing it. Operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 59).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of how the game progresses)
The player rotates the ball-shooting handle 30 on the pachinko game machine 1, launching the game ball towards the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the regular symbol game is started using the regular symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous regular symbol game (i.e., the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the regular symbol game based on that passage cannot be executed immediately), the regular symbol game based on that passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this regular symbol game, if a specific regular symbol (a regular symbol that results in a win) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Win." On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol that results in a win (a regular symbol that results in a loss) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Loss." When a "Regular Symbol Win" occurs, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time (the second starting prize entry point becomes open).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening formed in the prize ball entry device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening formed in the variable prize ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the starting entry slot during the execution of a special feature game, or during the period when the game is controlled to a jackpot state as described later (i.e., if a starting entry occurs but the special feature game based on that entry cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special feature game based on that entry will be suspended until a predetermined maximum number of entries (for example, 4) are reached.

In the special feature game, if a specific special symbol (a winning symbol, such as "7," although the actual symbol may differ depending on the type of win described later) stops and is displayed as a guaranteed special symbol, it results in a "jackpot." If a special symbol other than the winning symbol (a losing symbol, such as "-") stops and is displayed, it results in a "miss."

After the display result in the special game is "Big Win," the game is controlled to a "Big Win Game" state, which is advantageous for the player.

During a jackpot, the large prize winning slot formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 7 opens in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls entering the large prize winning slot reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize winning slot can be open in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize winning slot is open is called a round (round game). During a jackpot, the round can be repeated until a predetermined maximum number of rounds (e.g., 15 or 2) has been reached.

In a jackpot state, players can win prize balls by getting them into the jackpot slot. Therefore, a jackpot state is advantageous for the player. The more rounds there are in a jackpot state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Furthermore, each "jackpot" has a designated jackpot type. For example, multiple types of opening mechanisms for the jackpot entry point (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability-increasing state, etc.) are provided, and the jackpot type is determined accordingly. There may also be jackpot types that award many prize balls, types that award few prize balls, or types that award almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (time-saving control) is implemented that shortens the average special symbol variation time (the period during which the special symbols vary) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (high-open control, high-base control) is also implemented that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point, such as by shortening the average normal symbol variation time (the period during which the normal symbols vary) or increasing the probability of a "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol game. Since the time-saving mode improves the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state, in addition to the time-saving control, probability variation control is implemented that increases the probability of the displayed result being "Big Win" compared to the normal state. The probability variation state is even more advantageous for the player because it improves the efficiency of special symbol variations and makes "Big Win" more likely.

The time-saving mode and the probability-increasing mode continue until one of the following termination conditions is met first: either a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the termination condition is the predetermined number of special symbol games played, it is also called a "count-restricted time-saving mode" (count-restricted time-saving mode, count-restricted probability-increasing mode, etc.).

The "normal state" refers to any game state other than advantageous states such as the jackpot state, the time-saving state, or the probability-increasing state. It is a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the same settings as its initial state (for example, when a system reset is performed, or when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power-on).

The state in which probability variation control is being performed is also called the high probability state, and the state in which probability variation control is not being performed is also called the low probability state. The state in which time reduction control is being performed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time reduction control is not being performed is also called the low base state. Combining these, the time reduction state is sometimes called the low probability high base state, the probability variation state is called the high probability high base state, and the normal state is called the low probability low base state. A state that is both high probability and low base is also called the high probability low base state.

Furthermore, the game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the jackpot entry point) during a jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variation state after the jackpot game state.

(Regarding the progress of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or enhance the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. These effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of such displays, they may also be performed using sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting and extinguishing of game effect lamps 9, the operation of movable parts 32, or any effect device that includes some or all of these.

As a performance effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, designated as "left," "center," and "right," begin displaying variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) is displayed in the first or second special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also displayed (derived).

During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined "reach" mode (a reach is achieved). Here, a "reach" mode refers to a mode in which, when the stopped display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 constitutes part of the jackpot combination described later, the variable display of decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped continues.

Furthermore, a reach animation is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach pattern occurring during the variable display of decorative symbols. In pachinko machine 1, multiple types of reach animations are executed, each with a different probability (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special symbol game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) resulting in a "jackpot." Reach animations include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is "Big Win," the image display device 5 displays a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as the result of the variable display of decorative symbols (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is "Big Win"). For example, identical decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are aligned and displayed on predetermined active lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

If it's a "probability-increasing jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line. If it's a "non-probability-increasing jackpot (normal jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability-increasing symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability-increasing symbols (normal symbols). After a reach pattern is reached with non-probability-increasing symbols, an upgrade animation may be performed that ultimately results in a "probability-increasing jackpot."

If the display result of the special game is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may not become a reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "non-reach miss"). Also, if the display result is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may become a reach mode, and then the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called "reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "reach miss").

The Pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects, including displaying the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays). Other effects, such as a prediction effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot, are performed during the variable display of decorative symbols. These prediction effects include those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the currently running variable display, and those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable displays whose execution is pending). As a pre-read prediction effect, the machine may also perform an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays) to a mode different from the normal mode.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may perform a pseudo-consecutive display effect by temporarily pausing the display of the decorative pattern during its variable display and then resuming the variable display, thereby making a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game, a jackpot-related animation is performed to indicate the jackpot state. This animation may include an announcement of the number of rounds or an upgrade animation indicating an increase in the value of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, when, for example, a special game is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer-waiting demo is performed).

(Circuit board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and other components, as shown in Figure 59. In addition, various other boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The term "various control boards" is a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on an electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17. By operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V from an external power source like a commercial power supply can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components, including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., DC 12V or DC 5V).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special symbol games (including management of held symbols), execution of regular symbol games (including management of held symbols), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 controls the progress of the game (implementing the functions of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as the variable patterns described later, the performance control commands described later, and various tables referenced when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains its contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted, either partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 continuously counts and updates numerical data representing various random values (game-specific random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. These game-specific random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (i.e., updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal pattern hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed through or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signals indicates that the passage or entry of a game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 receives reset signals, power-off signals, and clear signals from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal used to stop the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to a press operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (for example, signals to turn on solenoids 81 and 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81 for the regular electric mechanism and solenoid 82 for the large prize door.

The payout control board 006SG030 is connected to a payout device 006SG031, which is driven to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to the player based on the receipt of a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 006SG032, which is installed in the payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls dispensed by the payout device 006SG031 pass. The board is capable of stopping the operation of the payout device 006SG031 according to the pattern of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 006SG032.

Furthermore, the payout control board 006SG030 is connected to a handle sensor 006SG034 for detecting the amount of operation performed by the player, and a touch ring 006SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting whether the player is gripping the ball-shooting handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 006SG030 controls the launching device 006SG033, which is capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. In addition, signals indicating whether the touch ring 006SG035 is detected, and signals indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device 006SG033, are input from the payout control board 006SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies performance control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the performance control board 12 as part of the control of the game's progress. The performance control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12. These performance control commands include, for example, commands specifying various decision results from the main board 11 (e.g., display results of the special feature game (including the type of jackpot), the variation pattern used when executing the special feature game (details described later)), the game status (e.g., start and end of variable display, opening status of the jackpot opening, occurrence of a jackpot, number of reserved balls, game state), and the occurrence of errors.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11. It receives performance control commands and executes performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable parts 32, error notifications, and power outage recovery notifications) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control executes the program stored in the ROM 121, and together with the display control unit 123, performs processing to execute the performance (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining which performance to execute). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data such as various tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation may also instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when player operation is detected, indicating the operation content as appropriate).

The display control unit 123 is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the animation based on animation execution instructions from the animation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123, based on the execution instructions for the performance control CPU 120, supplies a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5, thereby displaying the performance image on the image display device 5. It also performs display processing, outputting the image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM region specified in the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area switch with each V-blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area allocated as the drawing area in one V-blank, and then in the next V-blank, it switches to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V-blank is displayed, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 60, the display control unit 123 generates an image for display on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) multiple layers. Therefore, the VRAM area contains a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating an image for display on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (combining) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer image drawing area has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower levels. Images in the upper layer image drawing area have a higher display priority on the image display device 5, while images in the lower layer image drawing area have a lower display priority.

As shown in Figure 61, the VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image as the Layer 1 image, a Layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging decorative patterns as the Layer 2 image, a Layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging object images such as characters as the Layer 3 image, a Layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a crack precursor image (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) described later as the Layer 4 image, and a Layer 5 image containing a glass plate image 006SG301A as the target image for cracking, displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301A, and a fragment image 006SG resulting from the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. Layer 5 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing 302; Layer 6 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the action effect image described later as Layer 6; Layer 7 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the whiteout image 006SG303 described later as Layer 7; Layer 8 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the operation prompt image described later as Layer 8; Layer 9 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display); and Layer 10 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the small symbol (fourth symbol), the first hold memory count, the second hold memory count, and the right-hand shooting notification image. Furthermore, Layer 11 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing error displays.

The glass plate image 006SG301, drawn and placed in the Layer 4 image drawing area, is an image intended to make the player perceive that the display area of the image display device 5 has cracked due to the action of the character or movable body 32. The glass plate image 006SG301A, drawn and placed in the Layer 5 image drawing area, is an image intended to make the player perceive that the display area of the image display device 5 has broken. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 is an image displayed with a modified portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A to emphasize to the player that the display area of the image display device 5 has broken due to the action of the character or movable body 32.

The glass plate image 006SG301 is an image that is hidden at the start timing of the cracking effect (the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the following sequences: the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. Furthermore, the glass plate image 006SG301A is also the image displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301 (the cracking target image) at the start timing of the cracking effect (the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the following sequences: the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect.

Furthermore, as will be described later, the start timing of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is such that the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are not visible to the player due to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 displaying cracks can be switched to the glass plate image 006SG301A without the player noticing, making it possible to realize a crack (movement display of fragment image 006SG302) that cannot be expected from the cracks displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, and thus making a strong impression of the cracking effect on the player.

In this embodiment, by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 1 to Layer 10 image drawing areas, an image can be generated to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the image drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area has the lowest display priority, the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area has a higher display priority than the image drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area has a higher display priority than the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area has a higher display priority than the image drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area has a higher display priority than the image drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area, and images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area. Furthermore, if a Layer 11 image drawing area is further placed in the VRAM area, images drawn in the Layer 11 image drawing area will have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area.

In other words, the image drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area is the lowest-level image displayed on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area is displayed above (prioritized) the image drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area is displayed above (prioritized) the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area is displayed above (prioritized) the image drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area is displayed above (prioritized) the image drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area is the lowest-level image displayed on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area is the highest-level image displayed on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area is the highest-level image displayed on the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area is the lowest-level image displayed on the image display device 5. The images drawn are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area on the image display device 5; and the images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area on the image display device 5. Furthermore, if a Layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the images drawn in the Layer 11 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area on the image display device 5. Furthermore, although it has been explained that there is a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging background images, instead of the Layer 1 image drawing area, there may be a Layer 1-1 image drawing area, a Layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a Layer 1-3 image drawing area. In this case, the Layer 1-1 image drawing area can be used to draw the normal background images (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image) described later, the Layer 1-2 image drawing area can be used to draw the chance background images (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image) described later, the normal reach background image, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) described later, and the Layer 1-3 image drawing area can be used to draw the background effect image (background effect image 006SG322) described later, large The system can display a winning notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085). Images drawn in the Layer 1-3 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 1-2 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 1-3 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 1-1 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 1-2 image drawing area.

In this embodiment, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the overlapping areas of the upper image and the lower image are not visible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images that are displayed transparently or temporarily hidden may be provided on the display screen of the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound specification signal (a signal specifying the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal specifying the on/off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to synchronize sound output with the display of the performance image and to turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving speakers 8L and 8R. Based on the specified audio signal, it drives speakers 8L and 8R and outputs the audio specified by the audio signal from speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9. Based on the lamp signal, it drives the game effect lamp 9 and turns it on/off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off status of the lamp.

Furthermore, the control of audio output, lamp on/off (supply of sound specification signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals to operate the movable body 32, etc.) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 keeps an updatable count of numerical data representing various random values (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. These random numbers for effects may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound specification signals, lamp signals).

Other boards besides the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the pachinko machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or the sub-boards of machine 1 may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 60(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte structure, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is also "0". Note that the command form shown in Figure 60(A) is just an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command consists of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 63(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in the special game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it can be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern specified in the variation pattern specification command.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a performance control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpots to use if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 63(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command that indicates a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot A", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot B", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot C", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "Big Win" and the big win type will be "Non-Probability Variation Big Win," as well as the big win type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variation of decorative symbols in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on specification command that specifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has performed a cold start (power was turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). A cold start refers to a state in which, when power is turned on, the data is initialized without restoring the data from before power-on, and the game machine is made capable of performing various processes. Command 9200H is a power-out recovery specification command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has performed a hot start (power was turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). A hot start refers to a state in which, when power is turned on, the game machine is made capable of performing various processes based on the backed-up data. Since a hot start does not involve initialization, it is also called a power-on without initialization. Command 95XXH is a game state specification command that specifies the current game state in the pachinko machine 1. Depending on the current game state of the pachinko machine 1, different EXT data is set using this game state specification command. For example, command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to a game state where neither time-saving control nor probability-changing control is performed (low probability, low base state, normal state). Command 9501H is the second game state specification command corresponding to a game state where time-saving control is performed but probability-changing control is not (low probability, high base state, time-saving state). Command 9502H is the third game state specification command corresponding to a game state where both time-saving control and probability-changing control are performed (high probability, high base state, probability-changing state). Note that the high probability, high base state is sometimes simply referred to as the "probability-changing state."

Command A0XXH is a win start command (also called the "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a visual effect indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening is open during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a jackpot opening after notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening has changed from open to closed during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a win end command that specifies the display of a visual effect at the end of a jackpot game.

In the win start and win end commands, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command. Alternatively, in the win start and win end commands, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big prize slot open notification command and the big prize slot after opening notification command, different EXT data may be set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (e.g., "0" to "10").

Command B100H is a first-start-entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first start-entry

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command that notifies the first reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory count notification command that notifies the second reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. The first reserved memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start-up-entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up-entry Furthermore, the first and second reserved memory count notification commands may be sent in response to the start of the special game execution when either the first or second start condition is met (i.e., when the number of reserved memories decreases).

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are performance control commands (winning result specification commands) that indicate the content of the winning result judgment. Of these, command C4XXH is a symbol specification command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probability variation, non-probability variation, or sudden probability variation) as the winning result judgment. Command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates the result of determining whether the random value used for variation pattern judgment will result in "non-reach," "super reach," or "other (normal reach)" as the winning result judgment.

Instead of sending the first and second pending memory count notification commands, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. That is, a total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify of an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 63(A) are just examples, and the system may omit some of these commands, use different commands in place of these, or add other commands. For example, a command to notify the number of prize balls dispensed based on each prize ball entering a prize slot, a gate passage notification command to notify when a game ball has passed through gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display rounds for which probability variation control or time reduction control is executed may be provided.

Figure 64 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 64, on the main board 11, numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special display result, MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and MR4 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the game's effectiveness. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game-specific random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data that represents some or all of these random values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may use a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and update various numerical data via software to count numerical data that represents some of the random values MR1 to MR4.

The random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is used to determine whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state by treating the variable display result, such as a special symbol, as a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536." The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type ("Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," or "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot") when the variable display result is a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "100."

The random value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of several pre-defined types, and takes values in the range of "0" to "997".

The random value MR4 used for determining the result of the regular symbol display is a random value used to determine whether the variable display result in the regular symbol game using the regular symbol display unit 20 is a "regular symbol win" or a "regular symbol loss," and takes values in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 65 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for both the first and second special figures. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special figures.

The display result determination table is a table referenced in special symbol games using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the confirmed special symbol resulting in a variable display is derived and displayed, this table determines, based on the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state as a "jackpot."

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) is compared with the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state). This value is then assigned to the special symbol display result as either a "jackpot" or a "miss."

In the display result determination table, the table data showing the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result determination table, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) compared to the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when the pachinko game rr is in a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state, such that when the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), the probability of determining whether or not to control it to a jackpot state is higher compared to when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 66(A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is referenced to determine the jackpot type from several types based on the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot state. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special symbol that was variably displayed (variable display) in the special symbol game was a first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or a second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination is assigned to one of several types of jackpots, such as "non-probability variation jackpot," "probability variation jackpot A," "probability variation jackpot B," and "probability variation jackpot C."

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 66(B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set as follows: "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," in which probability variation control and time reduction control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot," in which only time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) and this is repeated. On the other hand, the jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 2 times (so-called 2 rounds) and this is repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state resulting from "Non-Probability-increasing Jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. Therefore, "Bonus Win A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) bonus win, "Bonus Win B" as a 5-round (5R) bonus win, and "Bonus Win C" as a 2-round (2R) bonus win.

The probability variation control and time-saving control that begin after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the end of the jackpot game state of a non-probability variation jackpot is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed, or that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state before the completion of the 100 variable displays. Therefore, if the next jackpot is one of probability variation jackpots A to probability variation jackpot C, the probability variation control and time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called continuous jackpot state where jackpot game states occur continuously without going through the normal state. In other words, the probability variation state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. Therefore, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when a winning streak is about to end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 66(A), the assignment of determination values to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot" differs depending on whether the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. That is, when the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds. On the other hand, when the variable-display special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination values are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C." This configuration allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the first start condition for starting a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is met, or whether the second start condition for starting a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is met. In particular, in special symbol games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never controlled to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which result in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are more likely to enter the second starting entry point formed by the variable prize ball entry device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent occurrences of jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, thus preventing a decrease in game enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 66(A), the assignment of determination values for the "non-probability variation" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variation jackpot and the probability of a probability variation jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game.

Therefore, as mentioned above, just as the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol, the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol. For "Probability Variation Jackpot A," which has a large number of rounds, it is set to be more likely to be determined when it is a special game of the second special symbol than when it is a special game of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, even in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a different range of predetermined judgment values than those used in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". For example, in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a smaller judgment value than in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special feature game using the first or second special feature, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figures 67(A) and 67(B) show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are pre-prepared for cases where the variable display result is a "miss" when the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state) and a time-saving state or probability variation state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), corresponding to cases where the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "not a reach" and cases where it is "a reach," as well as for cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "not a reach" is called the non-reach variation pattern (also called the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "a reach" is called the reach variation pattern (also called the "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, non-reach variation patterns and reach variation patterns are included in the "miss variation patterns" that correspond to cases where the variable display result is "miss." Variation patterns that correspond to cases where the variable display result is "jackpot" are called jackpot variation patterns.

There are two types of winning and winning combination patterns: normal winning combination patterns, where the winning animation for a normal winning combination is executed, and super winning combination patterns, where the winning animation for a super winning combination is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state (low probability, low base state), the following super reach variation patterns are provided: a variation pattern in which a pseudo-consecutive performance including temporary stopping of decorative symbols and re-variable display is performed once during the variable display, followed by a normal reach and then the reach performance of super reach α, resulting in a loss or a big win for the variable display (PA2-2, PB1-2); a variation pattern in which no pseudo-consecutive performance is performed, followed by a normal reach and then the reach performance of super reach β, resulting in a loss or a big win for the variable display (PA2-3, PB1-3); and a variation pattern in which a pseudo-consecutive performance is performed twice, followed by a normal reach and the reach performance of super reach α, and then the reach performance of super reach β, resulting in a loss or a big win for the variable display (PA2-4, PB1-4). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the reach animation for Super Reach α corresponds to the weak S reach animation described later, and the reach animation for Super Reach β corresponds to the strong S reach animation A and strong S reach animation B described later.

Furthermore, when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the following Super Reach variation patterns are provided: a variation pattern (PA2-6, PB1-6) in which the Super Reach γ reach animation is executed via a normal reach and the variable display result is either a miss or a jackpot; and a variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-7) in which the Super Reach δ reach animation is executed via a normal reach and the variable display result is either a miss or a jackpot. In this embodiment, the Super Reach γ reach animation corresponds to the weak S reach animation described later, and the Super Reach δ reach animation corresponds to the strong S reach animation A and strong S reach animation B described later.

As shown in Figure 67, the special symbol variation time for the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment, during which the reach animation is performed, is set to be shorter than that for the super reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of Super Reach, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach. Therefore, in both the Normal Reach and Super Reach variation patterns, the longer the special symbol variation time, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 68 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved items, the game state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 68(A) to 68(D), when the game state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display (number of same-type reserved symbols) is one or less, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variation pattern determination table A and the random value MR3. If the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is two, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variation pattern determination table B and the random value MR3. If the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variation pattern determination table C and the random value MR3. Furthermore, when the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variation state (high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variation pattern determination table D and the random value MR3. As shown in Figures 68(E) and 68(F), when the game state is normal (low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the value of the random number MR3. When the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state (high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number MR3.

For example, as shown in Figure 68(A), if the losing variation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 660, the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening; if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 661 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss variation pattern (PA2-1); and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach after executing a pseudo-consecutive performance once. The system determines the variation pattern (PA2-2) where Super Reach α fails via Chi, and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the variation pattern is determined to be: If the system determines the variation pattern (PA2-3) where Super Reach β fails via Normal Reach, and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be: If the system executes the pseudo-consecutive演出 twice, the system determines the variation pattern (PA2-4) where Super Reach β fails via Normal Reach and Super Reach α.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 68(B), if the losing variation pattern determination table B is selected, the variation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 1 to 700, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 701 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 901 to 970, the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of Super Reach α via a normal reach after executing a pseudo-consecutive performance once (PA2-2), the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of Super Reach β via a normal reach (PA2-3) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 971 to 990, and the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of Super Reach β via a normal reach after executing a pseudo-consecutive performance twice (PA2-4)

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 68(C), if the losing variation pattern determination table C is selected, the variation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 1 to 750, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 751 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 901 to 970, the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of Super Reach α via a normal reach after executing a pseudo-consecutive performance once (PA2-2), the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of Super Reach β via a normal reach (PA2-3) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 971 to 990, and the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of Super Reach β via a normal reach after executing a pseudo-consecutive performance twice (PA2-4) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 991 to 997.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 68(D), if the losing variation pattern determination table D is selected, the variation pattern is determined to be a short non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4) if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 300, the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach loss variation pattern (PA2-5) if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 301 to 550, and the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-6) if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 551 to 750. If the random value MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss variation pattern (PA2-5). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the variation pattern is determined to be the normal reach via a super reach γ miss variation pattern (PA2-6). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be the normal reach via a super reach δ miss variation pattern (PA2-7).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 68(E), when the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern for a normal reach jackpot (PB1-1). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 31 to 200, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PB1-2) which performs a pseudo-consecutive animation once, then proceeds via a normal reach to a super reach α jackpot. If the random value MR3 is within the range of 201 to 500, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PB1-3) which proceeds via a normal reach to a super reach β jackpot. If the random value MR3 is within the range of 501 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PB1-4) which performs a pseudo-consecutive animation twice, then proceeds via a normal reach and a super reach α to a super reach β jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 68(F), when the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 100, the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 101 to 400, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern that leads to a Super Reach γ jackpot via a Normal Reach (PB1-6). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 401 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern that leads to a Super Reach δ jackpot via a Normal Reach (PB1-7).

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined at a rate of 1 regardless of the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratios for multiple jackpot variation patterns may be different depending on the type of jackpot. By doing so, the player's attention can be drawn to which variation pattern resulted in a jackpot, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 59 can be a backup RAM, where part or all of its contents are backed up by a backup power supply generated on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor acting as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as the special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is the data necessary to restore the control state to what it was before the power outage occurred, based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage or the like. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data storage area 006SG150, as shown in Figure 69, which is a region for storing various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data storage area 006SG150 shown in Figure 69 includes a first special symbol hold storage unit 006SG151A, a second special symbol hold storage unit 006SG151B, a regular symbol hold storage unit 006SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 006SG152, a game control timer setting unit 006SG153, a game control counter setting unit 006SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 006SG155.

The first special symbol hold memory unit 006SG151A stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting entry opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a starting entry (first starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

The second special symbol hold memory unit 006SG151B stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the second starting entry opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, resulting in a starting entry (second starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

As an example, the first special symbol hold memory unit 006SG151A associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the first starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition when the game ball passes through (enters), as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Furthermore, the second special symbol hold memory unit 006SG151B associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the second starting prize entry point (the order in which the game balls are detected). Based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition during the passage (entry) of the game ball, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random value MR1 for variable display result determination, the random value MR2 for win type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. This data is stored as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

Thus, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 006SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 006SG151B indicates that the execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved. This reserved information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will be achieved based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition (when the game ball passes through the first start prize entry opening) and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the second start prize entry (when the game ball passes through the second start prize entry opening) are stored in separate reserved storage units in association with reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol hold storage unit 006SG151C stores hold information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display unit 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol hold storage unit 006SG151C associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data such as a random value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game balls, as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 006SG152 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating whether it is on or off for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 006SG153 is equipped with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 006SG153 stores data indicating the timer values for each of several types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 006SG154 is equipped with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores data indicating the count values for each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 may also be equipped with a random counter for counting some or all of the random numbers used for the game, which can be updated by the CPU 103 via software.

The random counter in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores random values not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data representing random values MR1 to MR4, as random count values. The numerical data representing each random value is updated periodically or irregularly in response to software execution by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count values may update the random count values independently of the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or it may update the random count values by applying predetermined processing, such as scrambling or arithmetic processing, to all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 59 stores not only the program for performance control, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns.

As an example, ROM 121 stores a performance control pattern table containing multiple types of performance control patterns used by the performance control CPU 120 to control the performance operations of various performance devices (e.g., image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). The performance control patterns consist of data indicating the control content, corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The performance control pattern table should contain, for example, performance control patterns for when the special symbol is displayed, pre-announcement performance control patterns, and various other performance control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 59 is provided with a performance control data storage area 006SG190, as shown in Figure 70(A), which is a region for storing various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data storage area 006SG190 shown in Figure 70(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 006SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 006SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 006SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose status can be updated according to the performance operation status, such as the display status of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, or performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 is equipped with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 stores data indicating the timer values for each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 is equipped with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 stores data indicating the count value for each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start-up winning command buffer 006SG194A, as shown in Figure 70(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194. The start-up winning command buffer 006SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the first special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") and a storage area corresponding to the first special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0"). Furthermore, the start-up winning command buffer 006SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the second special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0"). When a starting prize is awarded at the first or second starting prize slot, four commands—a starting slot entry designation command (either the first or second starting slot entry designation command), a hold memory count notification command (either the first or second hold memory count notification command), a symbol designation command, and a variation category command—are transmitted as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage areas corresponding to the first and second special symbol hold memory in the starting prize award reception command buffer 006SG194A are configured to store these commands separately, in the first and second special symbol hold memory, respectively, by associating them with each other.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted one by one to higher positions, as described later, when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which store the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition was met, are cleared during the special symbol win waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the start-up winning command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area reserved for each storage area (entry) so that it can store a hold display flag, which has a flag value set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold memory display, and a continuous break effect flag, which can identify whether or not it is subject to the continuous break effect described later, in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory and the second special symbol hold memory.

Furthermore, the pending display flag stores "0" if the pending display animation is not executed during the pending display animation determination process described later. If the pending display animation is executed, it is set to "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), corresponding to a special display pattern for the pending memory display that differs from the normal display pattern (e.g., a square (◇) or a star (☆)). After the pending display animation determination process is executed, the pending display update process, described later, is performed, causing the active display and pending display to display in a manner corresponding to each pending display flag (for example, a white circle (○) if the pending display flag value is "0", a square (◇) if the pending display flag value is "1", and a star (☆) if the pending display flag value is "2"). The value of the continuous break animation flag is set during the continuous break animation setting process described later (see Figure 83).

The CPU 120 for performance control stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 006SG194A when a ball is entered into the first starting entry slot. Similarly, when a ball is entered into the second starting entry slot, the CPU 120 stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 006SG194A. Upon entry, the following commands are transmitted sequentially: a starting slot entry specification command, a hold memory count notification command, a symbol specification command, and a variation category command. Therefore, upon command reception, the starting slot entry specification command, hold memory count notification command, symbol specification command, and variation category command are sequentially stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" through "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol hold memory.

As shown in Figure 70(B), the commands stored in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 006SG194A are changed each time a variable display of decorative symbols is started. The commands stored in the entry corresponding to the previously completed variable display hold memory (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") are deleted, and the contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to the hold memory of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the hold memory of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 70(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols of the first special symbol hold memory is completed, each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3", respectively. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the variable-display pending memory at that time.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the main game control processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the main game control processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the main game control process shown in Figure 71, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, setting the registers of built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions are met when the clear signal is in the off state, backup data exists, and the backup RAM is functioning correctly. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be storable in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors are checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3; Yes), the recovery process (Step S4) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The recovery process in Step S4 sets the work area based on the contents of RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state is restored to what it was when the power supply was interrupted. For example, if the special symbols were changing, it is sufficient that the special symbol changes can be resumed from the state before the interruption.

Furthermore, if the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3; No), the initialization process (Step S6) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process in Step S6 includes a clear process that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102. The execution of the clear process sets initial values in the work area.

After the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed, the CPU 103 sets the registers of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically triggered at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, the loop process begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

The CPU 103, which has executed the main game control processing, receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 72. Upon starting the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 72, the CPU 103 first performs a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error processing, the CPU 103 diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1 and, if necessary, generates a warning based on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output process, the CPU 103 outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.), start information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the game entered a probability variation state, etc.), which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output processing, the main board 11 performs a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the random numbers used for gameplay via software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution and management of special symbol games, control of the jackpot game state, and control of the game state are realized.

Following the special symbol processing, the normal symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, enabling the execution and management of the normal symbol game based on detection signals from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through the gate 41), as well as the opening control of the variable prize ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal symbol holds is displayed by lighting the normal symbol hold display 25C.

After the normal pattern processing is executed, the following may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing: processing when a power outage occurs, processing for dispensing prize balls, etc. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set to transmit performance control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, interrupts are enabled, and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Figure 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the process performed in step S25 shown in Figure 72 as a special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first performs the start prize determination process (step S101).

In the start-up prize determination process, the occurrence of a start-up prize is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved number of stored items. When a start-up prize occurs, a random value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern, and this is stored as reserved information. Alternatively, a process may be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random value. After storing the reserved information and the number of stored items, a transmission setting is made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the occurrence of a start-up prize, the number of stored items, and the prediction judgment. The performance control command for a start-up prize, thus set for transmission, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 72.

After executing the start-up prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag in RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to send the corresponding performance control command to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on a random value for determining the display result, it is determined (pre-determined) whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol will be a "jackpot," and if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1," and the special symbol normal processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority processing). Furthermore, the system may store the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots, and ensure that the conditions for starting the special game are met in that order (also known as "sequential execution").

When making various decisions based on random values, the various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision values compared with the random values are assigned to the decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, the various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes determining one of several variation patterns using a random value for variation pattern determination, based on a pre-determined result such as whether or not the display result should be "jackpot". When the variation pattern is determined during the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process terminates.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special feature game (special feature variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not a reach occurs, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach effect, etc.). It is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to vary the special symbols, and measuring the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process terminates.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes stopping the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the display to stop (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbols. If the display result is "Big Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "Miss", and the game is controlled in a time-saving state or a probability variation state, and the end of the number of spins is achieved, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

Step S114, the pre-jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "4". This pre-jackpot opening process includes settings to start round execution and open the jackpot opening in the jackpot game state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot". When opening the jackpot opening, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door. At this time, for example, the maximum opening period and the maximum number of rounds executed are set, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

Step S115, the jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When returning the jackpot opening to the closed state, the process includes stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door, then updating the value of the special feature process flag to "6", and ending the jackpot opening process.

Step S116, the post-jackpot opening processing, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening processing includes determining whether the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit, and setting the game to terminate the jackpot state if the upper limit is reached. If the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5". If the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening processing ends.

The jackpot termination process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "7". This jackpot termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the duration of the ending sequence (a visual effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state) has elapsed, and various settings for initiating probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are completed, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

(Starting point prize determination process)
Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the start-up prize determination process (S101) shown in Figure 73. In the start-up prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first start-up switch 22A is ON or OFF based on a detection signal from the first start-up switch 22A, which is provided in correspondence with the first start-up prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A (006SGS101). At this time, if the first start-up switch 22A is ON (006SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special feature reserve memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for a special feature game using the first special feature, is at a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory count) (006SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special feature reserve memory count by, for example, reading the first reserve memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserve memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. If the number of reserved first special symbols stored in 006SGS102 is not at the upper limit (006SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "0" (006SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off (006SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved special symbols has reached its upper limit (006SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is turned on or not, based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B, which is provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B (006SGS104). In this case, if the second start port switch 22B is on (006SGS104; Y), the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved special symbols for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, is determined to be at a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit number of reserved symbols) (006SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol by reading the second reserved ball count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved ball count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. If the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is not the upper limit (006SGS105; N), the CPU 103 sets the value stored in the start-up buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 to "2" (006SGS106).

After executing either process 006SGS103 or 006SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols, corresponding to the value stored in the start-up buffer, is updated by adding 1 (006SGS107). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start-up buffer value is "2", the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up entry-level slot and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. The second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the second start-up entry-level slot and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total number of reserved symbols is also updated by adding 1 (006SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, can be updated by adding 1.

After executing the processing in 006SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 (006SGS109). The numerical data representing each of these extracted random values and the start gate buffer value are stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol hold storage unit (006SGS110).

The numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols or decorative symbols is a "jackpot," and further, if the variable display result is a "jackpot," to determine the type of jackpot. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbols or decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the processing of 006SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random values used to determine the variable display pattern, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 006SGS110, the transmission settings for the start-up entry designation command are configured according to the start-up buffer value (006SGS111). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the settings for transmitting the first start-up entry designation command are configured to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the first start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Conversely, when the start-up buffer value is "2", the settings for transmitting the second start-up entry designation command are configured to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the second start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The start-up entry designation command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing shown in S27 in Figure 72.

Following the processing in step 006SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process upon winning (step 006SGS112). Then, for example, it stores the storage address of the reserved memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up the system to send a reserved memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (006SGS113). The reserved memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process shown in S27 in Figure 72.

After executing the process in 006SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (006SGS114). If the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. Conversely, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS116), and then the start port entry process is terminated. This ensures that even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start port entry of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of valid start ports from both can be reliably completed.

(Random value determination process upon winning)
Figure 75(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 006SGS112 of Figure 74 as a random value determination process at the time of winning. In this feature unit 006SG, when the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing described later determines whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" based on the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols). In addition, in the variable pattern setting processing described later, a determination is made for the variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, separate from these determinations, when a game ball is detected at the starting entry point (first starting entry point or second starting entry point), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 006SGS112, determining whether or not to stop displaying a jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of game balls entering the starting prize slot begins, that is, before it is decided whether or not it will be a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the decorative symbols will fall into. Based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 and the like will execute a pre-announcement effect, as described later.

In the random number determination process at the time of winning shown in Figure 75(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko machine 1 by checking, for example, the state of the time-saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 (step 006SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the state as a probability variation state (high probability, high base state) when the probability variation flag is ON, as a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) when the probability variation flag is OFF and the time-saving flag is ON, and as a normal state (low probability, high base state) when both the probability variation flag and the time-saving flag are OFF.

Following the processing in step 006SGS121, the special display result determination table 1 shown in Figure 65 is selected and set (step 006SGS122). Then, it is determined whether the numerical data representing the random value MR1 for special display result determination extracted in step 006SGS109 in Figure 74 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 006SGS123). The jackpot determination range is set with individual determination values assigned to the "jackpot" special display result in the special display result determination table selected in the processing of step 006SGS122, and it is sufficient for the CPU 103 to determine whether there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the random value MR1 with each determination value one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 can determine whether the random value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range by comparing it with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range. In this case, if it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including that random value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 006SGS123 that the result is outside the range of a jackpot, that is, if it is determined that it will not be a jackpot in the variable display (step 006SGS123; N), the transmission setting for the first symbol specification command, which is a symbol specification command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss," is executed (step 006SGS128), and it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is either a time-saving state or a probability-changing state (step 006SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS129; N), the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS129; Y), the miss variation pattern determination table D is selected and set (step 006SGS131).

In this embodiment, in addition to the losing pattern determination tables A and D, losing pattern determination tables B and C are pre-prepared according to the number of reserved memories. As shown in Figure 68, among these losing pattern determination tables A to C, table A assigns determination values from 1 to 660 to non-reach patterns, while tables B and C assign determination values from 1 to 700 and 1 to 750, respectively, to non-reach patterns. On the other hand, tables A to C assign determination values from 901 to 997 to super-reach patterns.

Therefore, in step 006SGS126, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for misses. This ensures that the determination of non-reach and super-reach will always result in a variation pattern of either non-reach or super-reach, even if the number of reserved balls changes after the determination. Therefore, the determination at the start of a winning combination is made using the variation pattern determination table A for misses.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step 006SGS123 that the result falls within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 006SGS123; Y), the jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, as shown in Figure 75(A) (step 006SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects jackpot type determination table data from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table, according to the variable special symbol ("First Special Symbol" corresponding to "1" or "Second Special Symbol" corresponding to "2") identified in relation to the start-up buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it determines which of the multiple jackpot types the result falls into.

Furthermore, the system executes the transmission settings for symbol specification commands corresponding to the determined type of jackpot: the second symbol specification command for probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol specification command for probability variation jackpot B, the fourth symbol specification command for probability variation jackpot C, and the fifth symbol specification command for non-probability variation jackpot (step 006SGS133). Then, a jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set according to the game state as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 006SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS138. Note that in step 006SGS135, if the game state is normal (low probability, low base state), jackpot variation pattern determination table A should be selected; if the game state is time-saving state or probability variation state (low probability, high base state or high probability, high base state), jackpot variation pattern determination table B should be set.

In step 006SGS138, the variable category corresponding to the range of determination values that include the random value MR3 is determined using the variable pattern determination table set in each step and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variable pattern determination (step 006SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 75(B), when the variable display result is at least "miss," there are variable categories that result in a "non-reach" variable display mode regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category that results in a "super reach" variable display mode, and an "other" variable category that results in a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (e.g., normal reach). It is sufficient to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random value MR3.

Subsequently, after setting up the system to send a variable category specification command to the performance control board 12 based on the judgment result from step 006SGS138 (step 006SGS132), the random value judgment process at the time of winning is terminated.

(Special pattern processing as usual)
Figure 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Figure 73 as a normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 76, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol reserve memory count is "0" (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol reserve memory count is the number of reserves for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, as displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second reserve memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0" or not.

If the number of reserved symbols in the second special symbol storage unit is not "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out from the second special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 006SGS142, the second special feature hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the second special feature hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the second special feature hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the second special feature hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 006SGS143).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 006SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved special symbols in step 006SGS141 is "0" (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special symbols in step 006SGS145 is "0". The number of reserved special symbols in step 006SGS145 is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol, as displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol counter and determines whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the number of reserved special symbols in step 006SGS141 is "0", and it determines whether the number of reserved special symbols in step 006SGS145 is "0". As a result, special symbol games using the second special symbol are started with priority over special symbol games using the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the execution of the special feature game using the second special feature is not limited to prioritizing the execution of the special feature game using the first special feature. For example, the execution of the special feature game may be initiated in the order in which the game ball enters (passes through) the first and second starting prize entry points and a starting prize is generated. In this case, it would suffice to provide a table that stores data that can identify the order in which starting prizes occurred, and to determine whether to start the execution of the special feature game using the first or second special feature from that stored data.

If the number of reserved symbols in the first special symbol storage is not "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), then numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read from the first special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 006SGS146, the first special symbol hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the first special symbol hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the first special symbol hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the first special symbol hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 006SGS147).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 006SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 65 is selected and set as the table used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols, which is the special symbol display result, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data representing the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result, "jackpot" or "miss", to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006SGS150). In step 006SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) where the probability change flag is on, then if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (probability change state), it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if not, it is determined to be a "miss". Furthermore, if the probability variation flag is off and the state is low probability (in this embodiment, low probability low base state and low probability high base state), the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" if it falls within the range of 1 to 219, and a "miss" if it does not.

Thus, in the display result determination table selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability). Therefore, in the processing of step 006SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display such as the special symbol game starts is in a high probability state, different determination data (determination values) are used to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot." As a result, when the game state is in a high probability state, the probability of determining a "jackpot" is higher than when it is in a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 006SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned ON (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 66(A) is selected and set as the table used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, the system determines which of the several jackpot types it is based on whether the numerical data representing the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches the determination value assigned to each of the jackpot types in the jackpot type determination table: "non-probability jackpot," "probability jackpot A," "probability jackpot B," or "probability jackpot C" (step 006SGS154).

In step 006SGS154, the type of jackpot is determined, and the game state after the jackpot game state ends is determined before the confirmed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. This determination is made to control the game state to either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variation state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. The determined jackpot type is then stored by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the value stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155), in accordance with the determined jackpot type. For example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" which corresponds to a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation A" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot A, it should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation B" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot B, it should be set to "2". If it is "probability variation C" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot C, it should be set to "3". After processing in step 006SGS155, proceed to step 006SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the result is "incorrect" in step 006SGS150 (step 006SGS150; N), the process in step 006SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 006SGS152 to 006SGS155.

In step 006SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a confirmed special symbol in accordance with the prior determination result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determination result of the jackpot type when the game is in a jackpot state. For example, in accordance with the prior determination result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", the special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a missing symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "probability variation jackpot A", the special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability-increasing jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "probability-increasing jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Note that these guaranteed special symbols are just examples; other guaranteed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as guaranteed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), the system performs a predetermined demo display setting (step 006SGS158) before ending the normal special symbol processing. This demo display setting determines whether a performance control command (customer-waiting demo specification command) specifying a demonstration display (demo screen display), such as displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, has already been sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer-waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. If it has not been sent, the system performs the necessary settings to send the customer-waiting demo specification command before terminating the demo display setting.

(Setting the variation pattern)
Figure 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 73 as a variable pattern setting process. In the variable pattern setting process shown in Figure 77, the CPU 103 selects a variable pattern determination table according to the state (step 006 SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is a miss, if the game state is normal and there is 1 reserved special symbol that performs variable display, the CPU 103 selects the miss variable pattern determination table A; if the game state is normal and there are 2 reserved special symbols that perform variable display, the CPU 103 selects the miss variable pattern determination table B; if the game state is normal and there are 3 reserved special symbols that perform variable display, the CPU 103 selects the miss variable pattern determination table C; and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the CPU 103 selects the miss variable pattern determination table D. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the game state is normal, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variable pattern determination table A; and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variable pattern determination table B.

Then, based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which is stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, the variation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) variation pattern determination table (step 006 SGS162).

After determining the variation pattern in step 006SGS162, settings are made to initiate the variation of the special symbols, depending on the variation special symbol designation buffer value, so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 006SGS163). For example, if the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing in step 006SGS163, settings are made for sending various commands for when the special symbols start to change (step 006SGS164). For example, when the special symbol change specification buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the pre-prepared first change start command table in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer, in order to sequentially send the game state specification command, first change start command, change pattern specification command, variable display result specification command, and first hold memory count notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special symbol specification buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sequentially transmits the game state specification command, the second variation start command, the variation pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, and the second reserved memory count notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. To this end, the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the pre-prepared second variation start command table in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155, in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer.

After executing the process in step 006SGS164, the variable display time for the special symbol, which corresponds to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS165). The variable display time for the special symbol is the time required in the special symbol game from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2," which corresponds to the special symbol variation process (step 006SGS166), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission settings in step 006 SGS166, after the variable pattern setting process is completed, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 72 is executed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit the following commands to the performance control board 12: game state specification command, first variable start command or second variable start command, variable pattern specification command, variable display result specification command, first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command. The order in which these performance control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the variable display result specification command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable start command or second variable start command, variable pattern specification command, game state specification command, first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command.

(Special symbol stop processing)
Figure 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 73 as a special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the termination flag referenced in the special symbol variation process of step S113 to terminate the variation of the special symbols, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to display the stopped symbols as stopped (step 006SGS180). If the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and if the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. It also controls the sending of a symbol confirmation command to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS181). Finally, it determines whether the jackpot flag is in the ON state or not (step 006SGS182).

If the jackpot flag is ON (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103, if the probability variation flag or time reduction flag is ON, clears the probability variation flag and time reduction flag to the OFF state (step 006SGS184), and sets the performance control board 12 to send the following commands according to the type of jackpot stored: jackpot start 1 (probability variation jackpot A), jackpot start 2 (probability variation jackpot B), jackpot start 3 (probability variation jackpot C), and jackpot start 4 (non-probability variation) (step 006SGS185).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 configures the settings to send a game state specification command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 006 SGS 186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time it takes for the image display device 5 to announce that a jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter is opened (for example, 10 times for non-probability jackpots and probability jackpot A, 5 times for probability jackpot B, and 2 times for probability jackpot C) is set (step 006SGS188). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which corresponds to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 006SGS189).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), step 006SGS191 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS191; N), proceed to step 006SGS196. If the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191; Y), determine whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0". If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS192; Y), proceed to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 006SGS192; N), that is, if there are remaining time-saving attempts in a high-base state, the value of the time-saving counter is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS193). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is "0" or not (step 006SGS194). If it is not "0" (step 006SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS194; Y), in order to terminate the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 006SGS195), and after setting the transmission of a game state specification command corresponding to the game state corresponding to the state of the probability variation flag or time-saving flag (specifically, low probability low base) (step 006SGS195), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the settings for sending game state specification commands are configured according to the status of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0," which corresponds to the normal processing of the special symbol, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 006SGS197).

(Big win termination process)
Figure 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 73 as the jackpot termination process.

In the jackpot termination process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot termination display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot termination display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the CPU 103 sets a value in the jackpot termination display timer that corresponds to the display time for displaying the jackpot termination on the image display device 5 (jackpot termination display time) (step 006SGS202), and terminates the process.

On the other hand, if the jackpot completion display timer is running (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot completion display timer is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot completion display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot completion display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process terminates.

If the time limit for displaying the end of the jackpot has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability-increasing jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability-increasing jackpot (Step 006SGS205; N), the probability-increasing flag and the time-saving flag are turned on (Steps 006SGS207, Step 006SGS208). Also, the time-saving counter is set to "0" (Step 006SGS209), and the process proceeds to Step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a non-probability-increasing jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100," after which the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission settings for the jackpot termination command corresponding to the jackpot type are configured (step 006SGS214). Then, after configuring the transmission settings for the game state specification command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the turned-on probability variation flag and time reduction flag (step 006SGS215), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0," which corresponds to the normal processing of special symbols, and the jackpot termination process is terminated (step 006SGS216).

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be explained. When the performance control board 12 receives power voltage from the power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the main performance control process as shown in the flowchart of Figure 80. When the main performance control process shown in Figure 80 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), which includes clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Subsequently, a determination is made as to whether the timer interrupt flag is on or off (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed while waiting.

Furthermore, on the performance control board 12, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets to interrupt disable. However, if a CPU that does not automatically set to interrupt disable is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). In response to the interrupt caused by the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt processing. In this command reception interrupt processing, the performance control command is received from a predetermined input port among the input ports included in I/O 125 that receives control signals transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The performance control command received at this time is stored, for example, in a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122. Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control sets itself to enable interrupts and then terminates the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, to allow the performance control process to confirm which performance control command was received and what the performance control command identifies, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 is turned on. Furthermore, if the performance control command identifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, various performance devices are controlled, such as the display operation of performance images on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. Furthermore, the control content of the performance operations using the various performance devices is determined, decided, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a random number update process for performances is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the random numbers used for performances on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the random number update process for performances (step S77), a demo performance control process (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko game machine 1, and a background display update process (step S79) for updating the background display shown on the image display device 5 to another background display are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Furthermore, in the background display update process of this embodiment, control can be executed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the execution of specific effects (for example, background change effects or reach effects described later) or changes in the game state during variable display.

The menu display process includes, in addition to displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, further processing to adjust the volume output from speakers 8L and 8R, and to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9, in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, etc., while the menu screen is displayed.

Furthermore, in the demo performance control processing, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer-waiting demo performance start timer, based on the receipt of a customer-waiting demo specification command, and start the customer-waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer-waiting demo performance start timer is operating or while the customer-waiting demo performance is running, the customer-waiting demo performance start timer should be cleared, the customer-waiting demo performance should be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 should be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process processing)
Figure 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 80 as part of the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 81, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a hold display performance determination process (step S160) to determine the display mode of the hold display shown in the special feature hold memory display area 5U and the active display shown in the active display area 5F. It also executes a hold display update process (step S161) to update the display mode of the hold display in the special feature hold memory display area 5U and the active display in the active display area 5F. The hold display update process also serves to start displaying the hold display and active display whose display mode has been newly determined in the hold display performance determination process. After the execution of the hold display update process, for example, depending on the value of the performance process flag provided in RAM 122, one of the following processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process to determine whether or not to start the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display results and variation patterns identified by the performance control command, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (confirmed decorative symbols), the mode of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the presence or absence of various performances such as reach performances and various予告 (pre-announcement) performances, as well as their mode and start timing, are determined. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute performances) is set, reflecting these determinations. Afterward, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. Upon receiving the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output sound and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14, and performs various effect controls during the variable display of decorative symbols. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops displaying the confirmed decorative symbols, which are the display result of the decorative symbols, in response to, for example, when an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command is received from the main board 11 specifying that the confirmed decorative symbols should be stopped displaying. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3," and the variable display performance processing ends.

The special symbol win waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol win waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a performance control command from the main board 11 specifying the start of the jackpot game state. If it receives a performance control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it updates the value of the performance process flag to "4". If it does not receive a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state and the waiting time for such a command has elapsed, it determines that the display result in the special symbol game was "miss" and updates the value of the performance process flag to its initial value of "0". After updating the value of the performance process flag, the special symbol win waiting process terminates.

The jackpot animation processing in step S174 is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "4". In this jackpot animation processing, the animation control CPU 120 sets, for example, an animation control pattern corresponding to the animation content in the jackpot game state, and executes various animation controls in the jackpot game state based on that setting. Furthermore, in the jackpot animation processing, in response to receiving, for example, a command from the main board 11 specifying the termination of the jackpot game state, the value of the animation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the ending animation processing, and the jackpot animation processing terminates.

The ending sequence processing in step S175 is executed when the value of the sequence process flag is "5". In this ending sequence processing, the sequence control CPU 120 sets sequence control patterns corresponding to events such as the end of a jackpot game state, and executes various sequence controls for the ending sequence at the end of the jackpot game state based on these settings. Afterward, the value of the sequence process flag is updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending sequence processing ends.

(Processing to determine the pending display animation)
Figure 82 shows the determination ratio for the display patterns of the hold display and active display in the hold display effect shown in Figure 81. In the hold display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the start-up winning command buffer 006SGS194A shown in Figure 70(B) to determine whether there are any entries in which the hold display flag is not set. If there are entries in which the hold display flag is not set, the variable display result is determined from the symbol specification command in the entry, and the variable category is determined from the variable category command in the entry. Based on these determined variable display results and variable categories, the CPU determines whether the hold display effect will be executed and the effect pattern, i.e., the display patterns of the hold display and active display.

For example, as shown in Figure 82, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 5% chance that the hold display animation will not be executed, a 25% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern α, and a 70% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern β. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is not a reach, there is a 95% chance that the hold display animation will not be executed, a 5% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern α, and a 0% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern β. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), there is a 75% chance that the hold display animation will not be executed, a 20% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern α, and a 5% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern β. Furthermore, if the variable display result is incorrect and the variable category is Super Reach, there is a 65% chance that the pending display animation will not be executed, a 25% chance that the pending display animation will be executed using animation pattern α, and a 10% chance that the pending display animation will be executed using animation pattern β.

As described above, after determining whether or not to execute the hold display animation and the animation pattern, the animation control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag for the entry to "0" if it was determined that the hold display notification animation would not be executed, sets the value of the hold display flag for the entry to "1" if it was determined that the hold display notification animation would be executed with animation pattern α, and sets the value of the hold display flag for the entry to "2" if it was determined that the hold display notification animation would be executed with animation pattern β.

In this embodiment, as described above, after setting a value of 0 to 2 in the hold display flag corresponding to each entry in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 006SG194A, the performance control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process (step S61). When the value of the hold display flag is set to "0", the hold display or active display corresponding to that flag is displayed as a white circle (○). When the value of the hold display flag is set to "1", the hold display or active display corresponding to that flag is displayed as a white square (◇). When the value of the hold display flag is set to "2", the hold display or active display corresponding to that flag is displayed as a white star (☆).

With these settings, when the hold indicator or active indicator is displayed as a white square (display pattern A) or a white star (display pattern B), the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the hold indicator or active indicator is displayed as a white circle. Similarly, when the hold indicator or active indicator is displayed as a white star (display pattern B), the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the hold indicator or active indicator is displayed as a white square (display pattern A). Therefore, the display patterns of these hold indicators and active indicators, that is, whether or not the hold indicator effect is executed and the effect pattern, can draw the player's attention.

(Variable display start setting process)
Figure 83 is a flowchart of the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 81. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 006SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 006SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol hold memory in the start prize reception command buffer 006SG194A are shifted one buffer number higher (step 006SGS272). The contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "1-1" of the first special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-0," the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "1-2" of the first special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-1," the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "1-3" of the first special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-2," and the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "1-4" of the first special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-3."

Furthermore, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 006SGS271 (step 006SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 006SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273; Y), the various command data and flags stored in the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol hold memory in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 006SG194A are shifted one buffer number higher (step 006SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, and therefore it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "2-1" of the second special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-0," the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "2-2" of the second special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-1," the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "2-3" of the second special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-2," and the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "2-4" of the second special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-3."

After step 006SGS272 or step 006SGS274 is executed, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (step 006SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) (step 006 SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

Furthermore, in this feature unit 006SG, when the received variable display result specification command is a second variable display result specification command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbols) in which three symbols are aligned as "7" as the stopping symbols. Also, when the received variable display result specification command is a third variable display result specification command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot B or a fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot C, the stopping symbols are determined from among multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). Also, when the received variable display result specification command is a fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a non-probability variation jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbols) in which three symbols are aligned as even-numbered symbols as the stopping symbols. Furthermore, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to a loss, the system will determine, according to the variation pattern, a combination in which the three symbols are mismatched as the stopping symbols, or a combination that results in a missed reach (losing symbols) such as "767".

In determining these stop symbols, the CPU 120 for performance control can, for example, extract a random number to determine the stop symbol and use a stop symbol determination table, which associates data and numerical values indicating combinations of decorative symbols, to determine the stop symbol for the decorative symbols. That is, the stop symbol can be determined by selecting data indicating combinations of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

After step 006SGS276 is executed, the CPU 120 for performance control executes the following: a continuous crack effect setting process for executing a continuous crack effect during variable display (step 006SGS277), a dialogue予告 effect setting process for executing a dialogue予告 effect during variable display (step 006SGS278), a background change effect setting process for executing a background change effect during variable display (step 006SGS279), a reach suggestion effect setting process for executing a reach suggestion effect during variable display (step 006SGS280), and a cut-in effect setting process for executing a cut-in effect during variable display (step 006SGS281).

Then, the CPU 120 for performance control selects a performance control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variable pattern specification command (step 006SGS282), and starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006SGS283).

Furthermore, the process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the illumination of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all arranged sequentially in chronological order and associated with each process data n (numbered from 1 to N).

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, and operation unit control execution data 1) (step 006 SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a variation pattern on the image display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. Also, to control the on/off operation of the various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, to enable sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the variable display of decorative symbols using a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern specification command. However, the CPU 120 for performance control may also select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Next, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern specification command (step 006SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 006SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30ms. The performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every predetermined time. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 006SGS287).

(Continuous crack effect setting process)
Figure 84(A) is a flowchart of the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS277) in the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 83. In the continuous break effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the game state is in a normal state (step 006SGS311). If the game state is in a normal state (step 006SGS311; Y), it refers to the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 006SG194A to identify whether there are any entries where the value of the continuous break effect flag ("0" or "1") is not set (step 006SGS312), and determines whether there are any entries where the value of the continuous break effect flag is set (step 006SGS313).

If there is no entry with the value of the consecutive break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS318. If there is an entry with the value of the consecutive break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; Y), the execution of the consecutive break effect is determined based on the symbol specification command and variation category command stored in that entry (step 006SGS314). In this embodiment, the consecutive break effect in the normal state is an effect that suggests the variable display result of the target variable display will be a jackpot by being executed over multiple variable displays targeting a variable display that has not yet been executed (see Figure 87).

When the game state is normal, in step 006SGS314, the CPU 120 for performance control, as shown in Figure 84(B), decides to not execute the consecutive break animation 20% of the time and to execute the consecutive break animation 80% of the time if the variable display result is a jackpot. Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is not a reach, it decides to not execute the consecutive break animation 80% of the time and to execute the consecutive break animation 20% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), it decides to not execute the consecutive break animation 60% of the time and to execute the consecutive break animation 40% of the time. Finally, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, it decides to not execute the consecutive break animation 50% of the time and to execute the consecutive break animation 50% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state/probability-changing state, in step 006SGS314, the CPU 120 for performance control decides not to execute the consecutive break performance 30% of the time and to execute the consecutive break performance 70% of the time if the variable display result is a jackpot. If the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is not a reach, it decides not to execute the consecutive break performance 70% of the time and to execute the consecutive break performance 30% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a normal reach, it decides not to execute the consecutive break performance 50% of the time and to execute the consecutive break performance 50% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, it decides not to execute the consecutive break performance 40% of the time and to execute the consecutive break performance 60% of the time. Thus, in this embodiment, the proportion of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state when the consecutive break performance is executed, i.e., the jackpot expectation level, differs between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability-changing state.

Then, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether or not to execute the continuous crack effect in step 006SGS314 (step 006SGS315). If it decides to execute the continuous crack effect (step 006SGS315; Y), the CPU 120 for performance control sets the value of the continuous crack effect flag for that entry to "1" and proceeds to step 006SGS318. If it decides not to execute the continuous crack effect (step 006SGS315; N), the CPU 120 for performance control sets the value of the continuous crack effect flag for that entry to "0" and proceeds to step 006SGS318.

Next, in step 006SGS318, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether there is an entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break performance flag, that is, whether the execution of the continuous break performance has been decided (step 006SGS318). If there is no entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break performance flag (step 006SGS318; N), the continuous break performance setting process ends. If there is an entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break performance flag (step 006SGS318; Y), it further determines whether the entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break performance flag is the entry corresponding to the variable display, that is, whether it is an entry stored in the storage area of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of the start-up winning received command buffer 006SG194A (step 006SGS319).

If the entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break effect flag is not the entry corresponding to the variable display in question (step 006SGS319; N), the execution settings for the first continuous break effect are performed according to the fact that the variable display is not the target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS320). If the entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break effect flag is the entry corresponding to the variable display in question (step 006SGS319; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display is a variable display based on a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321). If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), the continuous break effect setting process is terminated. If the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321; N), the execution settings for the second continuous break effect are performed according to whether the variable display is a target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS322).

In other words, in this embodiment, if the game state is in the normal state and the execution of the consecutive break effect is decided, the first consecutive break effect is executed for the variable display prior to the variable display that is the target of the consecutive break effect. Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the consecutive break effect is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern, the second consecutive break effect is not executed. However, if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, the second consecutive break effect is executed.

Furthermore, if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state (step 006SGS311; N), the performance control CPU 120 performs the execution of a continuous break effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display and terminates the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS323). For example, in step 006SGS323, the performance control CPU 120 first decides whether or not to execute a continuous break effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display. At this time, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, the continuous break effect should be decided at the lowest rate, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern, the continuous break effect should be decided at the highest rate (execution rate of continuous break effect for each variation pattern: super reach > normal reach > non-reach). If the execution of the consecutive break effect is decided, and the variable display's variation pattern is not a reach, then the variable display should be set to execute the consecutive break effect (first consecutive break effect) once or twice. If the variable display's variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach, then the variable display should be set to execute the first consecutive break effect twice, and then execute the second consecutive break effect once after the two first consecutive break effects.

In other words, the continuous splitting animation in the time-saving state and probability-changing state of this embodiment is an animation that can be executed multiple times within the variable display, and the animation suggests that a reach will occur depending on the number of times it is executed.

(Dialogue preview effect setting processing)
Figure 85(A) is a flowchart showing the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) setting process (step 006SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 83. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331; Y), the dialogue予告演出 setting process is terminated. If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach without shortening, a normal reach, or a super reach (step 006SGS331; N), the presence or absence of a dialogue予告演出 and the performance pattern are determined according to the variation pattern and the variable display result (step 006SGS332).

For example, as shown in Figure 85(B), if the variation pattern is not a reach and the variable display result is a miss, the decision to not perform the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) is made 70% of the time, and the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern A is made 30% of the time. Also, if the variation pattern is a normal reach and the variable display result is a miss, the decision to not perform the dialogue予告演出 is made 60% of the time, the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern A is made 35% of the time, and the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern B is made 5% of the time. Also, if the variation pattern is a super reach and the variable display result is a miss, the decision to not perform the dialogue予告演出 is made 40% of the time, the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern A is made 10% of the time, the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern B is made 20% of the time, and the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern C is made 30% of the time. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the system determines whether to not execute the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) with a 10% probability, whether to execute it using dialogue予告演出 pattern A with a 5% probability, whether to execute it using dialogue予告演出 pattern B with a 10% probability, and whether to execute it using dialogue予告演出 pattern C with a 75% probability.

As shown in Figure 85(C), performance pattern A is a performance pattern in which the line "Chance!?" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 during a crack effect performed as part of a dialogue予告 (preview) performance. Performance pattern B is a performance pattern in which the line "Super hot!" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 during a crack effect performed as part of a dialogue予告 (preview) performance. Performance pattern C is a performance pattern in which the line "Super hot!" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 during a crack effect performed as part of a dialogue予告 (preview) performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 85(B), when a dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) is performed during variable display, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is set higher than when the dialogue予告演出 is not performed (not performed). Moreover, when the dialogue予告演出 is performed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is highest when the dialogue予告演出 is performed using performance pattern C, and lowest when the dialogue予告演出 is performed using performance pattern A (jackpot expectation rate according to the presence or absence of dialogue予告演出 and performance pattern: performance pattern C > performance pattern B > performance pattern A > not performed).

(Background change effect setting process)
Next, the background change effect setting process (step 006SGS279) shown in Figure 83 will be described. In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7. If the variation pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7, it refers to the start-up prize-winning received command buffer 006SG194A.

When the game is in a normal state, if the starting prize-winning received command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol specification command indicating a jackpot, that is, if there is no reserve memory for a jackpot, then, as shown in Figure 86(A), the background image change will not be executed and the background change effect will not be executed with a 60% probability. The background image change will not be executed and the background change effect will be executed in a failed pattern (if the variable display variation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the background change effect A will be executed in a failed pattern, and the variable display will be changed If the motion pattern is PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, or PB1-4, the execution of the failed pattern of background change effect B is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of the background image change and the successful pattern of the background change effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state/probability-changing state, if the starting entry command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol specification command indicating a jackpot, that is, if there is no reserve memory for a jackpot, the game will decide not to perform a background image change and not to perform the background change animation with a 50% probability, not to perform a background image change and to perform the background change animation in a failed pattern with a 45% probability (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, then to perform the background change animation in a failed pattern), and to perform a background image change and to perform the background change animation in a successful pattern (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, then to perform the background change animation in a successful pattern with a 5% probability.

Furthermore, when the game state is normal, if a symbol specification command indicating a jackpot is stored in the start-up winning-received command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a reserve memory for a jackpot, then, as shown in Figure 86(A), the background image change will not be executed and the background change effect will not be executed with a 30% probability. The background image change will not be executed and the background change effect will be executed in a failed pattern (if the variable display variation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, then the background change effect A will be executed in a failed pattern, and the variable display If the variation pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, or PB1-4, the execution of the failed pattern of background change effect B is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the background image change and the successful pattern of the background change effect is determined at a rate of 70%. Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state/probability-changing state, if a symbol specification command indicating a jackpot is stored in the start-up entry command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a reserve memory indicating a jackpot, then the game is determined to not execute the background image change and not perform the background change animation with a 20% probability, to not execute the background image change and perform the background change animation in a failed pattern (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, then perform the failed pattern of background change animation A) with a 0% probability, and to execute the background image change and perform the background change animation in a successful pattern (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, then perform the successful pattern of background change animation A) with an 80% probability. Thus, in this embodiment, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state when the background change animation is executed, i.e., the jackpot expectation level, differs between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability-changing state.

Furthermore, if it is decided to execute one of the background change animation patterns, the execution settings corresponding to that background change animation pattern should be configured, and the background change animation should be executed in the variable display animation processing according to those execution settings. Also, if it is decided to change the background image (if it is decided to execute the successful pattern of the background change animation), the background image change settings should be configured. The background image change should be executed in the background display update process (step S79) shown in Figure 80.

(Setting process for suggesting a reach)
Next, the reach suggestion effect setting process (step 006 SGS280) shown in Figure 83 will be explained. In the reach suggestion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3. If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the CPU determines whether or not to execute the reach suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the reach suggestion effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display.

For example, as shown in Figure 86(B), if the variable display's variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the system determines that the reach suggestion animation will not be executed 80% of the time, and that it will be executed in a failed pattern 20% of the time. Furthermore, if the variable display's variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, the system determines that the reach suggestion animation will not be executed 30% of the time, and that it will be executed in a successful pattern 70% of the time. In other words, in this embodiment, when the reach suggestion animation is executed, the system is set to execute a reach (normal reach or super reach animation) at a higher rate than when the reach suggestion animation is not executed. Moreover, when the reach suggestion animation is executed, the player is notified that a reach will not occur if the animation is executed in a failed pattern, while the player is notified that a reach will occur if the animation is executed in a successful pattern.

Furthermore, if you decide to execute one of the reach-indicating animation patterns, you should configure the execution settings according to that animation pattern and then execute the reach-indicating animation during the variable display animation processing according to those execution settings.

(Cut-in effect setting process)
Next, the cut-in effect setting process (step 006 SGS281) shown in Figure 83 will be described. In the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display's variation pattern is one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, or PB1-7. If the variable display's variation pattern is one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, or PB1-7, the CPU determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect according to the variable display result of the variable display.

For example, when the game state is normal, as shown in Figure 86(C), if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in animation is decided not to be performed with a 65% probability, the cut-in animation is decided to be performed with animation pattern X with a 30% probability, and the cut-in animation is decided to be performed with animation pattern Y with a 5% probability. Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in animation is decided not to be performed with a 10% probability, the cut-in animation is decided to be performed with animation pattern X with a 20% probability, and the cut-in animation is decided to be performed with animation pattern Y with a 70% probability.

In other words, in this embodiment, when a cut-in animation is performed, the game is controlled to a jackpot state at a higher rate than when a cut-in animation is not performed. Furthermore, when a cut-in animation is performed, when the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern Y, the game is controlled to a jackpot state at a higher rate than when the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern X (jackpot expectation rate for the presence or absence of cut-in animation and animation pattern: animation pattern Y > animation pattern X > no cut-in animation). Also, when the game state is a time-saving state/probability-changing state, if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in animation is not performed with a 70% probability, the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern X with a 30% probability, and the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern Y with a 0% probability. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in animation is not performed with a 10% probability, the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern X with a 15% probability, and the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern Y with a 75% probability. Thus, in this embodiment, the proportion of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state when a cut-in animation is performed, i.e., the probability of winning a jackpot, differs between the normal state and the time-saving/probability variation state.

Furthermore, the cut-in animation in this embodiment displays different images depending on the animation pattern (for example, an image of the words "Hot!!" or an image of the words "Chance!"), and the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on which image is displayed (which animation pattern is used to execute the animation). (In this embodiment, animation pattern X displays the image of the words "Chance!", and animation pattern Y displays the image of the words "Hot!!").

Furthermore, if you decide to execute one of the cut-in animation patterns, you should configure the execution settings according to that cut-in animation pattern, and then execute the cut-in animation during the variable display animation processing according to those execution settings.

In this embodiment, a cut-in animation is exemplified as an animation accompanied by a cracking animation (see Figures 88 and 112). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in animation may include both animation patterns with and without a cracking animation. For example, animation pattern Y, which has a high probability of winning, may be an animation pattern accompanied by a cracking animation, and animation pattern X, which has a low probability of winning, may be an animation pattern without a cracking animation. Furthermore, when animation pattern X is an animation pattern without a cracking animation, when the animation pattern for the cut-in animation is determined to be animation pattern X, the display mode of the strip-shaped image displayed on the image display device 5 may be determined from a plurality of modes corresponding to the variable display result (for example, the display color of the image may be determined in different proportions from blue, green, and red depending on whether the variable display result is a win or a loss). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in animation is accompanied by a cracking animation, and if the cut-in animation is not accompanied by a cracking animation, it is possible to further draw the player's attention to the display mode of the displayed image.

(Explanation of the production)
As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the continuous cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect, reach suggestion effect, and cut-in effect at the start of the variable display. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the continuous cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect, reach suggestion effect, and cut-in effect described above, multiple effects can be executed while the variable display is in progress.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 87 and 88, when the game state is the normal state, the following effects can be executed: the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 89, when the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variation state, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the background change effect A, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect can be executed. Furthermore, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the cut-in effect may be made unexecutable in the normal state and only executable in the time-saving state or probability variation state. In this case, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the cut-in effect are executed according to the determination ratios shown in Figures 84(B) and 86(C). This allows for the execution of different types of cracking animations in the normal state, the time-saving state, and the probability-increasing state.

As shown in Figures 87 to 89, the first continuous cracking effect among these effects is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed from the start timing of the variable display in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed as the image to be cracked in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character, and only the part in which the crack occurs breaks (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). Furthermore, the first continuous cracking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the area targeted by the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. Furthermore, the first consecutive split animation is an animation that may occur during the variable display before the variable display of the pre-read target. However, in the time-saving mode and probability-increasing mode, it can occur multiple times during the execution of the first variable display, and the number of times it occurs suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

The second consecutive cracking effect is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect occurs in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. This effect is executed from the start timing of the variable display, and cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of movable parts or the action of characters, and only the cracked part breaks (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). Furthermore, the second consecutive cracking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the area targeted by the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. In addition, the second consecutive cracking effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display of the pre-read target.

The dialogue notification effect is an effect in which, as an action prompting effect, an action prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) in the display area of the image display device 5 prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. In this effect, cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of a movable body or the action of a character, and only the part where the cracks occur breaks (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). Furthermore, the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) is a performance in which the visibility of the background image differs between the area targeted by the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. Additionally, one of the following lines of dialogue is displayed in the cracked area (the area targeted by the cracking effect): "Chance!", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!". The percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on the displayed line (the displayed line suggests the percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation)).

Background change effect A is an effect that may change the background image by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5, and then executing a cracking effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. Background change effect A can be executed in two ways: a successful pattern in which the background image changes when a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the character's action, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks; and a failed pattern in which the background image does not change because no character appears and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack).

Background change effect B is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, thereby changing the background image. Furthermore, background change effect B can be executed in two ways: a successful pattern where cracks occur in two stages on the glass plate image 006SG301, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, resulting in a change of the background image; or a failure pattern (failure pattern 1 and failure pattern 2) where a first stage of crack occurs on glass plate image 006SG301 but a second stage does not occur and glass plate image 006SG301A does not shatter, or where both first and second stage cracks occur on glass plate image 006SG301 but glass plate image 006SG301A does not shatter, resulting in no change of the background image.

The pseudo-consecutive display is an effect in which, when the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a specific combination during the execution of the variable display, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, thereby restarting the variable display of the decorative symbols. This effect is achieved when the movable body 32 operates, causing cracks to form in the glass plate image 006SG301, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. In this embodiment, the pseudo-consecutive display is executed up to two times during the variable display, and the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A that breaks in the first pseudo-consecutive display is different from the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A that breaks in the second pseudo-consecutive display. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 67 and 68, the more times the pseudo-consecutive display animation is performed during the variable display, the higher the percentage of times the variable display result results in a jackpot (the percentage of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state). In other words, in the pseudo-consecutive display animation in this embodiment, the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the cracking animation, which is performed as part of the pseudo-consecutive display animation, can indicate to the player the percentage of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state (the expected jackpot rate).

The reach-indication effect is an effect that suggests the establishment of a reach during variable display. It is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, thereby establishing a reach. Furthermore, the reach-indication effect can be executed in two ways: a successful pattern where a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the character's action, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and thus establishes a reach; and a failure pattern where a crack occurs due to the character's action, but the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack), resulting in no reach being established.

The weak development sequence is a sequence that occurs after a normal reach sequence, in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transparency of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking sequence is performed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. If the game state is normal, this sequence notifies the player of the transition to the Super Reach α reach sequence; if the game state is shortened time or probability variation, this sequence notifies the player of the transition to the Super Reach γ reach sequence. Furthermore, the weak development sequence can also be a sequence in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks without any cracks appearing due to the action of a character.

Strong Development演出 A, when the game state is the normal state, is an effect that signals a transition to the Super Reach β reach effect. This effect occurs when, after the Super Reach α reach effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with less than 100% transparency is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A, displayed in place of the original glass plate image 006SG301, breaks in response to the movement of the movable body 32. When the game state is the Time-Saving State or the Probability-Boosting State, this effect signals a transition to the Super Reach δ reach effect. When the game state is the Normal Reach reach effect, this effect occurs when, after the Normal Reach reach effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with less than 100% transparency is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A, displayed in place of the original glass plate image 006SG301, breaks in response to the movement of the movable body 32.

The powerful development effect B is an effect in which cracks appear without any interaction from the character, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters. During the reach effect of Super Reach α, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters. This effect signals the transition to the reach effect of Super Reach β, and is an effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters without any cracking caused by the movement of the movable body 32 or the character's interaction.

The cut-in effect is an action prompting effect in which, as an action prompting effect, an action prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) of the image display device 5 prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. This effect is characterized by the entire glass plate image 006SG301A cracking without the occurrence of cracks due to the movement of movable parts or the actions of characters. Furthermore, the cut-in effect displays different cut-in images depending on the effect pattern from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks, and the percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on the displayed cut-in image (the displayed cut-in image suggests the percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation)).

The result notification effect is an effect in which, as an operation prompting effect, an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) in the display area of the image display device 5, and then, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is performed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, thereby notifying the player that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state. Furthermore, the result notification animation is executed in two ways: a success pattern in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301 after a crack occurs due to the movement of the movable part, thereby notifying that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state; and a failure pattern in which the game has been executed in which the game has been controlled to a jackpot state because the movable part does not move, no crack occurs in glass plate image 006SG301, and glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack), thus notifying that the game has not been controlled to a jackpot state, i.e., that the variable display result is a miss. In addition, in this embodiment, the result notification animation may exceptionally be executed in the variable display of PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are variable patterns for non-reach jackpots or non-reach misses, when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state (see Figure 93).

(Performance timing for each variation pattern)
Next, we will explain the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the effects in this embodiment. First, regarding the variable display when the game state is the normal state, as shown in Figure 90(A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-1, which is a variation pattern with no shortening and no reach misses, the effects can be executed individually without overlapping durations in the following order from the start timing of the variable display: the first consecutive break effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, and the reach suggestion effect.

As shown in Figure 90(B), when variable display is executed in the shortened non-reach miss variation patterns PA1-2 and PA1-3, the first consecutive break effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in Figure 90(C), when variable display is executed in PA2-1 and PB1-1, which are variation patterns for normal reach jackpots and normal reach misses, the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), background change演出 A, reach indication演出 (reach suggestion演出), and normal reach演出 (reach演出) are executed individually without overlapping performance periods, starting a short time after the variable display begins.

As shown in Figure 90(D), when variable display is executed in PA2-2 and PB1-2, which are variation patterns for Super Reach α jackpot and Super Reach α miss, the following sequences can be executed individually without overlapping durations, starting from the variable display's start timing: second consecutive break effect, background change effect B, first pseudo-consecutive effect, normal reach effect, weak development effect, and Super Reach α reach effect. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach α reach effect, the result notification effect is executed in conjunction with the Super Reach α reach effect.

As shown in Figure 91(A), when variable display is executed in PA2-3 and PB1-3, which are variation patterns for Super Reach β jackpot and Super Reach β miss, the following sequences can be executed individually without overlapping durations, starting from the beginning of the variable display: second consecutive break sequence, dialogue予告 sequence, background change sequence A, reach suggestion sequence, normal reach sequence, weak development sequence, Super Reach α sequence, strong development sequence A, and Super Reach β sequence. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach β sequence, the cut-in sequence and result notification sequence are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β sequence.

In particular, the character displayed in background change effect A begins to appear after the display of the dialogue in the dialogue予告 effect (the display of the cracked area within the display area of the image display device 5) has disappeared. Therefore, a new crack effect does not occur where a crack effect has already occurred, preventing a decrease in the effectiveness of each crack effect due to the player's attention being dispersed among multiple crack effects.

As shown in Figure 91(B), when variable display is executed in PA2-4 and PB1-4, which are variation patterns for Super Reach β jackpot and Super Reach β miss, the following sequences can be executed individually without overlapping durations, starting from the variable display's start timing: second consecutive break sequence, background change sequence B, first pseudo-consecutive sequence, second pseudo-consecutive sequence, normal reach sequence, weak development sequence, Super Reach α sequence, strong development sequence B, and Super Reach β sequence. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach β sequence, the cut-in sequence and result notification sequence are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β sequence.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 90 to 92, an example is provided in which the variable display on which background change effect B is executed and the variable display on which the dialogue予告 effect is executed are different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change effect B and the dialogue予告 effect may be executed within the same variable display. Furthermore, in the case where the background change effect B and the dialogue予告 effect are executed within the same variable display, if the execution of background change effect B is decided, the execution periods of background change effect B and the dialogue予告 effect may be avoided. By doing so, for example, if the cracking effect as a dialogue予告 effect is executed while the cracking effect as background change effect B is occurring, it is possible to prevent the player who is experiencing the cracking effect as background change effect B from being misled, that is, from being misled into thinking that the background image is changing.

Next, we will explain the variable display when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state. As shown in Figures 92(A) and 92(B), when the variable display is executed in PA1-5, which is a non-reach miss variation pattern, if the execution of a continuous break effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss or non-reach jackpot variation patterns, is decided, the first continuous break effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display. If the execution of a background change effect is decided as a pre-announcement targeting PB1-7, which is a super reach δ jackpot variation pattern, background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

Furthermore, for the variable display of PB1-5, which are non-reach jackpot variation patterns, it may be possible to execute a pre-announcement effect in which cracks gradually spread within the display area of the image display device 5 from the variable display prior to the said variable display, and an effect (so-called instant win effect, special consecutive crack effect) is executed in which the crack effect is executed at the start of the PB1-5 variable display and the jackpot symbols are displayed (a so-called instant win effect, special consecutive crack effect). Since this effect is an instant win effect, the movement speed of the fragments displayed as part of the crack effect may be faster than that of fragments displayed as part of other crack effects.

As shown in Figures 92(C) and 92(D), when the variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss variation pattern, if the execution of a continuous break effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss or non-reach jackpot variation patterns, is determined, the first continuous break effect can be executed individually twice from the start timing of the variable display. Furthermore, if the execution of a background change effect is determined as a pre-announcement targeting PB1-7, which is a Super Reach δ jackpot variation pattern, background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 93(A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss variation pattern, and when it is the target of the continuous break effect, and when the execution of the background change effect has not been decided as a pre-read for PB1-7, which is a Super Reach δ jackpot variation pattern, and when the variable display is executed in PB1-5, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, the first continuous break effect is executed individually three times from the start timing of the variable display, and then the result notification effect is executed.

As shown in Figure 93(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-5, which is a variation pattern for a normal reach failure, no effects other than the variable display of decorative symbols are executed from the start of the variable display until the reach timing. From the reach timing onward, only the reach effects of a normal reach are executed.

As shown in Figure 93(C), when variable display is executed in PA2-6 and PB1-6, which are variation patterns for Super Reach γ jackpot or Super Reach γ miss, no effects other than the variable display of decorative symbols are executed from the start of the variable display until the reach timing. From the reach timing, the normal reach effect, weak development effect, and Super Reach γ reach effect are executed individually without overlapping effect periods. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach γ reach effect, the result notification effect is executed in conjunction with the Super Reach γ reach effect.

As shown in Figure 93(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-7 and PB1-7, which are variation patterns for Super Reach δ jackpot or Super Reach δ miss, the background change effect A can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach timing. Furthermore, from the reach timing onward, the normal reach effect, strong development effect A, and Super Reach δ reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping effect periods. During the execution period of the Super Reach δ reach effect, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach δ reach effect.

(The sequence of events in Super Reach α)
Next, the flow of the Super Reach α sequence will be explained based on Figures 94 to 96. Figure 94 is a diagram showing the flow of the Super Reach α sequence. Figure 95 is a diagram showing the flow of the Super Reach α sequence. Figure 96 is a diagram showing the flow of the Super Reach α sequence.

As shown in Figure 94 (A1), in the normal state (low probability, low base state), when the variable display of symbols based on the variation pattern of Super Reach α begins, a first background image (for example, an image representing a daytime city scene) is displayed as the background image, and the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the second consecutive crack effect begins. Specifically, when the second consecutive crack effect begins, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the crack premonition image, the crack premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 94 (A2)), a crack effect is performed in which a part of the crack target image that replaces the crack premonition image cracks, and multiple fragment images scatter. Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect begins. Subsequently, in the image that replaces the pre-crack image, a character image (object image) is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range). The type of character image displayed suggests the possibility of a jackpot (see Figure 94 (A3)). After the second consecutive crack effect ends, the variable display is executed again.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the second consecutive crack effect ended, a dialogue notification effect begins. Specifically, at a predetermined timing after the dialogue notification effect begins, an action prompt image is displayed to encourage the operation of the push button 31B (see Figure 94 (A4)). The action prompt image consists of a button image resembling the push button 31B, a text image that reads "Press!!", an indicator image showing the effective operation period, and an effect image.

Next, when push button 31B is operated, or when the operation validity period ends without push button 31B being operated, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the crack premonition image (see Figure 94 (A5)), a crack effect is performed in which a part of the target image that replaces the crack premonition image cracks, and multiple fragments of images scatter. A whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the crack effect begins. Afterward, the text image "Chance!?" is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) of the target image that replaces the crack premonition image, and the content of the displayed text image suggests the possibility of a jackpot in the variable display result (see Figure 94 (A6)). After the dialogue予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) ends, the variable display is executed again.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the dialogue preview sequence ended, background change sequence A begins. Specifically, an effect image is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 94 (A7)), and if the appearance of a character has been determined, a character image (object image) is displayed (see Figure 94 (A8)). Next, a cracking premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in accordance with the character image's movement (for example, the character kicking), and after the cracking premonition image is displayed in a cracked state as cracks appear on a part of it (see Figure 94 (A9)), the entire cracking target image, which replaces the cracking premonition image, cracks, and a cracking sequence is performed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 94 (A10)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the cracking sequence begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a second background image different from the first background image (for example, a special zone image representing a wilderness landscape) is displayed as the background image (see Figure 94 (A11)). After background change effect A finishes, the variable display will be executed again.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the background change effect A ended, the reach suggestion effect began. Specifically, the decorative symbols were temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and a character image (object image) was displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 94 (A12)). Next, in response to the character image's actions (for example, the character striking the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a small mallet), a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed. A crack then appears on the left side of the crack precursor image, causing it to display in a first crack pattern (see Figure 94 (A13)). Then, in response to the character image's actions (for example, the character striking the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a small mallet), a crack appears on the right side of the crack precursor image, causing it to change from a first crack pattern to a second crack pattern (see Figure 94 (A14)). Furthermore, in response to the character image's actions (for example, the character striking the area corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C with a small mallet) (Figure 94 (A15)), if a crack is determined, the entire cracked area of the crack target image, replacing the crack precursor image, cracks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 94 (A16)).

Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) will be displayed across the entire screen for a predetermined period after the crack effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the same numbered decorative symbols will be temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the N-reach effect will begin.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the N-Reach animation, a weak development animation begins. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 94 (A17)), a pre-breaking image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in accordance with the character image's actions (for example, the character moves toward the front of the display screen and punches a glass plate) (see Figure 95 (A18)). Without any cracks appearing on part of the pre-breaking image, the entire target image, which replaces the pre-breaking image, breaks, and multiple fragments scatter (see Figure 95 (A19)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the breaking animation. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a weak S-Reach animation A (for example, a bowling match between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figures 95 (A20) to (A22)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the weak S-reach animation, the strong development animation A begins. Specifically, after the development symbol with the word "Development" displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped (see Figure 95 (A23)), a crack premonition image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movable body 32 falls from its origin position at the top of the display screen to an animation position that overlaps with the approximate center of the display screen). Without any cracks appearing in part of the crack premonition image, the entire crack target image, which replaces the crack premonition image, cracks, and a crack animation is performed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 95 (A24)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the crack animation begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the reach title image is displayed, and the strong S-reach animation (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figures 95 (A25) to (A27)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the Strong S Reach演出 (Strong S Reach演出), a cut-in演出 (cut-in演出) begins. Specifically, at a predetermined timing after the start of the Strong S Reach演出, an operation prompt image is displayed to encourage the operation of the push button 31B (see Figure 95 (A28)). Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation valid period ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed. Without cracks being displayed in any part of the crack premonition image, the entire area of the target image that replaces the crack premonition image cracks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragments of images scatter. Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect. After that, the text image "Hot!!" is displayed in the cracked area (specific range), and the content of the displayed text image suggests the possibility of a jackpot in the variable display result (see Figure 95 (A29)). After the cut-in演出 ends, the Strong S Reach演出 is executed again.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the cut-in animation ended, the result notification animation begins. Specifically, first, an image of the allied character delivering the final blow is displayed (see Figure 96 (A30)), and then the allied character's movements are displayed in slow motion while the image fades out (see Figure 96 (A31)).

If the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an image of an ally character's attack hitting an enemy character is displayed (see Figure 96 (A32)). Then, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed according to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a predetermined performance position between the origin position and the performance position). A crack is displayed in a part of the crack premonition image, causing the crack premonition image to be displayed in a cracked pattern (for example, a crack extending downwards from the movable body 32), and a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figure 96 (A33)).

Next, in response to the movement of the movable body (for example, the movable body 32 returns to its origin position by rising from a predetermined performance position at the top of the display screen), the entire area of the image to be cracked, which replaces the pre-crack image, cracks, and a cracking effect is performed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 96 (A34)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the confirmed winning combinations of decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and it is announced that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character. Furthermore, after the background image is displayed as the fifth background image 006SG085 for jackpots (for example, a rainbow-colored image), the movable lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow), a predetermined sound effect is output, and the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 96 (A35)). Then, the background image returns to the first background image, and the winning combination's confirmed decorative symbols are displayed (see Figure 96 (A36)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a false result, after an image of an enemy character's punch hitting an ally character is displayed (see Figure 96 (A37)), the movable body 32 does not move, and a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed. A crack is then displayed in a portion of this crack precursor image, causing the image to appear cracked (for example, a crack in the center of the display screen), and a gray image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figure 96 (A38)).

Next, after a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed (see Figure 96 (A39)), as the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the confirmed decorative symbols for non-winning combinations are temporarily displayed, and it is announced that the ally character has lost the battle against the enemy character (Figure 96 (A40)). Furthermore, after it is announced that the game is not controlled to a winning state, the background image returns to the first background image, and the confirmed decorative symbols for non-winning combinations are displayed stopped (see Figure 96 (A41)).

(Flow of the presentation in Super Reach β)
Next, the flow of the presentation in Super Reach β will be explained based on Figures 97 and 98. Figure 97 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation in Super Reach β. Figure 98 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation in Super Reach β.

As shown in Figure 97 (B1), in the normal state (low probability, low base state), when the variable display of symbols based on the variation pattern of Super Reach β begins, the first background image is displayed as the background image, and the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, background change effect B is started. Specifically, when background change effect B is started, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack display area consisting of cracks including a small crack area is displayed in the lower left of the crack premonition image, so that the crack premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 97 (B2)). Then, two crack display areas are displayed on the right side of the crack premonition image, so that the cracked state of the crack premonition image changes in stages (see Figure 97 (B3)). If a crack is determined, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack premonition image cracks, and a crack effect is performed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 97 (B4)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) will be displayed across the entire screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a second background image, different from the first background image, will be displayed as the background image (see Figure 97 (B5)).

After the background change effect A finishes, the variable display is executed again. A decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 97 (B6)). Then, in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, a decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed, resulting in the variable display mode becoming a "reach" mode (see Figure 97 (B7)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed following the end of background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive symbol effect begins. Specifically, in the central decorative symbol display area 5C, the pseudo-consecutive symbol displaying the word "NEXT," indicating the start of re-variable display, is displayed at a reduced speed just before the stop display position (see Figure 97 (B8)).

Next, after a pseudo-consecutive symbol is temporarily displayed at the stop display position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 97 (B9)), a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the crack premonition image, the crack premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 97 (B10)). Then, in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position at the top of the display screen to an effect position that overlaps with the approximate center of the display screen), the entire area of the crack target image, which replaces the crack premonition image, cracks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 97 (B11)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the crack effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a text image such as "×2" indicating the number of re-variable display attempts is displayed, and then the variable display resumes (see Figures 97 (B12) to (B13)).

Furthermore, in the case of a variable display where the pseudo-consecutive win notification is not executed, the pseudo-consecutive win symbols pass through the stop display position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C, and decorative symbols with a number one greater than the temporarily stopped decorative symbols in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are displayed as stop symbols, resulting in a variable display result indicating a loss (see Figure 97 (B9A)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes, in the case of a three-symbol pseudo-consecutive effect, the pseudo-consecutive symbols, which display the word "NEXT" indicating the start of the pseudo-consecutive effect, are displayed at a reduced speed just before the stop display position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 97 (B14)). After the pseudo-consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped at the stop display position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 97 (B15)), a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the crack premonition image, the crack premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 97 (B16)). Then, in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to an effect position that overlaps with the approximate center of the display screen), the entire area of the crack target image, which replaces the crack premonition image, cracks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 97 (B17)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) will be displayed across the entire screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, text images such as "×3" indicating the number of re-variable display attempts will be displayed, after which the variable display will resume (see Figures 98 (B18) to (B19)).

In the case of a two-consecutive-pattern pseudo-consecutive-play sequence, after the second variable display resumes, and in the case of a three-consecutive-pattern pseudo-consecutive-play sequence, after the third variable display resumes, the decorative symbol that was being displayed variably in the left decorative symbol display area 5L temporarily stops (see Figure 98 (B20)). Then, the decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L temporarily stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in an N-reach (see Figure 98 (B21)), and the N-reach sequence begins.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the N-Reach animation, a weak development animation begins. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 98 (B22)), a pre-breaking image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the character image's movement (for example, the character moving toward the front of the display screen and punching a glass plate) (see Figure 98 (B23)). Without any cracks appearing on a portion of the pre-breaking image, the entire image of the target of the break, replacing the pre-breaking image, breaks, and multiple fragments scatter (see Figure 98 (B24)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the breakage animation. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a weak S-Reach animation (for example, a bowling match between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figures 98 (B25) to (B26)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the weak S reach animation began, the strong development animation B begins. Specifically, when the strong development animation B begins, a cracking premonition image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the cracking premonition image, the cracking premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 98 (B27)). Then, the entire cracking target image that replaces the cracking premonition image cracks, and a cracking animation is performed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 98 (B28)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the cracking animation begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the development symbol with the word "Development" displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 98 (B29)). Then, the reach title image is displayed, and the strong S reach animation B (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figure 98 (B30)). Furthermore, Strong S-Reach演出 B is considered a S-Reach演出 with a higher expectation of success than Strong S-Reach演出 A. Also, because Strong S-Reach演出 B has a higher expectation of success than Strong S-Reach演出 A, the cut-in演出 described later is more likely to occur in演出 pattern Y. In other words, Strong S-Reach演出 B is a演出 that makes the fragment image 006SG302 described later more likely to be displayed than Strong S-Reach演出 A.

Strong S-Reach演出B is almost identical to Super Reach α's Strong S-Reach演出A, differing only in the type of enemy character, etc. Therefore, a detailed explanation of the sequence until the variable display ends will be omitted from here on.

(Examples of various effects and actions)
Next, examples of the operation of crack effects in various effects that the CPU 120 for effect control can execute will be explained based on Figures 99 to 115.

Furthermore, an example of the expression used to indicate the display method in the following explanation is provided.

"Fade-out display" increases the transparency (transparency) of the displayed image over time, while "fade-in display" decreases the transparency (transparency) of the displayed image over time.

"Animated display" refers to a dynamic display (video display) that creates movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame earlier. This change in visibility is achieved by altering at least one of the following: position, size, color, or transparency, compared to the image one frame earlier. In other words, "animated display" includes not only displays involving image displacement, such as "moving display," "rotating display," "enlarging display," "shrinking display," "frame-in display," and "frame-out display," but also displays that do not involve image displacement, such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display," where the display characteristics, such as color tone, change. In this embodiment, the number of still images (frames) displayed in one second of video is 30, meaning the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of "animated display." It refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) where the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous frame, resulting in no change in the display format whatsoever.

As shown in Figures 99 to 115, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R when the game state is in a low-base state (for low-base state) consist of: a circular number base section in front view and a number display section consisting of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section; a character display section displaying 10 types of characters corresponding to each number "0" to "9" in the number display section (not all characters are shown); an information display section in front view consisting of a rectangular information base section and information about the characters (e.g., the character's name) displayed on the front of the information base section; and a roughly rectangular base display section displayed surrounding these number display section, character display section, and information display section (see Figure 58, etc.).

Although not explained in detail here, when the game state is a high-base state or in other performance modes, decorative symbols with different display patterns from those used in the low-base state may be variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Furthermore, while the example of the variable display pattern for the variable display pattern for the low-base state is shown as a vertical scrolling display from the top to the bottom of the screen, other variable display patterns are also possible, and the variable display pattern may differ depending on the game state or performance mode.

The display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts, as well as a small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbols consist of the numbers "0" through "9" displayed in the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In this embodiment, while the numbers of the decorative symbols and the small symbols correspond, it is not necessarily required that all the numbers of both symbols correspond. For example, the numbers of the small symbols may be fewer than the numbers "0" through "9" of the decorative symbols, ranging from "1" to "5," or they may be different symbols or figures.

The special symbol hold memory display area 5U, located at the bottom of the image display device 5's screen, displays the first hold display 006SG101 (see Figure 148) and the second hold display (not shown), corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending. The active display area 5F, also located at the bottom of the screen, displays the active display 006SG103, corresponding to the variable display currently in execution. These first hold memory counts, second hold memory counts, small symbols, special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in all performance modes.

<First consecutive break effect and second consecutive break effect>
Details of the operation examples for the first consecutive crack effect and the second consecutive crack effect will be explained based on Figures 99 and 100. Figure 99 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example for the first consecutive crack effect. Figure 100 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example for the second consecutive crack effect.

As shown in Figure 99(A), when the game state is in the normal state, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the second consecutive cracking effect is started. Then, the glass plate image 006SG301, which is a cracking precursor image, is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and cracks are displayed radiating outwards from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the crack pattern is more noticeable (see Figure 99(B)). Furthermore, when the game state is a time-saving state/probability-changing state, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the second consecutive cracking effect begins. At this time, the glass plate image 006SG301, which serves as a cracking premonition image, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area, which is higher than the sixth background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability-changing state. Cracks are displayed radiating outwards from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Additionally, the decorative symbols displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the sixth background image displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the cracked state is more prominent.

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or in the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks (the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken state), and a cracking effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts (see Figure 99(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transmittance gradually increases, making the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 visible (see Figure 99(D)). When the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see Figure 99(E)).

Subsequently, in the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the character image 006SG305 and background effect image 006SG314, which are displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A, are displayed until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished (see Figure 99(F)). After that, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the character image 006SG305, and the background effect image 006SG314 become invisible (see Figure 99(G)). Here, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed, the background effect image 006SG314 is displayed with second visibility in a predetermined area of the glass plate image 006SG301A other than the crack display area 006SG304, and with first visibility, which is more visible than second visibility, in the crack display area 006SG304 (specific area). In other words, because the visibility differs between the uncracked area and the area visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, as shown in Figure 100, the second consecutive crack effect is almost identical to the first consecutive crack effect in other respects, except for the type of character that appears; therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here. Note that in this embodiment, the operation examples of the first and second consecutive crack effects are shown as being almost identical, but the operation examples of the first and second consecutive crack effects may differ.

For example, in both the first and second consecutive cracking effects, the cracking pattern is the same (cracking pattern D), and the manner in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X, Y, and Z axes is the same. However, the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins when the cracking starts may differ, for example, by displaying the crack on the right side in Figure 99(B) while displaying it on the left side in Figure 100(B). This allows for differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first and second consecutive cracking effects.

Furthermore, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks may be displayed in the area corresponding to the cracks displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, in the layer image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301). The display mode of this effect image may indicate whether the first continuous cracking effect or the second continuous cracking effect will be executed. Also, the cracking patterns may differ between the first and second continuous cracking effects. In particular, for the second continuous cracking effect, the amount of display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased, or the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to increase attention to the variable display.

Furthermore, the system may enable the output of character voices corresponding to character image 006SG305 in the first consecutive crack effect and character voices corresponding to character image 006SG305 in the second consecutive crack effect. Both voices may be output along with the crack sound at the same time as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the character voices may be output after the crack sound has finished outputting at the same time as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the crack sound may be restricted.

<Dialogue preview>
The details of the operation example of the dialogue preview effect will be explained based on Figure 101. Figure 101 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the dialogue preview effect.

As shown in Figure 101(A), when the variable display of decorative symbols is being performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the dialogue notification effect is started, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081 (see Figure 101(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation validity period ends without the push button 31B being operated, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301, which is a crack precursor image, is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081. Cracks are then displayed radiating outwards from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with a first level of visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. However, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with a second level of visibility, which is lower than the first level of visibility, thereby making the crack pattern more noticeable (see Figure 101(C)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or in the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, and a cracking effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter in the Layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts (see Figure 101(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transmittance gradually increases, making the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 visible (see Figure 101(E)). When the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see Figure 101(F)).

Subsequently, in the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished, the Layer 3 image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301A displays the text image 006SG306 that suggests the likelihood of a big win, along with the dialogue background image 006SG087 that serves as its background (see Figure 101(F)). Here, the dialogue background image 006SG087 and the text image 006SG306 displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed with first visibility, while the first background image 006SG081 displayed in areas other than the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with second visibility, which has lower visibility than first visibility. In other words, because the visibility differs between the unbroken area and the area visible through the broken area, it becomes easier to recognize that a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. Next, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the dialogue background image 006SG087, and the text image 006SG306 become invisible (see Figure 101(H)).

Furthermore, in Figure 101(C), for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in the area corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, the layer image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display manner of the effect image may indicate which of the following dialogue text images 006SG306 will be displayed: "Chance!?", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!". In addition, the crack pattern may be different depending on the type of dialogue text (e.g., the amount of display of the fragment image 006SG302. In particular, when displaying "Super Hot!", the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to increase attention), or the position of the crack (for example, closer to the center the higher the expectation) or the range of the crack (for example, wider range of crack the higher the expectation) may be changed while using a common crack pattern. Furthermore, the system may enable the output of character voices corresponding to the type of character image 006SG305. These voices may be output simultaneously with a crackling sound at the same time as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or they may be output after the crackling sound has finished being output at the same time as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the crackling sound may be restricted.

<Background change effect A>
The details of the operation example of background change effect A will be explained based on Figures 102 and 103. Figure 102 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of background change effect A. Figure 103 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of background change effect A.

As shown in Figure 102(A), when the game state is in the normal state, if the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, when the background change effect A is started, the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and after it is gradually enlarged (see Figures 102(B) and (C)), the effect image 006SG320 is faded out and the character image 006SG305 is displayed (see Figure 102(D)). Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, if the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and background change effect A is started, effect image 006SG320 will be displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is higher than the sixth background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability-increasing state. After being gradually enlarged, effect image 006SG320 will fade out and character image 006SG305 will be displayed.

Furthermore, the effect image 006SG320 displayed in Figure 102(B) is a visual cue to determine whether or not the character image 006SG305 will be displayed in Figure 102(D). In the case of a successful outcome, the game proceeds to Figure 102(C). In the case of a failed outcome, the game does not proceed to Figure 102(C), the effect image 006SG320 is reduced in size and then disappears, suggesting that the character image 006SG305 will not be displayed.

Next, if the game state is normal, the glass plate image 006SG301, which serves as a crack precursor image, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area above the first background image 006SG081. Then, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the foreground, cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center. As a result, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state (see Figure 102(E)), and then the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a crack state (see Figure 102(F)). Furthermore, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the Layer 3 image drawing area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the Layer 2 image drawing area, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the Layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the crack pattern is more noticeable. Furthermore, if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack premonition image is displayed in the layer 4 image rendering area above the sixth background image. Then, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the foreground, cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center. Thus, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state, and then the cracks gradually spread radially, changing into a crack state. Furthermore, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the Layer 3 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, and the sixth background image displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, thereby making the crack pattern more noticeable.

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or in the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, if the game state is normal, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is shattered, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, are scattered in the Layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins (see Figure 102(G)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time passes, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 (see Figures 102(H) and 103(I)). After the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transparency reaches 100% (see Figure 103(J)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 103(K)). In this way, the cracking effect is executed when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, making the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 appear natural, thus allowing the background change to be presented without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the Layer 5 image rendering area. In addition, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect starts. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transparency of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the seventh background image, which is a chance background image for the time-saving/probability-changing state. When the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, followed by the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the cracking effect is executed when the background image changes from the sixth to the seventh background image, making the change from the sixth to the seventh background image appear natural and seamless.

Furthermore, for example, a third background image (not shown) that is more advantageous when displayed than the second background image 006SG082 can be displayed as a background image, and it may be possible to indicate whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed based on the action of the character image 006SG305 (such as punching or kicking). Also, by making it possible to display characters other than the character image 006SG305, it may be possible to indicate whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed.

<Background change effect B>
The details of the operation example of background change effect B will be explained based on Figure 104. Figure 104 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of background change effect B.

As shown in Figure 104(A), when the variable display of decorative patterns is being performed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and background change effect B is started, the glass plate image 006SG301, as a crack precursor image, is displayed in the layer 4 image rendering area above the first background image 006SG081. A crack display area 006SG324, consisting of cracks including a small crack area, is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 104(B)). Subsequently, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, causing the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 to change in stages (see Figure 104(C)).

Thus, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with a first level of visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed with cracks. However, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with cracks, it is displayed with a second level of visibility, which is less visible than the first level, thereby making the cracks more noticeable.

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in Figure 104(C), the first background image 006SG081, displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed with second visibility in areas other than each crack display area 006SG324, while in each crack display area 006SG324, it is displayed with first visibility, which is more visible than second visibility. In other words, because the visibility differs between the uncracked areas and the areas visible through the cracked areas, it becomes easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the Layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins (see Figure 104(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 (see Figure 104(E)). Then, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transparency reaches 100% (see Figure 104(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 104(G)). In this way, the cracking effect is executed when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, making the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 appear natural and thus allowing the background change to be presented without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks may be displayed in the area corresponding to the cracks displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, in the layer image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image may indicate the expected degree of development of the effect. Specifically, it is preferable that when the display color of the effect image is blue, it is more likely to end at the first stage (see Figure 104(B)), when the display color of the effect image is green, it is more likely to end at the second stage (see Figure 104(C)), and when it is red, it is most likely to develop into a crack effect compared to blue or green. Also, as shown in Figure 121(B), when the failure pattern 1 ends at the first stage, the transparency may gradually increase and become invisible (fade-out display) 1500ms after the start of background change effect B, and as shown in Figure 121(C), when the failure pattern 2 ends at the second stage, the transparency may gradually increase and become invisible 3000ms after the start of background change effect B.

Furthermore, while background change effect B is being executed, the change effects for active and pending images, which are displayed in layer image rendering areas higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, may be restricted, while effects using images displayed in layer image rendering areas lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, mini-character images) may not be restricted. This approach can suppress a decrease in the effectiveness of the cracking effect.

<Simulated Consecutive Performance>
The details of the operation examples of the pseudo-consecutive win animation will be explained based on Figure 105. Figure 105 is a diagram showing the details of some of the operation examples of the pseudo-consecutive win animation.

As shown in Figure 105(A), after the pseudo-consecutive display is started, if the pseudo-consecutive display area 5C, which displays the word "NEXT" indicating that the re-variable display will start, is temporarily stopped at the stop display position, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and cracks are displayed radiating outwards from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the second background image 006SG082 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, in order to make the crack pattern more noticeable (see Figure 105(B)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area, and then it goes out of frame and disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the movable body 32 begins to fall from the origin position to the effect position. In response to this movement, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 105(C)), and then the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads outwards, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect begins (see Figure 105(D)). Furthermore, along with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the layer 5 image rendering area.

Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time passes, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 (see Figure 105(E)). Then, when the transparency reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, an action effect image 006SG321 is displayed in the Layer 6 image rendering area, which is lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area, to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the performance position. The image is displayed expanding from the movable body 32 to its surroundings, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, expanding from the movable body 32 to its surroundings (see Figures 105(F) and (G)).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the movable body 32 begins moving from the performance position towards the origin position while the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figure 105(G)). After all fragment images 006SG302 are no longer visible, it stops at the performance position, and the return operation to the origin position is completed (see Figure 105(H)).

Furthermore, the return movement of the movable body 32 from its performance position to the origin position may be initiated after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 has finished, and subsequently after the display of the background effect image 006SG322 has finished.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the pseudo-consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and the re-variable display begins during the pseudo-consecutive display, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. However, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be varied, for example, by setting the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 to blue during the first variable display, green during the second variable display, and red during the third variable display. Additionally, the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be varied, for example, by gradually increasing the size of the cracks each time the re-variable display is performed.

Furthermore, in this case, while the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the number of re-variable displays, it is preferable that the crack pattern is common. By standardizing the crack pattern in a gaming machine that performs various crack effects in this way, it is possible to accurately indicate that a pseudo-consecutive display has been executed. Also, while the operation pattern of the movable body 32 is common for the first, second, and third re-variable displays, the display manner of the crack pattern may differ, for example, by having different sizes of the fragment images 006SG302, different numbers of fragment images 006SG302 displayed, or different movement speeds of the fragment images 006SG302 for the first, second, and third re-variable displays.

<Reach indication effect>
Details of the operation examples of the reach indication effect will be explained based on Figures 106 and 107. Figure 106 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the reach indication effect. Figure 107 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the reach indication effect.

As shown in Figure 106(A), when the variable display of decorative symbols is being performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a reach suggestion effect is started, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 106(B)), and then the character image 006SG305 is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 106(C)). Next, the glass plate image 006SG301, representing a crack precursor image, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area, which is higher than the second background image 006SG082. As the character image 006SG305 strikes the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a small mallet, a crack appears on the left side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in the first crack pattern. Simultaneously, the action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the Layer 6 image rendering area, which is higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 106(D)).

Next, in response to the character image 006SG305 striking the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a small mallet, a crack appears on the right side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to change to a second crack pattern. Simultaneously, the action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 106(E)).

Furthermore, in response to the character image 006SG305 striking the area corresponding to the central decorative pattern display area 5C with a small mallet (see Figure 106(F)), the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 106(G)). Afterward, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands outward, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period (see Figure 106(H)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 106(D) and (E), when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downward from the cracked area, and then it goes out of frame and disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 106(H), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter across the Layer 5 image rendering area. The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. Subsequently, as time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern, fragment image 006SG302, and the second background image 006SG082 (see Figure 107(I)). Finally, when the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends. The decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R are then enlarged and emphasized (see Figure 107(J)), after which the decorative patterns are reduced in size, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 107(K)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in various effects involving a cracking effect, for example, as shown in the sequence from Figures 107(J) to 107(K), the effect proceeds after the fragment image 006SG302 completely disappears from the display area of the image display device 5 and becomes invisible (for example, progressing from a reach suggestion effect with a cracking effect to a reach effect without a cracking effect).

Furthermore, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed in the corresponding area (for example, in the layer image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301), and the expected degree of reach development may be indicated by the display mode of the effect image. Specifically, if there are blue and red display modes for the effect image, it would be desirable that the display in red be more likely to result in a reach than the display in blue.

In the case of a failure pattern, after the character image 006SG305 strikes the area corresponding to the central decorative pattern display area 5C with a small mallet, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed (see Figures 106(G) and (H)). Then, the character image 006SG305 in a disappointed state is displayed in the area corresponding to the central decorative pattern display area 5C. After that, the character image 006SG305 and the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 become invisible, the losing pattern stops, and the variable display ends.

<Weak development performance>
The details of the operation example of the weak development effect will be explained based on Figure 108. Figure 108 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the weak development effect.

As shown in Figure 108(A), regardless of whether the game state is normal, time-saving, or probability-changing, when the variable display of decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R reaches a reach pattern, a weak development effect is initiated. The background effect image 006SG322 is displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, and then the character image 006SG305 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 6 image rendering area above it (see Figure 108(B)). After the punching character image 006SG305 is displayed, it is shown in slow motion, enlarging as if moving towards the front of the display screen (see Figure 108(C)). The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are moved to the upper right position of the display screen and displayed in a reduced size.

Next, if the game state is normal, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the normal reach background image. Then, without the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked manner, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is shattered, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, are scattered in the Layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins (see Figure 108(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transparency of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 improves (see Figure 108(E)). After the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100% (see Figure 51(F)), and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again (see Figure 108(G)). Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the image 006SG088 for the weak S reach effect is displayed, and the game transitions to the weak S reach effect (see Figure 108(H)). Furthermore, if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked manner, but rather the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is shattered, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, are scattered in the Layer 5 image rendering area. In addition, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect has started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image with a transparency of 0% (opaque) displayed in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time passes, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305. When the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the image 006SG088 for the weak S reach effect is displayed, and the game transitions to the weak S reach effect. Furthermore, in Figures 117 and 130 described later, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development sequence is shown as opaque. However, this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302. In the weak development sequence, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a transparent mode (e.g., with a transparency of 70% or more) in Figures 136 (B1) to (B3), and then in an opaque mode (e.g., with a transparency of less than 10%) in Figures 136 (B4) and (B5). That is, at the first timing corresponding to Figure 136 (B3), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a transparent mode, and at the second timing corresponding to Figure 136 (B4), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in an opaque mode.

In this way, when the N-reach animation progresses to the weak S-reach animation, the cracking animation is executed, allowing the change from the N-reach animation image to the weak S-reach animation image 006SG088 to be shown naturally, thus making the change in animation appear seamless.

<Strong Development Scene A>
The details of the operation example of the strong development effect A will be explained based on Figure 109. Figure 109 is a diagram showing the details of some of the operation examples of the strong development effect A.

As shown in Figure 109(A), in the weak S-reach animation, the development symbol displaying the word "development" is temporarily stopped, and when the strong development animation A begins, the movable body 32 starts falling from its origin position to the animation position. At the same time that this falling motion begins, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image rendering area, and the movable body 32 continues to fall (see Figure 109(B)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack animation begins.

Furthermore, as a preliminary effect before the cracking animation, the movable body 32 moves from its origin position to the animation position. When the movable body 32 moves to the animation position, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the weak S-reach animation image 006SG088. The glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked state; instead, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A cracks, and a cracking animation is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the layer 5 image rendering area (see Figure 109(C)).

Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. Here, the transparency remains 0% until the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, making it difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 109(C)). Then, as time passes, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 109(D)). Next, when the transparency reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, an action effect image 006SG325 is displayed in the Layer 6 image rendering area, which is lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area, to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the performance position. The image expands from the movable body 32 outwards, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, expanding from the movable body 32 outwards (see Figure 109(E)).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends and the fragment image 006SG302 disappears, the movable body 32 begins to move from the performance position back to the origin position (see Figure 109(F)). Then, after the return to the origin position is completed, the reach title image 006SG326 is displayed, and the strong S reach performance begins (see Figure 109(G)).

<Strong Development Scene B>
The details of the operation example of the strong development effect B will be explained based on Figures 110 and 111. Figure 110 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the strong development effect B. Figure 111 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the strong development effect B.

As shown in Figure 110(A), when a strong development sequence B is initiated after a predetermined period has elapsed since the weak S-reach sequence began, the glass plate image 006SG301, serving as a premonition of cracking, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area, which is higher than the weak S-reach sequence image 006SG088. Cracks are then displayed radiating outwards from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thus displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked pattern (see Figure 110(B)). Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the weak S-reach sequence image 006SG088 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while they are displayed with a second visibility level, which is lower than first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thus making the cracked pattern more prominent.

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area, and then it goes out of frame and disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 110(C)). Then, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands outwards, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period (see Figure 110(D)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 110(D), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter across the Layer 5 image rendering area. The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 110(E)). Next, when the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends. After the decorative pattern displaying the word "Development" in the central decorative pattern display area 5C is temporarily stopped, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 110(F)).

Next, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 110(H)). Then, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands outwards, and for a predetermined period, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, obscuring the development symbols (see Figure 111(I)). As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the reach title image 006SG326 corresponding to the strong S reach effect (see Figures 111(J) and (K)).

In this way, when the weak S-reach animation progresses to the strong S-reach animation, the cracking animation is executed. This makes it appear as if the image 006SG088 used for the weak S-reach animation cracks and changes into the reach title image 006SG326, thus allowing the change in the reach animation to be presented without any sense of incongruity.

<Cut-in animation>
The details of the cut-in animation's operation will be explained based on Figure 112. Figure 112 is a diagram showing the details of the cut-in animation's operation.

As shown in Figure 112(A), when a cut-in animation starts after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the strong S-reach animation, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image rendering area above the fourth background image 006SG084 used for the strong S-reach animation (see Figure 112(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated (or when the operation validity period ends without the push button 31B being operated), the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 4 image rendering area above the fourth background image 006SG084. Without displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in a cracked state, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A shatters, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in a manner that the button has been pressed by the operation, and the operation effect image 006SG327 is displayed around it, expanding over time (see Figures 112(C) and (D)).

Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 112(C)). Note that the operation prompt image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 are displayed in the Layer 8 image rendering area, which is higher than the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, they maintain the same first visibility as when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed.

Then, as time passes, the transmittance gradually increases, making the fragment image 006SG302 visible (see Figure 112(D)). Furthermore, the operation prompt image 006SG310 and operation effect image 006SG327 become invisible, while the text image 006SG307, "Hot!!", becomes visible (see Figure 112(E)). After the whiteout image 006SG303 is no longer displayed due to 100% transmittance (see Figure 112(F)), the fragment image 006SG302 becomes invisible (see Figure 112(G)).

In this embodiment, both cut-in animation patterns X and Y are described as animation patterns accompanied by a cracking animation. However, it is also possible to designate animation pattern Y, which has a high probability of winning, as a chance animation pattern accompanied by a cracking animation, and animation pattern X, which has a low probability of winning, as an animation pattern without a cracking animation. In such a case, for animation patterns without a cracking animation, the animation may be performed in a manner in which a strip-shaped cut-in image (not shown) is displayed on the fourth background image 006SG084.

<Result notification sequence (jackpot)>
Details of the operation example of the result notification effect (jackpot) will be explained based on Figures 113 and 114. Figure 113 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot. Figure 114 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 113(A), after a predetermined period has elapsed since the cut-in animation ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an allied character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification animation begins. Then, the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases in speed, fading out in slow motion, and a whiteout image with 0% transparency (opaque) is displayed across the entire screen (see Figure 113(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an object image 006SG308 showing an attack by an ally character hitting an enemy character is displayed (see Figure 113(C)). Then, the movable body 32 begins to fall from its origin position to a predetermined display position. In response to this falling motion, a glass plate image 006SG301, which serves as a cracking premonition image, is displayed in the layer 4 image rendering area above the object image 006SG308. Cracks are then displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301, spreading downwards from the movable body 32, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state. Furthermore, the object image 006SG308, which is displayed in the Layer 3 image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the crack pattern is more prominent (see Figure 113(D)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area, and then disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins near the lower position of the movable body 32 in the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 113(E)). As the movable body 32 begins its return-to-origin operation, rising from a predetermined performance position to the origin position, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands downwards, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period (see Figure 113(F)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 113(F), at the moment when the movable body 32 starts its return to its home position and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter across the layer 5 image rendering area. The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 113(G)).

Next, as the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and after the fifth background image 006SG085 and the confirmed winning combination symbols are displayed (see Figure 113(H)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, and the system is notified that it is controlled to a winning game state (see Figure 114(I)). The background image then returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the confirmed winning combination symbols are displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 114(J)).

Furthermore, after the cracking effect begins in response to the upward movement of the movable body 32 to return to its origin, the upward movement of the movable body 32 returning from its predetermined effect position to its origin position is completed before the display of the fragment image 006SG302, which has become visible due to the increased transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303, ends (becomes invisible). This allows for early notification of a jackpot.

<Result notification animation (miss)>
The details of the operation example for the result notification animation (miss) will be explained based on Figure 115. Figure 115 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example for the result notification animation when the variable display result is a miss.

As shown in Figure 115(A), after a predetermined period has elapsed since the cut-in animation ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an allied character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification animation begins. Then, the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases in speed, fading out in slow motion, and a whiteout image with 0% transparency (opaque) is displayed across the entire screen (see Figure 115(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is incorrect, the movable body 32 does not move, and a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen in the layer 7 image drawing area for a predetermined period of time (see Figure 115(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301 and character image 006SG305 displayed in layers below the layer 7 image drawing area.

Subsequently, the glass plate image 006SG301, representing a crack precursor image, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area, which is above the character image 006SG305. Cracks are displayed radiating outwards from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thus displaying the crack pattern. The character image 006SG305, displayed in the Layer 3 image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301, and the gray background image 006SG313, displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with a first level of visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. However, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with a second level of visibility, which is less visible than the first level, making the crack pattern more prominent (see Figure 115(D)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area, and then disappears from the frame and is not displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Thus, although the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked pattern, the cracked pattern remained, and the glass plate image 006SG301 did not shatter. Therefore, it is indicated that the game was not controlled to a jackpot state.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked pattern, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again across the entire layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 115(E)). Then, the eye-catching image 006SG309 is displayed (see Figure 115(F)), and the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, with the confirmed decorative symbols for non-winning combinations being displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 115(G)).

(Details of the production)
Next, a detailed explanation will be given of each effect that can be performed in this embodiment. As shown in Figures 116, 118, 99, and 100, the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect are as follows: First, the first stage of cracks is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 500 ms (first stage crack display period). Next, when it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which has been displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 400ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Then, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 400ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in the first and second consecutive breaking effects of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 400ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 600ms period including the later whiteout display period after the earlier whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's crack, a second stage of cracks is displayed for 3000 ms around the cracked area (the area targeted for the cracking effect) of the glass plate image 006SG301A (second stage crack display period). The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first and second consecutive cracking effects are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the first and second consecutive crack effects, crack sounds corresponding to the crack display are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the crack display period described above. From the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A for 1000 ms, crack effect sounds corresponding to the crack effect are output from speakers 8L and 8R (crack sound output period). Although the types of crack sounds and crack effect sounds output are the same for the first and second consecutive crack effects, in the first consecutive crack effect, a first character voice corresponding to the character in Figure 99(E) is output along with the crack effect sound, and in the second consecutive crack effect, a second character voice corresponding to the character in Figure 100(E) is output along with the crack effect sound. This makes it easy to distinguish between the first and second consecutive crack effects. Furthermore, while the cracking sound effect is louder and more easily perceived by players than the cracking sound effect, the first and second character voices are output at an even louder volume and for a longer duration than the cracking sound effect, making them even more easily perceived by players than the cracking sound effect.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, and illumination that is not primarily white illumination in accordance with the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is performed. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period of 800ms, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 800ms) is used, and illumination that is primarily white illumination in accordance with the breaking effect is performed. After the illumination in accordance with the breaking effect ends, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used again, and illumination in accordance with the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is performed. Furthermore, the data table for the crack effect (whiteout 800ms) is designed to cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 400ms, corresponding to the initial period of the whiteout display, and to emit white light alternately at high and low brightness for 400ms, corresponding to the later period of the whiteout display.

As shown in Figures 116, 119, and 101, the dialogue notification effect first involves an operation prompting effect where an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms (operation prompting effect execution period). If the player operates the push button 31B during the execution of the operation prompting effect, or if the execution period of the operation prompting effect ends, the first stage of cracks is displayed for 500 ms from that timing (first stage crack display period). Next, when it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 400ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Following this, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 400ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the dialogue予告演出 (preview/announcement) of this embodiment, during the 400ms early whiteout display period from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 600ms period including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, from the timing of the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301A, a second stage of cracks is displayed for 5000ms around the cracked area (the area targeted by the crack effect) of the glass plate image 006SG301A. The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), for the 500ms period of the first stage of crack display described above, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack (cracking sound output period). Then, for 1000ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking sound corresponding to the cracking effect (cracking sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sounds and cracking sound outputs are the same for the dialogue予告演出, the first consecutive cracking effect, and the second consecutive cracking effect. In the dialogue予告演出, after the cracking sound is output (after the cracking sound output period has elapsed), a dialogue voice sound corresponding to the type of text image 006SG306 is output. This prevents the dialogue voice sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the cracking sound.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaking, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period (800ms), the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 800ms) is used, resulting in illumination that is primarily white, corresponding to the breaking effect. After the illumination corresponding to the breaking effect ends, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used again, resulting in illumination that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081).

As shown in Figures 116, 120(A), 120(B), 102, and 103, the background change effect A for the successful pattern first involves a preliminary operation where a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed for 2000 ms (preliminary operation period). From the end of the preliminary operation (character action), cracks are displayed for 2000 ms (crack display period).

Furthermore, the 2000ms crack display period, as shown in Figure 120(B), consists of a 1000ms pre-crack display period and a 1000ms post-crack display period following the pre-crack display period. During the pre-crack display period, from the start of the pre-crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed for 100ms. Additionally, a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200ms.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that was displayed up to that point is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see Figure 103). Furthermore, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the background change effect A of this embodiment, during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 2000 ms period including the later whiteout display period after the initial whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change animation A during the successful pattern are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the background change effect A of the successful pattern, from the start timing of the pre-crack display period described above, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack (cracking sound output period), and character voices corresponding to the character's actions are output. From the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect (cracking effect sound output period). Furthermore, the cracking sound in background change effect A is a sound exclusive to background change effect A, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect that notifies that the background image has switched to the chance background image. During the 2500ms output period, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and the sound effect that notifies that the background image has switched to the chance background image are output for 1000ms, and then the sound effect that notifies that the background image has switched to the chance background image continues to be output for 1500ms. In addition, although the output period for the cracking sound is set to 500ms, it may be set to 2000ms, which corresponds to the crack display period, and sounds corresponding to the progression of the crack may be output for 2000ms. In addition, an action effect sound is output for 100ms, which corresponds to the action effect display period, overlapping with the cracking sound. The operation effect sound is output at a louder volume than the cracking sound. While the cracking sound is difficult to hear when the operation effect sound is output, its output duration is shorter, making the cracking sound audible again after the operation effect sound has finished.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the crack display period, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). From the start of the crack display period until the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A (2000ms), the illumination data table for the crack display period, which primarily causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light, is used, resulting in illumination that corresponds to the display of cracks. Furthermore, from the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A until the end of the late whiteout display period (1000ms), the illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used, resulting in illumination that primarily emits white light, corresponding to the crack effect. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the crack effect has ended, illumination other than white illumination in a manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is performed by using the illumination data table for the chance background image. Furthermore, the illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) is a data table for causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 500ms corresponding to the initial period of the whiteout display, and for causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light alternately at high brightness and low brightness for 500ms corresponding to the later period of the whiteout display. Furthermore, although an example of using the illumination data table for the normal background image in the preceding operation period has been described, the game effect lamp 9 may also be illuminated using the preceding operation illumination data table which mainly emits green light corresponding to the character in Figure 102(D) throughout the preceding operation period. In this case, until the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 will mainly emit green light corresponding to the character in Figure 102(D). After the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 will mainly emit white light corresponding to the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A. This creates a contrast between before the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed and when they are displayed, thereby enhancing the effect of the background change effect A. Furthermore, while both the data table for the crack display period and the data table for the crack effect (1000ms whiteout) are data tables that primarily use white light emission, the white light emission based on the data table for the crack effect (1000ms whiteout) includes a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the data table for the crack display period does not include a flashing pattern.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 120(C), in the failure pattern, background change effect A does not display the character in the display area of the image display device 5 as a preceding operation. In other words, in the background change effect A of this failure pattern, since the character is not displayed, the cracking effect is not executed, and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed. In this case, as shown in Figures 102(B) and (C), although a tease effect is performed to indicate whether or not the character will be displayed, neither the character nor the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so the normal background image light emission data table is used as the light emission data table.

As shown in Figures 116, 121(A), and 104, the background change effect B for the successful pattern first displays the first stage of cracks in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms (first stage crack display period). During the first stage crack display period, from the start of the first stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms.

Furthermore, from the moment 1500 ms has elapsed in the first stage crack display period, the second stage crack is displayed over a wider area of the display area of the image display device 5 than in the first stage crack display period for 1500 ms (second stage crack display period). Even in the second stage crack display period, from the start of the second stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment image 006SG302A during the first stage of crack display and the small fragment image 006SG302A during the second stage of crack display have different values for the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters shown in Figure 130. Therefore, the scattering speed, size, and number of individual fragments are designed to differ. However, the "gravity" parameter value is the same, resulting in both images being displayed downwards and out of frame.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that was displayed up to that point is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see Figure 104). Furthermore, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1250 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the background change effect A of this embodiment, during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 750 ms period including the later whiteout display period after the initial whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 during the period when the fragment image 006SG302 is visible.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect B during the successful pattern are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the background change effect B of the successful pattern, from the start of the first stage crack display period for 500 ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a first-stage cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack (first-stage cracking sound output period), from the start of the second stage crack display period for 500 ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a second-stage cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack (second-stage cracking sound output period), and from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A for 150 ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect (cracking effect sound output period). Furthermore, the cracking sound in background change effect B is a sound specifically for background change effect B. It consists of a sound effect indicating the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracking, and a sound effect indicating that the background image has switched to the chance background image. During the 1250ms output period, the sound effect indicating the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracking, along with the sound effect indicating that the background image has switched to the chance background image, is output for 1000ms. Subsequently, the sound effect indicating that the background image has switched to the chance background image continues to be output for 250ms. Regarding the volume of the cracking sounds in background change effect B, the cracking sound is the loudest. The volume of the first-stage cracking sound and the second-stage cracking sound may be the same, or the second-stage cracking sound may be louder than the first-stage cracking sound.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage until the end of the late whiteout display period (1000ms), the illumination data table for the breakage effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used, resulting in illumination that is primarily white, corresponding to the breakage effect. After the illumination corresponding to the breakage effect ends, the illumination data table for the chance background image is used, resulting in illumination that corresponds to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 121(B) and 121(C), in failure pattern 1, background change effect B displays the first stage of cracks for 1500ms and small fragment images corresponding to the first stage of cracks for 200ms, but the second stage of cracks is not displayed, and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In failure pattern 2, background change effect B displays the first stage of cracks for 3000ms and small fragment images for 200ms, and from the time 1500ms has elapsed during the first stage of crack display period, the second stage of cracks is displayed for 1500ms and small fragment images corresponding to the second stage of cracks for 200ms, but the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In these failure patterns, the background change effect B does not break, so the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed.

As shown in Figures 116, 122, and 105, in the pseudo-consecutive effect, the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is first temporarily stopped in the display area in the order of "left," "right," and "center." Then, from the stopping timing of the pseudo-consecutive pattern, which is the "center" decorative pattern, cracks are displayed for 1500 ms (crack display period). During this crack display period, as a preliminary operation, the movable body 32 is dropped for 1500 ms (movable body drop period). When the drop operation of the movable body 32 is completed (after 1500 ms has elapsed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack. Note that the cracks in the crack display period of the pseudo-consecutive effect and the cracks in the crack display period of the background change effect A are designed to have different crack patterns. For example, in background change effect A, the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in a manner where the cracks progress gradually over the pre-crack display period and the post-crack display period. However, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the cracks are displayed in a manner where the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks all at once.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000ms from the time of the glass plate image 006SG301A's break (fragment image display period). Also, from the time of the glass plate image 006SG301A's break, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the pseudo-consecutive display of this embodiment, during the initial 500ms whiteout display period from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 500ms later whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player. Furthermore, the background effect image 006SG322 is displayed along with the fragment image 006SG302 for 3000ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the pseudo-consecutive win animation are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, for 3000ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the breaking effect (breaking effect sound output period). The breaking effect sound in the pseudo-consecutive spins effect is a sound specifically for the pseudo-consecutive spins effect, and consists of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and a sound effect of the motion effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32. During the 3000ms output period, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, along with the sound effect of the motion effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32, is output for 1000ms, and then the sound effect of the motion effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32 continues to be output for 2000ms. After the breaking effect sound output period ends, BGM corresponding to the normal background image or the chance background image is output, resulting in a variety of sounds being output during the rising period of the movable body 32. Furthermore, from the end of the whiteout display period, i.e., the end of the display of the fragment image 006G302, the movable body 32 rises to its initial position over a period of 3000 ms (movable body rising period).

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start timing of the crack display, the illumination data table for the normal background image or the illumination data table for the chance background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), with the illumination not primarily being white. From the start timing of the crack display to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, for 2000ms, the illumination data table for the crack display is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the crack display, with the illumination primarily being white. Then, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end timing of the late whiteout display period, for 1000ms, the illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, with the illumination primarily being white. After the illumination corresponding to the crack effect has finished, for 2000ms, illumination is performed in a manner corresponding to the number of times the pseudo-consecutive effect has been performed, by using a pseudo-consecutive effect illumination data table corresponding to the number of times the pseudo-consecutive effect has been performed. For example, when the first pseudo-consecutive effect is performed, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in green in accordance with the first pseudo-consecutive effect, and when the second pseudo-consecutive effect is performed, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in red in accordance with the second pseudo-consecutive effect. After the illumination corresponding to the number of times the pseudo-consecutive effect has finished, illumination is performed again in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) by using the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table again. Furthermore, while both the data table for the crack display period and the data table for the crack effect (1000ms whiteout) are data tables that primarily use white light emission, the white light emission based on the data table for the crack effect (1000ms whiteout) includes a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the data table for the crack display period does not include a flashing pattern.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect in this embodiment illustrate different crack display periods. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the crack display period may be the same for both the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in Figures 116, 123(A), 106, and 107, the successful pattern's reach indication performance first involves a preliminary operation in which a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and images of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L of the glass plate image 006SG301, the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C of the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed sequentially over 10,000 ms (preliminary operation period). During the preceding operation period, from the moment the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, a crack is displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 8000 ms (left crack display period). Furthermore, from the moment the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, a crack is displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 4000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100ms, and a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200ms. From the start of the right crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100ms, and a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200ms. Furthermore, the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the decorative pattern display area 5L on the "left" and the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the decorative pattern display area 5R on the "right" have different values for the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters shown in Figure 130. Therefore, the scattering speed, size, and number of individual fragment images are designed to differ. However, the value for the "gravity" parameter is the same, so they are both displayed in a downward, frame-out direction.

When the preceding operation period ends because the character has acted on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. At the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that was displayed up to that point is updated to the normal reach background image corresponding to the reach animation of a normal reach. Furthermore, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2000ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Then, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 500ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in the successful pattern reach suggestion演出 of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 1500ms period including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

Furthermore, from the end of the later whiteout period, a 3000ms period of enhanced decorative symbols is implemented to notify the player that a winning combination has been achieved, for example, by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols (decorative symbol enhancement period).

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the reach indication sequence in successful patterns are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the reach indication演出 for the successful pattern, from the start of the left crack display period described above for 500ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack (left crack sound output period), and a first character voice corresponding to the character's first action is output. From the start of the right crack display period described above for 500ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack (right crack sound output period), and a second character voice corresponding to the character's second action is output. From the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A for 2000ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a crack sound corresponding to the crack effect (crack effect sound output period). Furthermore, the sound effect for the breakage effect in the reach indication演出 (success pattern) is a sound specifically for the reach indication演出. It consists of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and a sound effect of highlighting the decorative symbols to inform the player that a reach has occurred, such as by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols. During the 3000ms output period, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, along with the highlighting sound effect, is output for 1000ms, and then the highlighting sound effect continues to be output for the following 2000ms. After the output period of the breakage effect sound ends, the BGM corresponding to the normal reach background image is output. Additionally, when an action effect corresponding to a character's action is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output. This sound effect is used both when the action effect is displayed around the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, the illumination is not primarily white, but rather a mode of illumination corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), using either the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage until the end of the late whiteout display period (1000ms), the illumination is primarily white, corresponding to the breakage effect, using the breakage effect illumination data table. After the illumination corresponding to the breakage effect ends, the illumination is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image, using the normal reach background image illumination data table.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 123(B), in the failure pattern, the reach suggestion animation is preceded by the following operation: a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and images of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C are displayed sequentially over 14,000 ms (preliminary operation period). During the preliminary operation period, from the moment the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 12,000 ms (left crack display period). Then, from the moment the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 8,000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100ms, and a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200ms. From the start of the right crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100ms, and a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200ms. Furthermore, since the small fragment image 006SG302 in the failure pattern is displayed based on the same parameter values as the small fragment image 006SG302 in the success pattern, the player cannot determine whether it is a success or failure pattern by looking at the speed at which the small fragments scatter or the size and number of each individual fragment. Therefore, it effectively entices the player about whether or not a normal reach will be executed.

Furthermore, in the reach indication演出 for the failure pattern, a left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start of the left crack display period described above (left crack sound output period), and a right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start of the right crack display period described above (right crack sound output period). Moreover, from the same timing as the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the reach indication演出 for the success pattern (10000 elapsed from the start of the reach indication演出 for the failure pattern), a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1000ms (whiteout display period). The whiteout display period is a period during which the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 makes other images displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible to the player. Furthermore, when action effects corresponding to character actions are displayed, sound effects corresponding to those effects are output. These sound effects are used both when the action effects are displayed around the left decorative pattern display area 5L and when they are displayed around the right decorative pattern display area 5R.

Furthermore, in the reach suggestion演出 for the failure pattern, until the start of the whiteout display period, illumination is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) using the illumination data table for the normal background image or chance background image. Then, during the whiteout display period, illumination mainly consisting of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 using the illumination data table for whiteout. From the end of the whiteout display period, illumination mainly consisting of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the notification that a reach will not occur (that the reach suggestion演出 is a failure pattern) using the illumination data table for failure notification. Furthermore, the illumination in a manner corresponding to the notification that a reach will not occur (that the reach suggestion演出 is a failure pattern) ends when the variable display stops. Furthermore, while the light data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms), the whiteout light data table, and the failure notification light data table all primarily use white light emission, the white light emission based on the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) light data table includes a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the whiteout light data table and the failure notification light data table does not include a flashing pattern. Also, while the game effect lamp 9 is illuminating based on the failure notification light data table (until the variable display stops due to the cessation of the variable display), no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figures 117, 124, and 108, the weak development sequence begins with a preliminary operation where a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the center of the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed for 4000ms (preliminary operation period). While the preliminary operation period is set to 4000ms, a separate pattern with a preliminary operation period of 2000ms may be provided. When suggesting a high probability of a big win to the player, the weak development sequence may be executed more frequently using the 2000ms pattern than the 4000ms pattern.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal reach background image corresponding to the normal reach reach animation that was displayed up to that point is updated to the weak development animation background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the weak development animation. At the same time, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3500ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the weak development sequence of this embodiment, during the 500ms whiteout display period from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 3000ms period including the later whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the background image corresponding to the weak development sequence that was displayed up to that point is updated to the Super Reach α background image corresponding to the Super Reach α reach sequence.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the weak development sequence are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. While it is stated that the fragment images 006SG302 in the weak development sequence are not transparent, this is the final display mode of the fragment images 006SG302. During the 3500ms fragment image display period, the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in a transparent mode (e.g., with a transparency of 70% or more) for the first 1500ms after the display begins. Then, over 1000ms, they gradually change to an opaque mode (e.g., with a transparency of 70% to 10%), and finally, over 1000ms, they are displayed in an opaque mode (e.g., with a transparency of less than 10%).

Furthermore, during the weak development sequence, a cracking sound corresponding to the cracking sequence is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1000ms starting from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (cracking sound output period). In addition, along with the cracking sound, a weak development sequence sound is also output for 3500ms starting from the cracking timing. Note that the cracking sound is louder than the weak development sequence sound, making it more easily recognizable by the player.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the preceding operation, the illumination data table for the normal reach background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image. From the start of the preceding operation until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, for 4000ms, the illumination data table for the weak development effect is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the weak development effect. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period, for 1000ms, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used, resulting in illumination that is primarily white, corresponding to the breaking effect. From the end of the late whiteout display period until the end of the fragment image display period, for 2500ms, the illumination table for the weak development effect is used again, resulting in illumination that is corresponding to the weak development effect. Furthermore, after the illumination corresponding to the crack effect has finished, the illumination that does not primarily consist of white light will be performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088) by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image.

In this embodiment, the weak development sequence is illustrated by an example in which the background image is updated from the weak development sequence background image to the super reach α background image at the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the background image is updated from the weak development sequence background image to the super reach α background image, the image display device 5 may display a whiteout image 006SG303 to make the update from the weak development sequence background image to the super reach α background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. Furthermore, when the image display device 5 displays a whiteout image 006SG303 when the background image is updated from the weak development sequence background image to the super reach α background image, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout light emission data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed before the end of the fragment image display period (for example, 500ms before the end). In this case, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 will begin before the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed out of frame.

As shown in Figures 117, 125, and 109, in the strong development sequence A, first, as a preliminary operation, the movable body 32 is lowered for 1000 ms (movable body lowering period). Upon completion of the movable body 32's lowering operation (after 1000 ms has elapsed), the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break occurs.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach animation image 006SG088) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach animation that was displayed up to that point is updated to the Strong Development Animation A background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the Strong Development Animation A, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500ms (fragment image display period).

Furthermore, from the moment the movable body 32 falls, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Following this, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the strong development effect A of this embodiment, during the 1500ms early whiteout display period from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 500ms late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development sequence A are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the background image for the strong development sequence A that was displayed up to that point is updated to the background image for the super reach β sequence that corresponds to the reach sequence of the super reach β sequence. The movable body 32 that fell in the preceding operation is positioned at the fall location during the fragment image display period described above, and rises to its initial position over a period of 1500ms from the end of the fragment image display period (movable body rise period). From the start of the rise of the movable body 32 (start of the movable body rise period), the speakers 8L and 8R output sound corresponding to the strong development sequence A (strong development sequence A sound). In addition, unlike the weak development sequence, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is not output in the strong development sequence A, so you can enjoy the unique breaking effect of the strong development sequence A. Furthermore, in the strong development sequence A, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting a higher priority for the sound effect of the strong development sequence A.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the movable body 32's fall, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088), with illumination not primarily consisting of white light. From the timing of the start of the movable body 32's fall until the end of the fragment image display period, the illumination data table for the Strong Development Effect A is used for 2500ms, with illumination not primarily consisting of white light, corresponding to the Strong Development Effect A. From the timing of the start of the movable body 32's rise (the end of the fragment image display period), the illumination data table for the Super Reach β background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), with illumination not primarily consisting of white light.

Furthermore, in the powerful development sequence A of this embodiment, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is exemplified as a whiteout display pre-show period of 1500 ms from the timing of the movable body 32's fall. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout display pre-show period of the powerful development sequence A may be a period of 500 ms or 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, during which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed.

As shown in Figures 117, 126, 110, and 111, in the strong development effect B, cracks are first displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 1500 ms without any movement of the movable body 32 or character interaction (crack display period). From the start of this crack display period, small fragment images 006SG302A, which are smaller in size than the fragment images 006SG302 displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, are displayed for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment images 006SG302A in strong development effect B and the small fragment images 006SG302A in reach suggestion effects etc. have different "intensity" and "repetition" parameter values as shown in Figure 130, so the scattering speed, size, and number of individual small fragment images are designed to differ.

After 1500ms has elapsed and the crack display period has ended, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088) that was previously displayed, corresponding to the Super Reach α reach effect, is updated to the Strong Development Effect B corresponding to the Strong Development Effect B. Furthermore, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3000ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Following this, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the strong development effect B of this embodiment, during the 500ms early whiteout display period from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 2500ms period including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development sequence B are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Also, the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development sequence B begin to be displayed at normal movement speed, normal rotation speed, and normal falling speed, and then are displayed in slow motion.

Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the background image for the strong development sequence B (background effect image 006SG322), which had been displayed up to that point, is updated to the background image for the super reach β (fourth background image 006SG084), which corresponds to the reach sequence of the super reach β. In addition, in the strong development sequence B, from the start of the crack display period described above, cracking sounds corresponding to the display of the cracks are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1500ms (cracking sound output period), and from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the fragment image display period, sounds corresponding to the strong development sequence B (strong development sequence B sound) are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 3000ms. Note that in the strong development sequence B, unlike the weak development sequence, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is not output, so you can enjoy the cracking effect unique to the strong development sequence B. Furthermore, in the strong development sequence B, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting a higher priority for the sound effect of the strong development sequence B sequence.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the crack display timing, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S Reach effect image 006SG088). From the start of the crack display timing to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, for 1500ms, the illumination data table for the Strong Development Effect B is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the Strong Development Effect B. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, for 1000ms, until the end of the late whiteout display period, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used, resulting in illumination that is primarily white, corresponding to the breaking effect. From the end of the late whiteout display period to the end of the fragment image display period, for 2000ms, the illumination data table for the Strong Development Effect B is used, resulting in illumination that is corresponding to the Strong Development Effect B. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the strong development effect B has finished, illumination other than primarily white illumination will be performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach B background image.

In this embodiment, the strong development sequence B is illustrated by an example in which the background image is updated from the strong development sequence B background image to the super reach β background image at the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the background image is updated from the strong development sequence B background image to the super reach β background image, the image display device 5 may display a whiteout image 006SG303 to make the update from the strong development sequence B background image to the super reach β background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. Furthermore, when the image display device 5 displays a whiteout image 006SG303 when the background image is updated from the strong development sequence B background image to the super reach β background image, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout light emission data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. In this case, both the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) and the light emission data table for the whiteout are light emission data tables that primarily execute white light emission. However, the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) is executed with a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the whiteout is executed without a flashing pattern. Furthermore, although the crack display period for the strong development effect B is set to 1500ms, the crack may be displayed for a longer period than 1500ms until the crack timing. For example, the crack may be displayed so that it gradually expands at the first, second, and third timings between the start timing of Super Reach α and the crack timing.

As shown in Figures 117, 127, and 112, the cut-in animation first features an operation prompt animation. This animation displays an operation prompt image in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms, prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (operation prompt animation execution period). In particular, during the execution period of this embodiment, the operation prompt image is displayed as a pre-operation image, showing the push button 31B in its protruding state before being operated by the player (pre-operation image display period).

If the player operates the push button 31B during the execution of the action prompting animation, or if the execution period of the action prompting animation ends, this timing is considered the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, and the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the cut-in animation (for 5000ms from the breaking timing), suggestive images according to the animation pattern are displayed, and after a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the cut-in animation of this embodiment, during the 500ms whiteout display period starting from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image due to the whiteout image 006SG303 obstructing their view. On the other hand, during the 2000ms period including the later whiteout display period after the initial whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible, allowing the player to see both the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image. Furthermore, the background effect image 006SG322 is displayed along with the fragment image 006SG302 for 5000ms starting from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the cut-in animation are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Additionally, the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in animation begin to be displayed at normal movement speed, normal rotation speed, and normal falling speed, and then are displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a post-operation image is displayed for 1000ms, showing the state after the push button 31B has been operated by the player (post-operation image display period). Since the post-operation image is displayed with priority over the whiteout image 006SG303, the player can view this post-operation image for 1000ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

Furthermore, during the cut-in animation, for 3000ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, speakers 8L and 8R output a cut-in animation sound corresponding to the cut-in animation (cut-in animation sound output period). Unlike weak development animations, the cut-in animation does not output a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, allowing players to enjoy the unique breaking effect of the cut-in animation. Alternatively, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output during the cut-in animation. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting a higher priority for the cut-in animation sound.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the illumination data table for the Super Reach β background image is used to perform illumination that is not primarily white, in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period, for 1000ms, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used to perform illumination that is primarily white, in a manner corresponding to the breaking effect. From the end of the late whiteout display period until the end of the suggestive image display period, the illumination data table for the cut-in effect is used to perform illumination that is not primarily white, in a manner corresponding to the cut-in effect. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the cut-in animation has finished, the illumination data table for the Super Reach β background image is used again to perform illumination that is not primarily white, in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084).

As shown in Figures 117, 128(A), 113, and 114, the result notification display for the successful pattern first involves a preliminary operation in which the movable body 32 is dropped for 500 ms (movable fall resistance period). Once the drop operation of the movable body 32 is completed (after 500 ms), cracks are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 500 ms (crack display period). During this crack display period, from the start timing of the crack display period, an operation effect corresponding to the drop of the movable body 32 is displayed for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification sequence (success pattern/failure pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach indication sequence, etc., have different values for the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters shown in Figure 130. Therefore, they are designed to have different scattering speeds, sizes, and numbers of individual fragments. Similarly, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification sequence (success pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification sequence (failure pattern) also have different values for the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters. Therefore, they are designed to have different scattering speeds, sizes, and numbers of individual fragments.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach animation image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach animation that had been displayed up to that point is updated to a jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085) indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500ms (fragment image display period). Although not specifically shown in Figure 128(A), the jackpot notification background image is displayed for 10,000 ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. After 10,000 ms (before the variable display stops), it is updated to the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Subsequently, from the moment the variable display stops, it is updated to the jackpot game background image corresponding to the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Then, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the result notification presentation of the success pattern of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 1000ms period including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the result notification sequence for successful patterns are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, the upward movement of the movable body 32 to its initial position occurs over a period of 1500 ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (movable body upward movement period).

Furthermore, in the result notification sequence for the successful pattern, a jackpot confirmation sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1500ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking (jackpot confirmation sound output period). Note that, unlike the weak development sequence, the result notification sequence (successful pattern) does not output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, thus effectively notifying the player that a jackpot has been confirmed. Alternatively, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output in the result notification sequence (successful pattern). In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting a higher priority for the jackpot confirmation sound.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image or the Super Reach β background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), with illumination not primarily consisting of white light. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period of 1000ms, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the breaking effect, with illumination primarily consisting of white light. After the illumination corresponding to the breaking effect ends, the illumination data table for the jackpot notification background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the jackpot notification background image. Furthermore, from the moment the variable display stops, the display will primarily emit rainbow-colored light in a manner corresponding to the display of the jackpot game background image, using the jackpot game light emission data table.

As shown in Figure 128(B), in the failure pattern result notification, the falling of the movable body 32 and the cracks resulting from the falling of the movable body 32 are not displayed. Instead, cracks are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 5500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the success pattern (crack display period). Furthermore, from the start of the crack display period, the Super Reach α background image (weak S Reach effect image 006SG088) or Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), which had been displayed in color until then, is updated to a monochrome failure notification background image, which indicates that the variable display result is a failure. The display of the failure notification background image continues until the end of the crack display period, at which point it is updated to a color eye-catching image. The display period for the eye-catching image is, for example, 1000 ms. After the display period for the eye-catching image ends, the display of a normal background image (first background image 006SG081), which is also in color, begins. In other words, in the failure pattern result notification display in this embodiment, after the variable display result is notified by the display of a monochrome failure notification background image, the color eye-catching image and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) are displayed.

Furthermore, in the failure pattern result notification sequence, a crack-related sound effect corresponding to the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start of the crack display period described above (crack sound effect output period).

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the crack display period, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image or the Super Reach β background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), with illumination not primarily consisting of white light. From the start of the crack display period to the stop of the variable display, the illumination data table for the miss notification background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the miss notification background image, with illumination primarily consisting of white light. From the stop of the variable display onwards, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), with illumination not primarily consisting of white light. Furthermore, while both the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) and the light emission data table for the misalignment notification background image are light emission data tables that primarily execute white light emission, the white light emission based on the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) light emission data table is executed with a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the whiteout light emission data table is executed without a flashing pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are illustrated as starting the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout image 006SG303 in each effect may start displaying from a timing earlier than the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302).

(Shard speed during the cracking animation)
Next, we will explain the display speed of the fragment images 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A that are displayed when the cracking effect is executed as described above, such as the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect.

As shown in Figure 129(A), the fragment images 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which are displayed during the execution of the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, and the cracking effect as a result notification effect, are displayed moving at a constant speed V1 (normal motion) throughout the fragment image display period, which includes the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 129(B), the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed when the strong development effect B and the breakage effect as a cut-in effect are executed, moves and is displayed at speed V1 for 1000 ms between the early and late whiteout display periods. However, during the fragment image display period after the late whiteout display period (2000 ms for strong development effect B, and 1500 ms for the cut-in effect), it moves and is displayed at speed V0 (slow motion), which is slower than speed V1. Furthermore, while Figure 129 shows the strong development sequence B and the cut-in sequence as examples of sequences where the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at speed V0, the background change sequence B and the strong development sequence A also display the fragment image 006SG302 at speed V0, as described later. When suggesting a high probability of a big win to the player, it is decided that the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change sequence B and the strong development sequence A will be displayed at speed V0 at a higher rate than speed V1.

(Details of the cracking effect)
Next, the details of the cracking effect will be explained based on Figures 130 and 131. Figure 130 is a diagram showing the cracking patterns in the cracking effect. Figure 131 is a diagram showing examples of each cracking pattern.

As shown in Figures 130 and 131, in the cracking animations performed in various effects, at a predetermined cracking timing, the cracking begins when some kind of impact (force) is applied from the rear to approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area. A cracking image is then animated and displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area where the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed, with multiple fragment images 006SG302, each resembling at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, scattering. In other words, the cracking animation is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area changes into fragment images 006SG302, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in a cracked (fragmented) state. In this embodiment, the cracking is initiated when a sphere collides from the rear to approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A.

Furthermore, the animation display of a glass plate shattering and scattering fragments is actually composed of a number of still images corresponding to the duration of the fragment display (for example, approximately 30 to 100 frames). However, in Figure 131, five still images are extracted from the multiple still images that make up the shatter animation display of fragments from the start to the end of the shattering effect and arranged in chronological order. Also, in Figure 131, the five images for each shattering pattern are not consecutive; in reality, multiple fragment images not shown are placed between each frame.

The glass plate image 006SG301A can break in various ways, and multiple types of breaking patterns (for example, breaking patterns A to G) are pre-set. The CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute the breaking effects based on the pre-set breaking patterns according to the type of effect to be executed.

Specifically, pattern A corresponds to background change effect A and reach suggestion effect; pattern B corresponds to background change effect B and strong development effect B; pattern C corresponds to pseudo-consecutive effect and result notification effect (jackpot); pattern D corresponds to first consecutive split effect, second consecutive split effect and dialogue予告 effect; pattern E corresponds to weak development effect; pattern F corresponds to strong development effect A; and pattern G corresponds to cut-in effect.

Each crack pattern A through G differs in at least one of the following items: "Aggressor," "Crack Type," "Crack Range," and "Fragment Image Display Pattern." The display period and timing are explained in Figures 116 and 117, and therefore will not be explained further below.

"Aggressor" indicates the entity acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A. Crack patterns A and E execute the crack effect in accordance with the movement of the "character," crack patterns C and F execute the crack effect in accordance with the movement of the "movable body," and crack patterns B and D execute the crack effect at a predetermined timing regardless of the aggressor. "Crack pattern" indicates whether or not the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a crack pattern before cracking. Crack patterns A to D execute the crack effect after the "crack pattern" is displayed, and crack patterns E to G execute the crack effect without the "crack pattern" being displayed. Note that "crack pattern" includes multiple types of patterns that differ in display position, number of displays, and crack shape on the display screen. "Crack range" is the range in which the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks. Crack patterns A to C and E to G are the "entire" display screen, while crack pattern D is a "part." The "Fragment Image Display Mode" indicates whether the fragment image 006SG302 is transparent or not. Parts of crack pattern B and crack pattern E are "opaque," while the other crack patterns are "transparent."

In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 are set to be illuminated by light (illumination) from the front of the approximate center of the display screen. Therefore, the "non-transparent" fragment image 006SG302 reflects light, making it difficult to see the lower layer image rendering area. The "transparent" fragment image 006SG302 does not reflect light and is easily transmitted at a first angle (for example, a large angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light to the glass surface is 45 to 90 degrees), making it easier to see the lower layer image rendering area. On the other hand, at a second angle (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light to the glass surface is less than 45 degrees), it reflects light and is difficult to transmit, making it difficult to see the lower layer image rendering area (see Figure 140). For example, at a specific timing within the fragment image display period, among multiple fragment images 006SG302, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle. Subsequently, as the multiple fragment images 006SG302 move and are displayed over time, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle. Furthermore, the type, intensity, color, up/down/left/right position, and depth position of the light can all be changed, and the values of the light settings may be varied depending on the crack pattern.

Furthermore, the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks include multiple fragment images 006SG302 with different shapes, sizes, thicknesses, etc. Each fragment image 006SG302 moves while rotating in various directions at various speeds and orientations during the display period from the start of display until it is hidden. Specifically, some are displayed moving in the X-axis direction (left-right direction), others in the Y-axis direction (up-down direction), and others in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction), and these may differ in movement speed, rotation speed, rotation count, display period, etc. Note that the movement direction includes not only movement in one of the X, Y, and Z axes, but also movement in multiple axes (for example, XY axis direction or XY axis direction).

In other words, each crack pattern A to G differs in at least one of the following aspects when the fragment images 006SG302 are scattered: shape, size, rotation speed, rotation count, direction of movement [X-axis (left-right direction), Y-axis (up-down direction), Z-axis (front-back direction)], movement speed, and display period.

Furthermore, crack patterns A through G are animations of cracks created, for example, using the shutter function of a specific animation creation software. The created crack patterns A through G differ in the numerical values of at least some of the parameters shown below.

To briefly explain each parameter shown in Figure 130: "Gravity" allows you to set the gravity, and adjust the acceleration at which scattered fragments gradually fall. Since it is gravity, it is not constant but gradually increases in acceleration downwards. "Direction of gravity" allows you to set the direction in which gravity acts, and you can specify up, down, left, and right directions with 0 degrees (up) as the reference. "Gravity gradient" allows you to adjust gravity in the Z-axis direction (forward and backward direction), and the value set with this parameter is combined with "Direction of gravity". You can specify all directions in 3D space: forward and backward, up, down, left, and right. Note that with values of "-90" and "90", it becomes the Z-axis direction, so "Direction of gravity" is effectively ignored. "Intensity" allows you to adjust the force of the scattered fragments, and increasing the value makes the fragments scatter faster. "Variability" adjusts the degree to which the size of the fragments affects the animation. In the real world, when the same physical impact is applied, larger and heavier objects require more energy to move, so smaller objects move and rotate faster, while larger and heavier objects move slower. The difference in physical animation due to the size of the fragments can be adjusted from 0 to 100%. At 0%, size and weight are not considered, so small and large fragments move the same way without distinction. The default setting of 30% is considered to be close to the laws of physics in nature. "Repeat" adjusts the size of the fragments that break. Increasing the value makes each fragment smaller and increases the number of fragments. "Viscosity" sets the resistance to the movement of the fragments. Increasing the value makes the movement and rotation stop faster due to the resistance. Resistance to gravity is also applied, as if the fragments were stuck to something sticky, so the falling speed is also slowed. In other words, if the value of "Viscosity" is adjusted to be large, the movement of the fragments will be in slow motion. Furthermore, while Figure 130 shows crack patterns B, E, and F as examples of crack patterns where the "viscosity" value is adjusted to be higher than normal, as will be explained later, crack pattern G also has a "viscosity" value adjusted to be higher than normal.

The above parameters are merely examples. Other parameters may also be set, such as "Force," which indicates the force applied at the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks; "Position," which allows adjustment of the X and Y axis directions where the force is applied; "Depth," which allows adjustment of the Z axis direction (depth direction) of the force; "Rotation Speed," which allows setting the speed at which each fragment image 006SG302 can rotate; and "Randomness," which allows setting the degree of randomness in the movement of each fragment image 006SG302.

Next, we will briefly describe the main characteristics of the movement (primarily the scattering pattern) of the fragment image 006SG302 in each crack pattern.

For example, in crack patterns A, C to F, the "gravity direction" value is set to "180°," so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters outwards before naturally falling downwards. In contrast, in crack patterns B and G, the "gravity direction" value is set to "0°," so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters outwards, but is less likely to fall downwards compared to crack patterns A, C to F.

Thus, by setting the "gravity direction" differently for crack patterns A, C-F (first pattern) and crack patterns B, G (second pattern), crack patterns A, C-F have a "180°" setting, resulting in different directions of movement when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. This allows for the construction of a variety of patterns, enhancing the overall appeal.

Furthermore, in crack patterns A, C, and F, the "variation amount" value is set to "30%", resulting in smaller fragment images 006SG302 moving and rotating quickly, while larger, heavier fragment images 006SG302 move and rotate slowly. In contrast, in crack patterns B and G, the "variation amount" value is set to "0%", so small and large fragments in the fragment image 006SG302 behave identically without distinction, resulting in crack patterns with a high degree of animation.

In other words, crack patterns A, C-F differ in how they are affected by animation depending on their size. Smaller fragment images 006SG302 fly faster, while larger fragment images 006SG302 fall somewhat slower, resulting in a crack pattern that can be used when you want to show realistic movement. Crack patterns B and G, regardless of size, are affected by animation in a similar way, resulting in a similar flight and fall pattern, allowing you to select the appropriate crack pattern depending on the scene.

Furthermore, while the "gravity direction" setting is the same for crack patterns A and C (first patterns) and crack patterns D through F (second patterns), the "gravity value" setting differs, resulting in different falling speeds for the fragment image 006SG302. By varying the "gravity value" parameter in this way, and thus altering the falling speed of the fragment image 006SG302, a variety of patterns can be constructed, enhancing the overall interest. More specifically, crack patterns D through F have higher values, resulting in faster falling speeds for the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, in crack patterns A-C, E, and G, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "0" or higher, causing the fragment image 006SG302 to move in the X and Y directions while simultaneously moving in the Z direction, i.e., towards the viewer. In contrast, in crack patterns D and F, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "0," causing the fragment image 006SG302 to move only in the X and Y directions, without moving in the Z direction. In addition, in crack patterns A-C, E, and G, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving towards the viewer, it is displayed in a manner that gradually enlarges, emphasizing that it is approaching the viewer. In particular, in crack patterns B and G, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "90," resulting in the fragment image being displayed as moving even further towards the viewer.

Furthermore, in crack patterns A (first pattern), B (second pattern), and C (third pattern), the first parameter of "gravity" is common to all three, set to "0," while the second parameter of "strength" differs: "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C. In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302, while varying the second parameter, a diverse range of patterns can be constructed, resulting in the creation of stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, crack patterns E (first pattern), F (second pattern), and G (third pattern) share a common first parameter of "gravity" of "0" with crack pattern E (first pattern) and crack pattern F (second pattern), while their second parameters of "strength" differ: crack pattern E has "3" and crack pattern F has "5". Crack pattern F (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern) differ in that their first parameter of "gravity" is "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, while their second parameter of "strength" is a common "5". In this way, by creating common parts for each pattern relative to the fragment image 006SG302 while using different parameters, it is possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

In this embodiment, multiple types of crack patterns A to G with different numerical values for various parameters are pre-stored, and a crack animation is executed based on crack pattern A to G corresponding to the type of animation to be performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the type of animation to be executed by the animation control CPU 120 is determined based on the start of the variable display, the numerical values of various parameters are determined according to the determined type of animation and the expected probability of a big win, and crack animation data is created based on the determined numerical values. Based on the created crack animation data, an animation display of a glass plate cracking may be displayed.

(Example of crack pattern display)
Next, we will explain in detail the display examples of crack patterns A to G based on Figures 75 to 138. Figure 75 shows display examples of crack pattern A with and without a whiteout image. Figure 133 shows display examples of crack pattern B with and without a whiteout image. Figure 134 shows display examples of crack pattern C with and without a whiteout image. Figure 135 shows display examples of crack pattern D with and without a whiteout image. Figure 136 shows display examples of crack pattern E with and without a whiteout image. Figure 137 shows display examples of crack pattern F with and without a whiteout image. Figure 138 shows display examples of crack pattern G with and without a whiteout image.

In Figures 75 to 138, (A1) to (A5) are examples of crack patterns displayed with the whiteout image 006SG303, while (B1) to (B5) are examples of crack patterns corresponding to (A1) to (A5), but without the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, these figures compare the display of the crack pattern with and without the whiteout image 006SG303 at the start of the crack effect. Specifically, in (A1) of each figure, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is set to 0%, and the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 gradually increases in the order of (A1), (A2), and (A3), reaching 100% in (A4).

As shown in Figures 75 to 138 (B1) to (B5), in the animation display of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, in the initial frame (for example, (B1)), the setting is that the breaking begins when an impact (force) is applied as if a sphere were to collide with the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A from behind. Therefore, the fragments begin to scatter from the fragment image 006SG302 near the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A, but the numerous fragment images 006SG302 surrounding it have not yet begun to scatter. In other words, when the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed across the entire display screen in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 that was hidden at the time of the breakage, begins to change into a broken state, numerous fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, filling almost the entire display screen. Therefore, images displayed in the display layer image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 become almost impossible to see.

Therefore, at the start of the cracking animation, as shown in (B1), the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed to fill almost the entire display screen for several frames, changes to a cracked state and numerous fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, making it difficult to see the image that was displayed before the cracking animation started. In particular, as in cracking patterns A to D, it is still acceptable when the cracking animation starts after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked state. However, as in cracking patterns E to G, when the cracking animation starts abruptly without the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked state, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed to fill the display screen, suddenly changes to a cracked state and numerous fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, seemingly erasing the image that was displayed before the cracking animation started. This may give the player a more unnatural impression.

Therefore, at the beginning of the cracking process, as shown in the early whiteout display period of (A1), displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 in the display layer 7 image rendering area above the fragment image 006SG302 hides a large number of fragment images 006SG302, thereby reducing the unnatural appearance when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in the later stages of the whiteout display in (A2) and (A3), by gradually increasing the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 through a fade-out display, rather than abruptly hiding it, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible only after it has moved somewhat away from the center of the display screen. This allows the fragment image 006SG302 to break and scatter naturally and without any unnatural appearance.

As shown in Figure 75, in crack pattern A, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 75(B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 75(B2)), before falling downwards and being displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 75(B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 133, in crack pattern B, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 133(B1)). After the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) during normal motion movement (see Figure 133(B2)), they are less likely to fall downwards. Therefore, they move radially in slow motion from the center and are displayed off-frame from the top, bottom, left, and right edges (see Figures 133(B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 134, in crack pattern C, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 134(B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 134(B2)), before falling downwards and being displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 134(B3) to (B5)).

In this embodiment, a common background effect image 006SG322 is displayed as the background image when a pseudo-consecutive win animation, a weak development animation, a strong development animation A, and a cut-in animation are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not specifically shown, for example, different background images with different display modes depending on the type of animation may be displayed.

As shown in Figure 135, in crack pattern D, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 135(B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) and the Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Figure 135(B2)), before falling downwards and being displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 135(B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 136, in crack pattern E, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 136 (B1)), and after the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) during normal motion movement (see Figure 136 (B2)), they fall downwards during slow motion movement and are mainly displayed off-frame from the bottom edge (see Figures 136 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the value of the "viscosity" parameter in crack pattern E is adjusted to "0.4", which corresponds to the value in Figures 136 (B3) to (B5). More specifically, the value of the "viscosity" parameter corresponding to Figures 136 (B1) and (B2) is adjusted to "0.1". Furthermore, in Figure 136 (B1), the movable body 32 is intentionally omitted to make the beginning of the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301A easier to see. Also, the fragment image 006SG302 in crack pattern E is displayed moving in slow motion from Figure 136 (B3), and since it takes time for it to appear out of frame, to avoid disrupting the tempo of the performance, the Super Reach α performance may be performed by whiteout while the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player in slow motion.

As shown in Figure 137, in crack pattern F, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 137 (B1)). During normal motion movement, the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) and Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Figure 137 (B2)). Then, during slow motion movement, they fall downwards, mainly from the bottom edge, and are displayed out of frame (see Figures 137 (B3) to (B5)). Furthermore, smaller fragment images 006SG302 fall earlier and are displayed out of frame because they move and rotate faster, while larger, heavier fragment images 006SG302 are slower and are displayed out of frame later than the smaller fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, if a cracking effect occurs during a strong S-reach animation, the reduced decorative symbol in the upper right corner of the reach animation display screen may be temporarily hidden and redisplayed when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cracking effect becomes hidden. This minimizes the display of elements unrelated to the cracking effect, thereby enhancing its visual impact. Additionally, this method may be applied not only to strong S-reach animations but also to other reach animations, such as weak S-reach animations, if a cracking effect occurs during their execution. The reduced decorative symbol in the reach animation may be temporarily hidden and redisplayed when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cracking effect becomes hidden.

As shown in Figure 138, in crack pattern G, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 138 (B1)). After the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) during normal motion movement (see Figure 138 (B2)), they are less likely to fall downwards. Therefore, they move radially in slow motion from the center and are displayed off-frame from the top, bottom, left, and right edges (see Figures 138 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the "viscosity" parameter value in crack pattern G is adjusted to "0.1," which corresponds to Figures 138 (B1) and (B2). More specifically, the "viscosity" parameter value corresponding to Figures 138 (B3) to (B5) is adjusted to "0.4."

(Details of the fragment images)
Next, the details of the fragment images will be explained based on Figures 139 and 140. Figure 139 shows the fragment images displayed in (A) the pseudo-consecutive effect and (B) the cut-in effect. Figure 140 shows the fragment images displayed in (A) the background change effect A and (B) the strong development effect B. In Figure 140, the fragment images indicated by dotted lines indicate that they are not displayed.

As shown in Figure 139(A), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo-consecutive effect is an opaque image (e.g., 0% transparency) that makes it difficult to recognize at least a portion of the superimposed background effect image 006SG322. In contrast, as shown in Figure 139(B), the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is a transparent image (e.g., 100% transparency) that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background effect image 006SG322 and the text image 006SG307. This allows for the creation of distinctly different impressions even in effects where the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 139(B), in the cut-in effect, the display mode of the fragment images is varied for each effect. This allows for different display modes for each effect, thereby enhancing the effect of each effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 140(A), in background change effect A, all fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by moving downwards toward the outside of the display screen of the image display device 5 and appearing out of frame. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 140(B), in strong development effect B, the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden by moving up, down, left, and right toward the outside of the display screen and appearing out of frame. The second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen of the image display device 5. This creates a difference in how the fragment images 006SG302 are presented between background change effect A and strong development effect B, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 140(A), when the fragment image 006SG302 rotates to a first angle (for example, a large angle where the angle of incidence of the irradiated light on the glass surface is between 45 and 90 degrees, such as when the plane faces the front), it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. When the fragment image 006SG302 rotates to a second angle smaller than the first angle (for example, a small angle where the angle of incidence of the irradiated light on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees, such as when the end face faces the front), it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. This enhances the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 140(A), when the first fragment image among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image is at a second angle, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

(Effects of each form)
[Form 1-1]
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed variably, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot is derived as a result of the variable display of these special symbols and decorative symbols, it is possible to control the machine to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5 for displaying images, and a performance control CPU 120 which is a control means for executing performances that suggest that the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state during variable display, such as a first consecutive break performance, a second consecutive break performance, a dialogue予告 performance, a background change performance A, a background change performance B, a pseudo-consecutive performance, a reach suggestion performance, a weak development performance, a strong development performance A, a strong development performance B, a cut-in performance, a result notification performance, etc. In addition, as shown in Figures 60 to 62, the pachinko game machine 1 has layer 1 to layer 10 image drawing areas in the VRAM area of the display control unit 123 for drawing images to be displayed on the image display device 5, each for drawing images with different display priorities.

For example, the VRAM area consists of a Layer 1 image rendering area for rendering and arranging background images, a Layer 2 image rendering area for rendering and arranging decorative patterns as Layer 2 images, a Layer 3 image rendering area for rendering and arranging object images such as characters as Layer 3 images, a Layer 4 image rendering area for rendering and arranging crack warning images (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) as Layer 4 images, a Layer 5 image rendering area for rendering and arranging glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment image 006SG302 (glass fragments, etc.) as Layer 5 images, and a Layer 6 The layer includes a Layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging action effect images, a Layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the whiteout image 006SG303, a Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging operation prompt images, a Layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging variable display compatible displays (hold display and active display), and a Layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging small symbols (fourth symbol), the first hold memory count, the second hold memory count, and right-hand shooting notification images. Furthermore, a Layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging error displays may also be included.

Furthermore, unless the Layer 11 image rendering area is further allocated in the VRAM area, the image rendered in the Layer 10 image rendering area has the highest display priority in the image display device 5, the image rendered in the Layer 9 image rendering area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image rendered in the Layer 10 image rendering area, the image rendered in the Layer 8 image rendering area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image rendered in the Layer 9 image rendering area, the image rendered in the Layer 7 image rendering area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image rendered in the Layer 8 image rendering area, and the image rendered in the Layer 6 image rendering area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image rendered in the Layer 7 image rendering area. Images are of lower quality, and images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area, and images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area. Furthermore, although it has been explained that there is a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging background images, instead of the Layer 1 image drawing area, there may be a Layer 1-1 image drawing area, a Layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a Layer 1-3 image drawing area. In this case, the Layer 1-1 image drawing area can display normal background images (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image), the Layer 1-2 image drawing area can display chance background images (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), normal reach background image, super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and the Layer 1-3 image drawing area can display background effect images (background effect image 006SG322) and jackpot notification background images. An image (fifth background image 006SG085) can be drawn. Images drawn in the Layer 1-3 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 1-2 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 1-3 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 1-1 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 1-2 image drawing area.

Here, as shown in Figures 90 to 93, background change effect A and strong development effect A are effects that can be executed at different times. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 120, background change effect A has a crack display period in which cracks are displayed when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a fragment image display period in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. As shown in Figure 125, strong development effect A is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a shorter period than in the background change effect due to the operation of the movable body 32.

Furthermore, background change effect A is an effect that causes the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be different before the crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. Strong development effect A is an effect that causes the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be different before the strong development effect A is executed and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A begins. In other words, in this embodiment, the background change effect A, which displays cracks and fragment images 006SG302 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the strong development effect A, which displays fragment images 006SG302 without cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, can be executed at different timings. This allows for surprising the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the type of background image displayed before and after the display of fragment images 006SG302 differs in both background change effect A and strong development effect A, even though both effects display fragment images 006SG302, they can give the player suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 1-2]
Furthermore, if background change effect A and strong development effect A are made executable during variable display 1, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state may be higher when background change effect A is not executed but strong development effect A is executed than when background change effect A is executed and strong development effect A is executed (see, for example, Figures 90 to 93). By doing so, attention can be drawn to the execution status of background change effect A and strong development effect A, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 1-3]
Furthermore, when the background image changes from a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082), in addition to the case where the background image changes via background change effect A, there may also be a case where the background image changes via a chance background prompting effect different from background change effect A (Figure 87). Also, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state may be higher when the background image changes from a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via background change effect A than when the background image changes from a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via the chance background prompting effect. In this way, attention can be drawn to whether the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is displayed via background change effect A or the chance background prompting effect, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 1-4-1]
Furthermore, if background change effect A and strong development effect A are made executable during the variable display of 1, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state may be higher when background change effect A is executed before strong development effect A than when background change effect A is not executed before strong development effect A (see, for example, Figures 90 to 93). By doing so, the excitement can be enhanced by making players anticipate that both background change effect A and strong development effect A will be executed during the variable display of 1.

[Form 1-4-2]
As shown in Figures 120 and 125, during variable display, background change effect A is an effect that is executed before the reach timing of the decorative symbols, while strong development effect A is an effect that is executed after the reach timing of the decorative symbols. Furthermore, the images displayed as background images in the display area of the image display device 5 include a normal background image (first background image 006SG081), a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot state before the reach, a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) that indicates that the reach effect of super reach α is being executed, and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) that indicates that the reach effect of super reach β is being executed. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A is displayed together with the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A is displayed together with the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). Therefore, the relationship between these background change effect A and strong development effect A can draw the player's attention and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 1-4-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A is transparent, so the player can recognize at least a part of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) which is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302. In contrast, the background image displayed in strong development effect A is not transparent, so the player cannot recognize at least a part of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) which is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302. Thus, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the effect of strong development effect A can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 146, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, the player may be able to recognize at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302 when the fragment image 006SG302 is at a first angle due to the rotation, while it may be difficult for the player to recognize at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302 when the fragment image 006SG302 is at a second angle due to the rotation. By doing so, the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 146, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302, the second fragment image 006SG302 may be positioned at a second angle when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at a first angle. This enhances the visual effect when displaying the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 1-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 141, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including the X-axis and Z-axis directions, the time required for the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the Z-axis direction to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 may be made longer than the time required for the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the X-axis direction. By doing so, the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 1-6]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect A are both displayed moving without any change in speed from the start to the end of display. Therefore, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally and without any sense of incongruity in these background change effect A and strong development effect A.

[Form 1-7-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see Figures 75 and 137). The time required for the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A to disappear from the display screen is the same, thereby increasing the relationship between background change effect A and strong development effect A and enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 1-7-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when it is first displayed and before it disappears from view on the display screen (see Figures 75 and 137). Specifically, it is difficult to see when it is first displayed and easy to see before it disappears, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-7-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) takes longer to disappear from the display screen in the background change effect A than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed more naturally.

[Form 1-8]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 146, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated in background change effect A and strong development effect A, the number of rotations from when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 in background change effect A may be the same as the number of rotations from when the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 in strong development effect A. By doing so, the relationship between background change effect A and strong development effect A is increased, and the effects of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 2-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 125, in both background change effect A and strong development effect A, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the moment the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. The display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in these background change effect A and strong development effect A consists of an early whiteout display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303, and a late whiteout display period in which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303. This allows background change effect A and strong development effect A to be executed at different timings, providing surprises to the player at various timings. In addition, it reduces the sense of incongruity when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed by the whiteout image 006SG303, allowing these background change effect A and strong development effect to be executed more effectively.

[Form 2-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 125, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in background change effect A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 1000 ms, whereas the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in strong development effect A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 2500 ms. Therefore, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 increases the connection between background change effect A and strong development effect A, and because the display periods of the whiteout image 006SG303 differ between background change effect A and strong development effect A, the effects of both background change effect A and strong development effect A can be enhanced.

[Form 2-3]
Furthermore, with respect to the background change effect A shown in Figure 120, the crack display period may be longer than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period) may be shorter than the crack display period and the fragment image display period. In this way, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be started without any sense of incongruity by the whiteout image 006SG303.

[Form 2-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 102 and 109, the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start of display timing of the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start of display timing of the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A are images displayed in the same manner. Therefore, the relationship between background change effect A and strong development effect A, in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the same manner, can be enhanced, thereby increasing the effect of both effects.

[Form 3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 122 and 127, the pseudo-consecutive effect and the cut-in effect in this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 129, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect is displayed moving at speed V1 regardless of the progress of the effect, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect changes speed from speed V1 to a slower speed V0 in accordance with the progress of the effect. Therefore, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it is possible to give the player a suitably different impression, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 90 to 93, if the variable display allows for the execution of pseudo-consecutive effects multiple times while the cut-in effect can only be executed once, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the pseudo-consecutive effects are executed multiple times than when the pseudo-consecutive effects are executed only once, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the cut-in effect is executed only once than when the pseudo-consecutive effects are executed multiple times. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the execution status of the pseudo-consecutive effects and the cut-in effect, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 3-3]
In the pseudo-consecutive-shot sequence, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a broken state (glass plate image 006SG301A), and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in sequence. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards, while at the second timing, it is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figures 105(C) and 112(C)). This allows for a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the pseudo-consecutive-shot sequence and the cut-in sequence, enhancing the overall entertainment value.

[Form 3-4-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129, the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed at speed V1 during the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and from the moment the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, it is displayed at speed V0, which is slower than speed V1. This enhances the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect.

[Form 3-4-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 127, when displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in a cut-in animation and displaying the whiteout image 006SG303, as shown in Figure 129, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 may overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at speed V1, but may not overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at speed V0. Doing so can prevent a decrease in the effectiveness of the cut-in animation.

[Form 3-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 146, when the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are made rotatable, the number of rotations performed from the time the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotations performed from the time the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 4-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 122 and 127, the pseudo-consecutive spin animation and the cut-in animation in this embodiment are animations with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as pseudo-consecutive spin animations are not transparent, so the player cannot see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302, whereas the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as cut-in animations are transparent, so the player can see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Therefore, even though the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the same way for both pseudo-consecutive spin animations and cut-in animations, it is possible to give the player a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 4-2]
In the pseudo-consecutive effect, the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322, the second fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the text image 006SG307, and in the cut-in effect, the third fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a portion of the text image 006SG307 (see Figure 139). By changing the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 for each effect in this way, the effect of each effect can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 146, when the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are made rotatable, if the rotation brings the first fragment image 006SG302 to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. If the rotation brings the first fragment image 006SG302 to a second angle, it may become difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 146, when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is rotatable, the cut-in effect may be such that when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a second angle. By doing so, the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 5-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 122 and 127, the pseudo-consecutive win animation and the cut-in animation in this embodiment are animations with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Furthermore, regarding these pseudo-consecutive effects and cut-in effects, the cut-in effect is designed to start displaying multiple fragment images 006SG302 for a shorter period than the crack display period in the pseudo-consecutive effect, from when a crack appears on the glass plate image 006SG301 until a fragment image 006SG302, which imitates at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed. The fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect and the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least the X-axis and Z-axis directions (see Figure 141). The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a manner that moves in the Z-axis direction may take longer to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a manner that moves in the X-axis direction.

[Form 5-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when it is first displayed and before it disappears from view on the display screen (see Figures 134 and 138). Specifically, it is difficult to see when it is first displayed and easy to see before it disappears, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 5-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) takes longer to disappear from the display screen in the background change effect A than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed more naturally.

[Form 5-4]
In the pseudo-consecutive animation, all of the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden in a manner that moves away from the display screen (see, for example, Figure 140(A)), and in the cut-in animation, the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden in a manner that moves away from the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is preferably hidden before moving away from the display screen (see, for example, Figure 140(B)). By doing so, it is possible to create a difference in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the pseudo-consecutive animation and the cut-in animation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 123 and 124, the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect in this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, for these reach suggestion effect and weak development effect, the right crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may be longer than the preceding operation period in the weak development effect, and the length of the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect and the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be different (see Figures 123 and 124). In this way, even if the effects display the same fragment image 006SG302, they can give suitably different impressions and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 6-2]
Furthermore, in the reach indication sequence, the period for displaying the right crack may be longer than the period from the left crack display sequence until the right crack display sequence begins (see Figure 123). Doing so prevents the reach indication sequence from becoming less interesting due to a monotonous sequence structure.

[Form 6-3]
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the reach indication performance can be executed in a successful pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks after the crack is displayed, or in a failure pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break as the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break after the crack is displayed. When the reach indication performance is executed in the failure pattern, the crack is displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for a period of 6000ms, which is longer than the display period of 2000ms of the fragment image 006SG302 (fragment image display period) when the reach indication performance is executed in the successful pattern. This allows the player to be shown that the reach indication performance will not be executed in the successful pattern, that is, that the glass plate image 006SG301A will not break.

[Form 6-4-1]
Furthermore, while the reach-indicating effect, when executed in a successful pattern, notifies the player that a reach will occur, when executed in a failed pattern, it indicates that a reach will not occur, meaning that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is lower than when a reach occurs. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the reach-indicating effect is executed and whether or not it is executed in a successful pattern, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

[Form 6-4-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 90 to 93, when both a reach suggestion effect and a weak development effect can be executed during the variable display of 1, the weak development effect may be made executable after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect has started, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect starts before the execution of the weak development effect than when it does not. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 6-5]
In the reach-indicating演出 (reach suggestion effect), a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a shattered state, and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the weak development effect. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen outwards, while at the second timing, it is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figures 106(G) and 108(D)). This allows for a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the reach-indicating effect and the weak development effect, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 6-6]
In the reach indication演出 (performance/presentation), it is possible to highlight the decorative symbols in the reach state, and by making the period during which the reach state symbols are highlighted longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 107(I) to 107(K)), it is possible to suitably indicate that the reach state has been reached.

[Form 6-7-1]
In the reach indication effect, the motion effect image 006SG323 can be displayed in the layer 6 image rendering area, which is higher than the fragment image 006SG302, in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305. By displaying the motion effect image 006SG323 at the timing when the display of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 begins (see Figure 106(D)), the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed to a cracked state without any sense of incongruity.

[Form 6-7-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 123, in the reach suggestion effect, depending on the character's actions, the timing at which a crack appears in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the display of the small fragment image 006SG302A from the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R of the glass plate image 006SG301 for a longer period than the operation effect image 006SG323, allows for a favorable indication to the player that a crack has appeared in the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 6-7-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 123, in the reach suggestion effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins when the character acts on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301. However, the action effect image 006SG323 is not displayed when the character acts on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301. Therefore, depending on the character's action, there is a difference in the presentation of the reach suggestion effect depending on whether cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301 or whether the character acts on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, thus preventing the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-7-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 123, in the reach suggestion effect, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period) is longer than the period during which the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed (minor fragment image display period). This allows for a difference in the presentation of the reach suggestion effect between when cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R of the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the character interacts with the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C of the glass plate image 006SG301, preventing the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-8]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect are transparent, allowing players to see the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. On the other hand, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect are not transparent, preventing players from seeing at least a portion of the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. This allows for differences in the display of the fragment images 006SG302 between reach suggestion effects and weak development effects, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.

[Form 6-9]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect both move and are displayed without changing speed from the start timing of display to the end timing of display. Therefore, these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed naturally in the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect.

[Form 6-10]
Furthermore, the display period for fragment images in the weak development sequence may be longer than the display period for fragment images in the reach suggestion sequence (see Figures 123 and 124). By doing so, differences can be created between the reach suggestion sequence and the weak development sequence, and the entertainment value can be enhanced through a variety of presentations.

[Form 7-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 127, the background change effect A and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 127, when the cut-in effect is executed, first, as an operation prompting effect, an image of the state before operation of the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the cut-in effect is executed when the push button 31B is operated by the player or when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. During the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, the image of the state after operation of the push button 31B is displayed with priority over the whiteout image 006SG303. Here, the display period for the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in animation is 2500ms, the display period for the image of the push button 31B before operation is 3000ms, and the display period for the image of the push button 31B after operation is 1000ms, the same as the display period for the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, the display period for the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in animation (cut-in image display period) is shorter than the display period for the image of the push button 31B before operation (pre-operation image display period), and longer than the display period for the image of the push button 31B after operation (post-operation image display period). This prevents the cut-in animation from becoming monotonous and reducing its appeal.

[Form 8-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that players can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Background change effect A is an effect in which the background image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period. Furthermore, the pseudo-consecutive effect may be an effect in which the combination of decorative symbols displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period (for example, before the crack display period the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a random combination, but after the start of display of the fragment image 006SG302 the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a combination corresponding to the pseudo-consecutive effect). In this way, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it is possible to give a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 8-2]
Furthermore, regarding the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in Figures 120 and 122, if it is possible to display a first-stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then change the first-stage crack to a second-stage crack, the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the background change effect A and the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the pseudo-continuous effect may be different. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be enhanced.

[Form 9-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, the period during which cracks are displayed in background change effect A (crack display period) is 2000 ms, while the period during which cracks are displayed in the pseudo-consecutive effect (crack display period) is 1500 ms, so the lengths are different. In both the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive display effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins at the same time as the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. The display period of these whiteout images 006SG303 consists of an early whiteout display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the whiteout image 006SG303, and a later whiteout display period in which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. This reduces the sense of incongruity when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, allowing the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive display effect to be executed effectively.

[Form 9-2]
Furthermore, with respect to the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in Figures 120 and 122, if it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks, the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the background change effect A and the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the pseudo-continuous effect may be different. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be enhanced.

[Form 10-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 126, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that players can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 129, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is displayed moving without changing speed from the start to the end of the display, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B is displayed moving at speed V1 from the start to the end of the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, and the transition is displayed moving at a slower speed V0 than speed V1. Therefore, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it can give a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 10-2]
In background change effect A, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in both the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a shattered state, and the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in strong development effect B. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, in the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, while in the second timing, it is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards (see Figures 102(G) and 110(H)). This creates a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between background change effect A and strong development effect B, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 10-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at speed V0 in the strong development effect B is longer than the period during which it is displayed at speed V1. Therefore, it is possible to create a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing the level of interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at speed V1 in the strong development sequence B is the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303. Since the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed during the period when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at speed V0, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the strong development sequence B.

[Form 10-4]
In background change effect A, all of the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden in a manner that moves away from the display screen (see Figure 140(A)), and in strong development effect B, the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden in a manner that moves away from the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is hidden before moving away from the display screen (see Figure 140(B)). In this way, the way the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed is made different between background change effect A and strong development effect B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, since both the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B are transparent images, the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 can be enhanced.

[Form 10-6-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see Figures 75 and 133). It is preferable that the time required for the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B to disappear from the display screen is the same. By doing so, the relationship between background change effect A and strong development effect B is enhanced, and the effects of both effects can be improved.

[Form 10-6-2]
It is preferable that the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), differs between the time the display starts and the time before it disappears from view on the display screen (see Figures 75 and 133). Specifically, it is preferable that the image is difficult to see when the display starts and easy to see before it disappears, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 146, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect B, the number of rotations performed from the time the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A is displayed until it is no longer visible in the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotations performed from the time the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect is displayed until it is no longer visible in the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, the effect of the display when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 10-7-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 146, when the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect B are rotated, if the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a first angle due to the rotation, it may be possible to make it possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and if the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a second angle due to the rotation, it may be possible to make it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the effect of the display when the fragment image 006SG302 is shown can be enhanced.

[Form 10-7-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 146, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect B, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle. In this way, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 will be at a second angle.

[Form 10-8]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 90 to 93, if both background change effect A and strong development effect B are possible during the variable display of 1, the background change effect may be made possible at the timing before the reach, and strong development effect B at the timing after the reach, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when background change effect A is performed before strong development effect B is performed than when it is not performed. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the execution of background change effect A, and the excitement can be enhanced.

[Form 10-9]
Furthermore, with respect to the background change effect A and the strong development effect B shown in Figures 120 and 126, if it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks, the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in background change effect A and the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in pseudo-consecutive effect may be different. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be enhanced.

[Form 11-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 116, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect is not transparent, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is transparent. Therefore, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it is possible to give a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 12-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 126, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. In addition, the length of the crack display period in background change effect A and the crack display period in strong development effect B may be made different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B may be displayed in a manner that moves in at least multiple directions in the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, so that the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction takes longer to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction in strong development effect B takes longer to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction in background change effect A. In this way, even when the same fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a suitably different impression can be given, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 13-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 123, the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, the right crack display period is 4000ms in the reach suggestion effect, while the crack display period is 2000ms in the background change effect A. The display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect is 1500ms, while the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is 20000ms. As a result, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it is possible to give a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 13-2]
In the first predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a first crack pattern in accordance with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and in the fourth predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed from a third pre-crack pattern to a third crack pattern and displayed (see Figures 106 and 102), thereby enhancing the visual effect when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a crack pattern.

[Form 14-1]
Furthermore, the first and second consecutive crack effects in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 118, are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so they can surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, the second consecutive crack effect can be executed after the first consecutive crack effect, and the length of the crack display period and the length of the fragment image display period are the same for both the first and second consecutive crack effects. When the second consecutive crack effect is executed after the first consecutive crack effect, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive crack effect is temporarily hidden before the crack display period of the second crack effect begins. This prevents a decrease in the effect of the effect due to new cracks being displayed even though the fragment image 006SG302 is already displayed.

[Form 14-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 141, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second continuous cracking effect may both be displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least the X-axis and Z-axis directions. Moreover, the starting position for displaying the fragment image 006SG302 may differ between the first and second continuous cracking effects. By doing so, differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is presented between the first and second continuous cracking effects can be created, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-3]
In both the first and second consecutive cracking effects, the character image 006SG305 (special image) can be displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302. In the first consecutive cracking effect, the character image 006SG305 is displayed in a first form (for example, a character image of Jam), while in the second consecutive cracking effect, the character image 006SG305 is displayed in a second form different from the first form (for example, a character image of Mumu) (see Figures 99(F) and 100(F)). This allows for differences in how the special image is presented between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 14-4]
Furthermore, while the length of the fragment image display period differs between the first and second cracking effects shown in Figure 118, the length of the display period for the character image 006SG305, which is displayed as a result of these first and second cracking effects, may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to create differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is presented between the first and second cracking effects, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 84, in this embodiment, there are two patterns: one in which the second consecutive break effect is performed after the first consecutive break effect is performed, and another in which the second consecutive break effect is not performed after the first consecutive break effect is performed. The case in which the second consecutive break effect is performed after the first consecutive break effect is performed has a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot state than the case in which the second consecutive break effect is not performed after the first consecutive break effect is performed. Therefore, the performance of the second consecutive break effect can draw attention to the game and enhance its appeal.

[Form 14-6]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129, the fragment images 006SG302 in both the first and second consecutive cracking effects are displayed moving without changing speed from the start to the end of the display, thereby increasing the connection between the first and second consecutive cracking effects and enhancing their appeal.

[Form 14-7-1]
Furthermore, for the first and second consecutive cracking effects shown in Figure 118, a white whiteout image 006SG303 can be displayed in common from the start timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302, and the display patterns of the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed in the first consecutive cracking effect and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed in the second consecutive cracking effect may be the same. By doing so, the relationship between the first and second consecutive cracking effects is increased, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 14-7-2]
Furthermore, since the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period) is the same for both the first and second consecutive crackling effects shown in Figure 118, the relationship between the first and second consecutive crackling effects is enhanced, and the effects of both can be improved.

[Form 15-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 128, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. In addition, as a result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the display area of the image display device 5. The time required for the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A to disappear is different from the time required for the image with the crack on the glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear in the result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, so it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state.

[Form 15-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 120, the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A takes 2500ms to disappear, and in the result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, it takes 5500ms for the image of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear, so the player can be properly notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state.

[Form 15-3]
In background change effect A, there is a fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) with the largest display size among the multiple fragment images 006SG302, and in result notification effect (miss), there is a small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) with the largest display size among the multiple fragment images 006SG302, and it is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) has a larger display size than the small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) (see, for example, Figures 103(J) and 115(D)). By doing so, it is possible to create differences in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed and enhance interest.

[Form 15-4]
In background change effect A, the fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image, and in result notification effect (miss), the small fragment image 006SG302A is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figure 130). This allows for differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 15-5]
It is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the small fragment image 006SG302A in result notification effect (miss) are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) (see, for example, Figures 75 and 134). By doing so, the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be made related and the entertainment value can be increased.

[Form 15-6]
In background change effect A, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a broken state (display of glass plate image 006SG301A), and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the result notification effect (miss). The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed across the entire display screen, while at the second timing, it may be displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards (see Figures 102(G) and 115(C)). By doing so, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be differentiated between background change effect A and the result notification effect (miss), thereby increasing interest.

[Form 16-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 128, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. In addition, during the crack display period in background change effect A, the game effect lamp 9 may light up in a manner corresponding to background change effect A, and during the crack display period in the result notification effect of the failure pattern, the game effect lamp 9 may light up in a manner corresponding to the result notification effect of the failure pattern. Moreover, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to background change effect A continues until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins, while the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the result notification effect of the failure pattern may continue until predetermined conditions are met, such as the stop of the variable display after the end of the result notification effect of the failure pattern, or the start of the next variable display. In this way, the player can be notified that they are not being controlled to an appropriately advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
When the result notification sequence indicates that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot state, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a second crack pattern. The type of background image differs between before the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a crack pattern during background change sequence A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed during the break sequence (see Figures 102(A) to 102(F) and Figures 103(I) and 103(K)). The display pattern of the background image also differs between before the result notification sequence indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot state and when the fragment image 006SG302A is displayed after it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot state (see Figures 115(A) to 115(B) and 115(D)).

By doing so, it is possible to execute background change effect A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked pattern, thereby surprising the player. Furthermore, by using the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and changing the display pattern of the background image before the notification of whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state.

[Form 18-1]
Background change effect A is an effect that includes a first predetermined part that displays a character image 006SG305, a second predetermined part that displays a glass plate image 006SG301 in a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a third predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images 006SG302 that mimic at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a pseudo-continuous effect that includes a fourth predetermined part that displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second crack pattern, and opens the falling movement of the movable body 32. The performance includes a fifth predetermined part that begins, and a sixth predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images 006SG302 that mimic at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. The execution timing differs between background change performance A and pseudo-continuous performance. In the cracking performance of the pseudo-continuous performance, the movable body 32 begins a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body 32 ends after the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden from the display screen of the image display device 5 (see Figures 102, 103, and 105).

By doing so, the background change effect A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, and the pseudo-consecutive effect can be executed at different timings, allowing for surprises to be given to the player at various times. Furthermore, by displaying the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and then operating the movable body 32 to display the fragment image 006SG302, a more impactful effect can be provided.

[Form 18-2]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect shown in Figures 120 and 122, it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301, and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks. In this case, the length of the period from when the first stage of cracks is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 to when the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the background change effect A and the length of the period from when the first stage of cracks is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 to when the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the pseudo-consecutive effect may differ. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying the crack pattern in the premonition image can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-1]
In background change effect A, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a shattered state, and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the pseudo-consecutive effect. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, while at the second timing, it is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards (see Figures 102(G) and 105(C)). This creates a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect, enhancing the overall appeal.

[Form 18-3-2]
The first action is a falling motion in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the performance position, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins when the movable body 32 is positioned toward the performance position (see Figure 105(C)). By linking the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 in this way, a sense of unity is created and the performance effect of the pseudo-consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 122, in the pseudo-consecutive effect, the period during which the movable body falls is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period). Here, the display period of the fragment image may also be longer than the period during which the movable body falls. By doing so, the effect of the pseudo-consecutive effect can be enhanced.

[Form 18-4]
Furthermore, as a different effect from the pseudo-consecutive win effect shown in Figure 122, a movable body suggestion effect may be made possible, which suggests that the game is controlled to a jackpot state by operating the movable body 32 during the execution of the variable display. When such a movable body suggestion effect is made possible, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the movable body operates as a pseudo-consecutive win effect, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. This prevents the effect of the pseudo-consecutive win effect from being diminished by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 19-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 128, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 128, the result notification effect of the success pattern is an effect in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 as the movable body 32 falls, and then a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The movable body 32 starts to rise during the fragment image display period and ends the rise before the end of the fragment image display period. Therefore, by operating the movable body 32 and displaying a crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 19-2]
Furthermore, for the background change effect A and the result notification effect shown in Figures 120 and 128, it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301, and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks. In this case, the length of the period from when the first stage of cracks is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in background change effect A until the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks, and the length of the period from when the first stage of cracks is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 until the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in result notification effect may differ. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying the crack pattern in the crack precursor image can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-1]
In the background change effect A, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a shattered state, and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the result notification effect (jackpot). The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, while at the second timing, it is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards (see Figures 102(G) and 113(E)). This creates a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the background change effect A and the result notification effect (jackpot), thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 19-3-2]
The second action involves the movable body 32 moving from the performance position towards the origin position, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins when the second action starts (see Figure 113(F)). By linking the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 in this way, a sense of unity is created, and the effect of the pseudo-consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-3]
Furthermore, regarding the result notification effect shown in Figure 128, the period during which the movable body rises is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period), and the display period of the fragment image is longer than the period during which the movable body rises, thus enhancing the effect of the result notification effect.

[Form 19-4]
Furthermore, as a different effect from the result notification effect shown in Figure 128, a movable body suggestion effect may be made possible, which suggests that the game is controlled to a jackpot state by operating the movable body 32 during the execution of the variable display. When such a movable body suggestion effect is made possible, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the movable body 32 operates as a result notification effect, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. This prevents the effect of the result notification effect from being diminished by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 20-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 125, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that players can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, the strong development effect A is an effect that displays a fragment image 006SG302 in response to the fall of the movable body 32, and the fragment image display period for displaying the fragment image 006SG302 is shorter than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A. Furthermore, in the strong development effect A, the movable body 32 can rise towards the position above the image display device 5, which is the origin position, after the fall, and the movable body 32 starts rising after the fragment image display period ends, so that an impressive effect can be provided.

[Form 20-2-1]
The first action is the movement of the movable body 32 from the origin position toward the performance position, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins when the first action starts (see Figure 109(B)). By linking the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 in this way, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form 20-2-2]
As shown in Figure 125, the strong development sequence A includes a whiteout pre-display period and a whiteout post-display period. Here, the length of the whiteout pre-display period and the movable body 32 fall period (movable body fall period) are made approximately the same, and the fragment image display period may be made longer than the movable body fall period. By doing so, the effect of the strong development sequence can be enhanced.

[Form 20-3]
Furthermore, as a different effect from the strong development effect A shown in Figure 125, a movable body suggestion effect may be made possible, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot state by operating the movable body 32 during the execution of the variable display. When such a movable body suggestion effect is made possible, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the movable body 32 operates as strong development effect A, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. This prevents the effect of the strong development effect A from being diminished by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 21-1]
In background change effect A and background change effect B, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern, the background image can be seen together with the glass plate image 006SG301, and the images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing area, which has a lower priority than the glass plate image 006SG301 when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in a cracked pattern, are displayed with first visibility, and the first background image 00 when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern in background change effect A 6SG081 is displayed with a second level of visibility that is lower than the first level of visibility. Images displayed in layers 1 to 3 image drawing areas that have a lower priority than the predetermined display layer when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a crack pattern in background change effect B are displayed with a second level of visibility over a predetermined range, and are displayed with a first level of visibility over a specific range different from the predetermined range (for example, the crack display area 006SG324) (see Figures 102(E), (F), and 104(C)).

By doing so, background change effects A and B, which display the glass plate image 006SG301 with different crack patterns, can be executed at different timings. This allows for surprising the player at various times, and furthermore, because the visibility of the background image visible along with the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the type of crack pattern, even effects that similarly display the glass plate image 006SG301 can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 21-2]
The boundary between a predetermined range and a specific range can be displayed with a third level of visibility that is higher than the first and second levels of visibility (see enlarged view in Figure 104(C)), thereby enhancing the effect of background change effect B.

[Form 21-3]
In the layer 9 image drawing area, which has a higher priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to display a first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) or an active display 006SG103 (corresponding image) that supports variable display. When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed over a predetermined range, but not superimposed over a specific range (see Figure 104(C)). This allows the corresponding image to be displayed appropriately even while the background change effect B is being executed.

[Form 21-4]
Furthermore, for background change effect B shown in Figure 121, the period for displaying the second-stage crack may be made longer than the period for displaying the first-stage crack. By doing so, it is possible to create a difference in how the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed between background change effect A and background change effect B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 119 and 120, the background change effect A and the dialogue予告 effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. For these background change effect A and dialogue予告 effect, the visibility of the background image may differ between the crack display period in background change effect A and the crack display period in dialogue予告 effect. Moreover, the crack display period in dialogue予告 effect may be made longer than the crack display period in background change effect A, and multiple types of crack patterns may be provided for the dialogue予告 effect (see Figures 102 and 101), so that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type second crack pattern is displayed than when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type second crack pattern is displayed. In this way, players will be drawn to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the dialogue予告演出 (preview/announcement) sequence, and even in sequences where the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the same way, a suitably different impression can be given, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22-2]
When the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type of second crack pattern is displayed, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type of second crack pattern is displayed, the visibility of the background image displayed below the predetermined display layer differs (see Figures 102 and 101). In this way, the way the glass plate image 006SG301 is presented can be varied, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-3]
It is possible to display a whiteout image 006SG303 of a specific color in both the background change effect A and the dialogue予告 effect, and it is preferable that the display patterns of the whiteout image 006SG303 differ between the background change effect A and the dialogue予告 effect (see, for example, Figures 102 and 101). By doing so, it is possible to create differences in the display patterns of the whiteout image 006SG303 and enhance the entertainment value.

[Form 23-1]
The image display device 5 is capable of displaying corresponding images that support variable display (for example, the first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) and the active display 006SG103) in a special display layer (for example, the layer 9 image drawing area), and can display the glass plate image 006SG301 in a first predetermined display layer (for example, the layer 9-1 image drawing area) which has a higher priority than the special display layer, and can display the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second predetermined display layer (for example, the layer 4 image drawing area) which has a lower priority than the special display layer, and the first predetermined display Special display layers with higher priority than the layers (for example, the layer 10 image drawing area) can display special information related to variable display (for example, small patterns), and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the first predetermined display layer in background change effect A, the visibility of the corresponding image is reduced, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the second predetermined display layer in background change effect B, the visibility of the corresponding image is not reduced, and the change effect is not executed when background change effect A is executed, and the change effect is executed when background change effect B is executed (see Figure 148).

By doing so, background change effects A and B can be executed at different timings, allowing for surprises to be given to players at various points in time. Furthermore, even in effects where the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the display layer and whether or not the change effect is executed differ, creating distinctly different impressions and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 23-2-1]
The transformation effect involves displaying a character image 006SG305 and having the character image 006SG305 act on a corresponding image to change the display mode of that image. The character image 006SG305 can be displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than a predetermined display layer (for example, the Layer 3 image drawing area) (see Figure 148). In this way, the transformation effect can be executed without significantly reducing the effect of the background transformation effect B.

[Form 23-2-2]
In response to the operation of character image 006SG305, a change-enhancing image (for example, effect image 006SG330) can be displayed on a display layer higher than the special display layer so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image (see Figure 148), thereby enabling the change effect to be suitably executed even while background change effect B is being performed.

[Form 24-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A have different display modes. The fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A includes images in a suggestive mode that indicate that a strong S reach effect (special effect) will be performed (for example, fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N), and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A (see Figures 102, 149, and 150).

By doing so, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed at different timings, allowing for surprises to be given to the player at various points. Furthermore, since the display manner of the fragment image 006SG302 differs between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, and the relationship between the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A and the effect executed afterward can be enhanced, even effects in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way can give suitably different impressions, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 24-2]
The special effects include a first special effect (for example, strong S reach effects J and N) and a second special effect (for example, strong S reach effects A and B). When the second special effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher than when the first special effect is executed. The suggestion form includes a first suggestion form that suggests the first special effect will be executed and a second suggestion form that suggests the second special effect will be executed (see Figures 149, 150, and 151). In this way, the degree of attention paid to the fragment image 006SG302 (for example, fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N) in strong development effect A can be increased.

[Form 24-3-1]
In the strong development sequence A, the fragment image 006SG302 includes a suggestive form and a transparent form that allows at least a portion of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer to be visible, with the transparent fragment image 006SG302 being displayed more often than the suggestive fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 151). This increases the level of attention paid to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development sequence A.

[Form 24-3-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 can be rotated, and in the strong development sequence A, it is preferable that the transparent fragment image 006SG302 rotates more than the suggestive fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 151). This increases the level of attention given to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development sequence A.

[Form 24-4]
The strong development sequence A includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part, in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 in suggestive form and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in transparent form are displayed, and in the second predetermined part, one fragment image 006SG302 in suggestive form and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in transparent form are displayed (see Figure 150). In this way, the degree of attention paid to the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development sequence A can be increased.

[Form 25]
Furthermore, the cut-in effect shown in Figure 127 is an effect that makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and fragment image 006SG302) invisible with a whiteout image 006SG303, then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image, and further makes it visible by ending the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. The period during which the operation-prompting effect is executed before the cut-in effect is longer than the initial whiteout display period during which the glass plate image 006SG301A (and fragment image 006SG302) becomes invisible in the cut-in effect. Therefore, by creating a build-up to the cracking effect with the operation-prompting effect and creating a sense of speed during the fragment image display period, a suitable cracking pattern can be achieved.

[Form 26]
Furthermore, the cut-in effect shown in Figure 127 is an effect that makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and fragment image 006SG302) invisible with a whiteout image 006SG303, then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image, and further makes it visible by ending the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Note that the fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect may be longer than the execution period of the operation promotion effect. In this way, the crack pattern can be made more impressive.

[Form 27]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, at least a portion of the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the display period of the fragment image overlap, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is shorter than the display period of the fragment image. Furthermore, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 consists of an early whiteout display period and a late whiteout display period. Note that the late whiteout display period may be longer than the early whiteout display period. In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the beginning of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302, which has just started to be displayed, while preventing the whiteout image 006SG303 from being emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 28]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed to conceal the beginning of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, making it invisible to the player. Here, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be hidden once a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display and the fragment image 006SG302 has moved sufficiently, so that the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. This prevents the player from feeling any discomfort when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins.

[Form 29]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 118 to 128, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, thereby obscuring the beginning of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 during the early whiteout display period, and the fragment image 006SG302, which has just started to be displayed, from being visible to the player. In the later whiteout display period, when the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 is increased, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, in the later whiteout display period, the effect of the fragment image 006SG302, which has been displayed after a sufficient amount of time has elapsed since the start of display, can be enhanced.

[Form 30]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in Figures 120 and 124, the display of the fragment images 006SG302 is started from the execution timing of the cracking effect, and these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a moving manner. Here, the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 may differ between the late whiteout display period in background change effect A and the late whiteout display period in the weak development effect. By doing so, the effect of the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed in a moving manner during the late whiteout display period of background change effect A and the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed in a moving manner during the late whiteout display period of the weak development effect can be enhanced.

[Form 31]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in Figures 120 and 124, the display of the fragment images 006SG302 starts from the execution timing of the cracking effect, and it is possible to display these fragment images 006SG302 in a moving manner. Here, background change effect A may be an effect that can be executed when the game state is the normal state, and the weak development effect may be an effect that can be executed when the game state is the time-saving state or the probability change state. Moreover, the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different in the later whiteout display period of background change effect A and the later whiteout display period of the weak development effect. By doing so, the effect of the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed in a moving manner during the later whiteout display period of background change effect A and the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed in a moving manner during the later whiteout display period of the weak development effect can be enhanced.

[Form 32]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 118 to 128, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 using the cracking effect illumination data table for the duration of the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and from the timing of the end of the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the effect control of the game effect lamp 9 uses the illumination data table corresponding to the background image of each effect, so that the illumination control of the game effect lamp 9 when the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks can be suitably performed.

[Form 33]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 118 to 128, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the display period of the fragment image overlap at least partially. Speakers 8L and 8R output cracking effect sounds corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 from the timing of the start of the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 34]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the cracking animation patterns (crack patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed before the glass breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass breaks without any cracks being displayed. Here, the output of sounds corresponding to the cracking animation (sounds corresponding to the display of fragment images 006SG302) from speakers 8L and 8R may differ depending on whether the cracking animation is performed using the first pattern or the second pattern. In this way, different impression patterns can be provided for each cracking animation.

[Form 35]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the cracking animation patterns (cracking patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed before the glass breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass breaks without any cracks being displayed. Here, if the cracking animation for the result notification animation of the successful pattern is to be implemented using the second pattern, the cracking animation for the result notification animation of the successful pattern may output sounds from speakers 8L and 8R that correspond to the state being controlled to be a jackpot game state. In this way, different impression cracking animation patterns can be provided depending on the state.

[Form 36]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the cracking animation patterns (cracking patterns of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 before the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks without any crack being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. Here, when the cracking effect is performed in the first pattern described above, cracking sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the display of glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301, and fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, when the cracking effect is performed in the second pattern described above, glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301, is not displayed, and cracking sound effects are not output from speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the display of fragment image 006SG302. In this way, cracking patterns with different impressions can be provided.

[Form 37]
For the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect shown in Figures 118 to 128, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 is output from speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 (crack effect sound) may be output at a louder volume than the sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301. This creates a contrast between when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, making the cracking pattern more memorable.

[Form 38]
As shown in Figure 145, in the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the speaker 8L and 8R may output a character voice as a sound corresponding to the displayed character, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, the speaker 8L and 8R may output a crack effect sound as a sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, a distinction is made between when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, making the crack pattern more memorable.

[Form 39]
There are two display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., crack patterns B, G). In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value (e.g., "30%)", so the operation speed of the first-size fragment image 006SG302 and the second-size fragment image 006SG302, which is smaller than the first size, are different. In the second pattern, the amount of variation is 0 (e.g., "0%)", so the operation speed of the third-size fragment image 006SG302 and the fourth-size fragment image 006SG302, which is smaller than the third size, are the same (see Figures 130 and 131).

In this way, the first pattern exhibits different animation effects depending on size; smaller fragment images 006SG302 fly faster, while larger fragment images 006SG302 fall somewhat slower, resulting in a more realistic breakage pattern. This can be used when a realistic movement is desired. The second pattern, regardless of size, exhibits the same flying and falling patterns for all fragments, allowing for the selection of the most suitable breakage pattern for each scene.

[Form 40]
The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it gradually falls after the display starts. There are two display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack patterns A and C) and a second pattern (e.g., crack patterns D to F). The first and second patterns differ in their gravity settings, resulting in different falling speeds for the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 130 and 131). By varying the parameters in this way and thus changing the falling speed of the fragment image 006SG302, a variety of patterns can be constructed, enhancing the overall enjoyment.

[Form 41]
There are two display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., crack patterns B, G). The setting of the gravity direction differs between the first and second patterns, resulting in different directions of movement when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figures 130 and 131). By varying the parameters in this way and changing the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves, a variety of patterns can be constructed, enhancing the overall appeal.

[Form 42]
There are three display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A), a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern B), and a third pattern (e.g., crack pattern C). For crack pattern A, crack pattern B, and crack pattern C, the first parameter, "gravity," is common to all three, set to "0." However, the second parameter, "strength," differs: "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C (see Figures 130 and 131). In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302, while varying the second parameter, a variety of patterns can be constructed, thereby enabling the creation of stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 43]
There are three display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern E), a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern F), and a third pattern (e.g., crack pattern G). For example, crack pattern E (first pattern) and crack pattern F (second pattern) share the first parameter of "gravity" as "0," while the second parameter of "strength" differs, with crack pattern E being "3" and crack pattern F being "5." Crack pattern F (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern) differ, with the first parameter of "gravity" being "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, while the second parameter of "strength" is common to both (see Figures 130 and 131). In this way, by creating common parts for each pattern while using different parameters, it is possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 44]
There are two display patterns for the cracked image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern A). The cracked image using the first pattern can be displayed in normal conditions, while the cracked image using the second pattern can be displayed in special conditions that are more advantageous than normal conditions (e.g., time-saving conditions, probability-changing conditions). It is preferable that the type of background image displayed in the display layer with lower priority than the specific display layer differs before and after the cracked image using the first pattern, and that the type of background image displayed in the display layer with lower priority than the specific display layer differs before and after the cracked image using the second pattern (see, for example, Figures 102 and 103). In this way, different impressions can be given when using crack patterns A to G in normal conditions and when using crack patterns A to G in special conditions, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 45]
Background change effect A is an effect that includes displaying a broken image (for example, a fragment image 006SG302) in a first mode and then changing it to a second mode. The image display device 5 displays an effect image (for example, a whiteout image 006SG303) when displaying the broken image in the first mode, in common with the normal state and special states that are more advantageous than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state, a probability change state), and hides the effect image at the timing before displaying the broken image in the second mode (see, for example, Figures 102 and 103). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display portion of the broken image, which prevents the broken image from appearing unnatural.

[Form 46]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the cracking animation patterns (cracking patterns of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 before the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks without any crack being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. Here, the first pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in the normal state, and the second pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in the time-saving state or the probability-changing state. The fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the cracking effect and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the cracking effect may both be displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least the X-axis and Z-axis directions. Furthermore, the speed at which the fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the cracking effect and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the cracking effect move may differ. In this way, the effect of the effect during the time-saving state or probability-changing state can be enhanced by using cracking patterns that do not disrupt the tempo of the time-saving state or probability-changing state.

[Form 47]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the cracking animation patterns (cracking patterns of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 before the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks without any crack being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. Here, the first pattern of the cracking animation can be executed in the normal state, and the second pattern of the cracking animation can be executed in the time-saving state or the probability variation state, and the proportion of when the game is controlled to a jackpot state may be different depending on whether the first pattern of the cracking animation is executed or the second pattern of the cracking animation is executed. In this way, since the proportion of when the game is controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on the cracking pattern, attention can be drawn to each cracking pattern.

[Form 48]
Multiple first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed on a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), multiple second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed on a specific display layer with higher priority than the predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area), and on a special display layer with higher priority than the specific display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) Special information related to variable display (e.g., small patterns) can be displayed, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 overlap in at least part, the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is a form in which a character is drawn, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent form in which at least part of the background image displayed on a display layer lower than a specific display layer can be recognized (see Figure 151). In this way, by overlapping the display periods of two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display forms, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 49]
Multiple first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed on a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), and multiple second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed on a specific display layer with higher priority than the predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area), and a special display layer with higher priority than the specific display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) can be displayed. Special information related to variable display (e.g., small patterns) can be displayed in the image rendering area, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 overlap at least partially, and the display modes of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 are different, with the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 being longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 151). In this way, by overlapping the display periods of the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 50]
Multiple fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in specific display layers (for example, the Layer 5-1 image drawing area and the Layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information related to variable display (for example, small patterns) can be displayed in a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layers (for example, the Layer 10 image drawing area), the movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose on the image display device 5, the display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 overlap at least partially, and the amount of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1, which is a display area on which the movable body 32 does not superimpose, is greater than the amount of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2 on which the movable body 32 superimposes (see Figure 151). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 can be suitably displayed while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen.

[Form 51]
Multiple fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed on a specific display layer (for example, the Layer 5-1 image drawing area or the Layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information related to variable display (for example, a small pattern) can be displayed on a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, the Layer 10 image drawing area), the movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the movement of the movable body 32 The display period is such that at least a portion of it overlaps, and the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it moves from the first display area L1 where the movable body 32 does not overlap to the second display area L2 where the movable body 32 overlaps, and the second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it moves within the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2 (see Figure 151). In this way, by providing fragment images 006SG302 that pass through the area where the movable body 32 overlaps, while allowing the viewer to recognize that the object has broken by using fragment images 006SG302 that do not enter the area where the movable body 32 overlaps, a dynamic presentation can be provided.

[Form 52]
Multiple fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed on specific display layers (for example, the Layer 5-1 image drawing area and the Layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information related to variable display (for example, small patterns) can be displayed on a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layers (for example, the Layer 10 image drawing area), the movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose on the image display device 5, the display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 overlap at least partially, and the fragment images 006SG302 continue to be displayed even after the movable body 32, which is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5, has moved to a position where it is no longer superimposed on the display screen (see Figure 151). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed appropriately so as not to be missed while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

[Form 53]
In the reach suggestion effect, the image display device 5 can display multiple second-type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302A) when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern, and the second-type fragment images 006SG302 have a shorter duration of time before disappearing from the display screen than the first-type fragment images 006SG302 (see Figures 106 and 107). In this way, the effect of the effect using crack pattern A can be enhanced.

[Form 54]
There are two display patterns for the cracked image (for example, fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E). The first pattern displays a first type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern displays a second type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305. The type of background image displayed on display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer differs before the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, and the type of background image displayed on display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer differs before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 102, 103, 106-108). By doing this, a specific character (for example, character image 006SG305) appears in common across multiple crack patterns, thus increasing the level of attention given to that specific character.

[Form 55]
There are two display patterns for the cracked image (for example, fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E). The first pattern is a pattern that displays a first type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern that displays a second type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305. When the image display device 5 displays a cracked image using the first pattern, it is linked to the operation of the character image 006SG305. When displaying a broken image using the second pattern, an effect image (for example, a whiteout image 006SG303) is displayed, and the effect image is hidden at a predetermined timing after the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The effect image is displayed in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and the effect image (for example, a whiteout image 006SG303) is hidden at a specific timing after the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figures 102, 103, 106-108). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display portion of the fragment image 006SG302, preventing it from appearing unnatural.

[Form 56]
There are two display patterns for the broken image (for example, fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (for example, broken pattern E) and a second pattern (for example, broken pattern A). The first pattern displays multiple first-type broken images in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern displays multiple second-type broken images in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The first-type fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed and moves over the display period of the first-type fragment image 006SG302, while the second-type fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves without changing speed over the display period of the second-type fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 106, 107, 102, and 103). In this way, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves can be changed according to the type of crack pattern, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[Form 57]
There are two display patterns for the cracked image (for example, fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E). The first pattern displays a first type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern displays a second type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305. The expected level of control to a jackpot state differs depending on whether the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern or the second pattern (see Figures 102, 103, 106, and 107). This increases the sense of anticipation for the character image 006SG305 and enhances interest by drawing attention to the type of cracked pattern displayed after the character image 006SG305 is shown.

Although embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and any modifications or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are also included.

(Variation 1)
For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the speed of the fragment images 006SG302 after the initial whiteout display period of each effect is constant (V1 for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, and result notification effect, and V0 for strong development effect B and cut-in effect). However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and as a modified example 1, the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed as break effects in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may have different movement speeds (display speeds) in the left-right direction (also called the X-axis direction), up-down direction (also called the Y-axis direction), and towards the player (Z-axis direction) within the display area of the image display device 5.
The degrees may be different.

For example, as shown in Figure 141(A), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as fragment effects for the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and result notification effect may include fragment images 006SG302A that move at a speed Vx1 in the X-axis direction, a speed 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed 0 in the Z-axis direction; fragment images 006SG302B that move at a speed 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed Vy1 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed 0 in the Z-axis direction; and fragment images 006SG302C that move at a speed 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed Vz1 in the Z-axis direction. In addition, there may be fragment images 006SG302 that move in two directions out of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and fragment images 006SG302 that move in three directions out of these three directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 141(B), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and the breakage effect of the cut-in effect may include fragment images 006SG302A that move at a speed of Vx2 in the X-axis direction, a speed of 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed of 0 in the Z-axis direction; fragment images 006SG302B that move at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed of Vy2 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed of 0 in the Z-axis direction; and fragment images 006SG302C that move at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed of 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed of Vz2 in the Z-axis direction. In addition, there may also be fragment images 006SG302 that move in two directions out of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and fragment images 006SG302 that move in three directions.

Furthermore, since movement of the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction means enlarging the fragment image 006SG302, the speed of movement of the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction is also called the enlargement speed.

Comparing the fragment images 006SG302A (which progresses only in the X-axis direction), 006SG302B (which progresses only in the Y-axis direction), and 006SG302C (which progresses only in the Z-axis direction) in each presentation, as shown in Figure 141(C), in this modified example 1, unlike fragment images 006SG302A and 006SG302B, fragment image 006SG302C is only displayed enlarged toward the player, so the period from the start to the end of display is set to be longer than that of fragment images 006SG302A and 006SG302B. In other words, in each cracking effect, the enlarged fragment image 006SG302C is displayed, creating a sense of depth for the player. Furthermore, since the fragment image 006SG302A continues to create a sense of depth even after the display of fragment image 006SG302B has finished, the effect of the cracking effect when fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 141(D), the first consecutive crack effect, second consecutive crack effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and result notification effect are designated as effect group X, and the strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and cut-in effect are designated as effect group Y. The fragment images 006SG302C displayed as crack effects in effect group X and the fragment images 006SG302C displayed as crack effects in effect group Y are then used. In comparison, in this modified example 1, the Z-axis movement speed Vz1 of the fragment image 006SG302C in the performance group X is set to be faster than the Z-axis movement speed Vz2 of the fragment image 006SG302C in the performance group Y (Vz1 > Vz2), resulting in a longer display period from start to finish for the fragment image 006SG302C in the performance group Y than for the fragment image 006SG302C in the performance group X. Therefore, in this modified example 1, the first consecutive crack effect, the second consecutive crack effect, the dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect can be executed at different timings for background change effect A and strong development effect B, respectively. This allows for surprising the player by drawing their attention to these effects at various timings. Furthermore, since the time required for the fragment image 006SG302C to disappear differs between the effects included in effect group X and the effects included in effect group Y, even effects that execute the same crack effect and display the fragment image 006SG302 can give the player a suitably different impression depending on the effect, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, in this modified example 1, the duration required for the fragment image 006SG302C to disappear is set longer for the effects included in effect group Y than for the effects included in effect group X. Therefore, when the cracking effect is executed as an effect included in effect group Y, the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302C can be enhanced compared to when the cracking effect is executed as an effect included in effect group X.

Furthermore, in this modified example 1, a form was exemplified in which fragment images 006SG302 are provided that move (enlarge) toward the player as fragment images 006SG302 for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 that move (enlarge) toward the player may be designed so that their visibility changes as they enlarge from the start timing to the end timing of the display. By doing so, the effect of the effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, in this modified example 1, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302A which progresses only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B which progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C which progresses only in the Z-axis direction, in the first consecutive breakage effect, the second consecutive breakage effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, as shown in Figure 141(C), the fragment image 006SG302C is from the start of display. While the example given illustrates a configuration where the display period is longer than that of fragment images 006SG302A and 006SG302B, the present invention is not limited to this. The display period from start to finish of fragment image 006SG302C, which progresses only in the Z-axis direction in a specific effect (e.g., a cut-in effect), may be longer than the display period from start to finish of fragment images 006SG302A and B, which move only in the X-axis or Y-axis direction in a predetermined effect different from the specific effect (e.g., a pseudo-sequential effect). This allows for differences in the display patterns of fragment image 006SG302 between the specific effect and the predetermined effect (in the above example, a cut-in effect and a pseudo-sequential effect), thereby enhancing the appeal of these specific and predetermined effects.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment and this modified example 1, fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, and these fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by moving them, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and fragment images displayed as predetermined effects (for example, pseudo-consecutive effect or background change effect A) may be used as examples. Regarding image 006SG302, all fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by completely moving them outside the display area of the image display device 5. For fragment images 006SG302 displayed as part of a specific effect (e.g., a strong development effect B or a cut-in effect), some fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by completely moving them outside the display area of the image display device 5, while other fragment images 006SG302 may be hidden while moving outside the display area of the image display device 5. This allows for differences in the display patterns of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a predetermined effect and a specific effect, thereby enhancing the appeal of these specific and predetermined effects.

In this modified example 1, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as part of the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and result notification effect are shown as moving in multiple directions along the X, Y, and Z axes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the starting position of the display of the fragment images 006SG302 may differ between the first consecutive break effect and the second consecutive break effect. By doing so, differences in how the fragment images 006SG302 are presented between the first and second consecutive break effects can be created, enhancing the entertainment value.

(Variation 2)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a configuration in which a glass plate image 006SG301A breaks as part of the cracking effect for each effect, thereby displaying multiple fragment images 006SG302, was illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed as part of the cracking effect for each effect may vary depending on the timing.

For example, as shown in Figure 142(A), the period from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is defined as the early whiteout display period, and the period following the early whiteout display period, in which a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than that of the early whiteout display period is displayed, is defined as the late whiteout display period, defined as length L2 (L2 > L1).

Furthermore, the fragment image display period is comprised of a first fragment image display period of length L3 (L3 > L1 + L2), which is the period from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A and is longer than the sum of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period; and a second fragment image display period of length L4 (L3 + L4 > L1 + L2), which is a period adjacent to the first fragment image display period.

Here, as shown in Figure 142(B), by displaying more fragment images 006SG302 during the second fragment image display period than during the first fragment image display period, the enjoyment of the gameplay involving the breaking effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, in this modified version 2, during the first fragment image display period, the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the whiteout image 006SG303 during the period that overlaps with the early whiteout display period, while the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303 during the period that overlaps with the late whiteout display period. Since the length L3 of the first fragment image display period is longer than the total length of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period (L1 + L2), the fragment image 006SG302 is made invisible to the player during the early whiteout display period, preventing the player from feeling any discomfort with the cracking effect due to the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. In addition, during the late whiteout display period, the whiteout image 006SG303 is emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302, which prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the cracking effect.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the fragment effects for the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, reach suggestion effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are transparent, while the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the fragment effects for the pseudo-consecutive effect and weak development effect are not transparent. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the fragment effects for the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may all be transparent, or none of them may be transparent.

(Variation 3)
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 143 as a third variation, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the fragment effects of the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect changes its transparency according to the progress of the effect (in this third variation, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 changes depending on the timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302). The time can be set to 0 at the beginning, T1 at the end of the whiteout display period (T1 > 0), T2 at the end of the later whiteout display period (T2 > T1), and T3 at the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 (T3 > T2). By doing so, for example, the effect of the display can be enhanced when the fragment image 006SG302 has been sufficiently scattered on the display area of the image display device 5 just before the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302.

In particular, in this modified example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. Therefore, the player can easily see the image displayed as the result of the breaking effect through the fragment image 006SG302, thus preventing a decrease in the effect of the effect due to the image being obscured by the fragment image 006SG302 and becoming difficult to see.

Furthermore, in this modified example 3, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect is shown to have increasing transparency as the effect progresses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect may also have decreasing transparency as the effect progresses.

(Variation 4)
Furthermore, in Modification 3, as a cracking effect for the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, an example was given in which the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and as Modification 4 is shown in Figures 144(A) and 144(B), The transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on whether the effect being shown is the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, or the result notification effect. Furthermore, even for the same effect, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on the game state (Figure 144 illustrates the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the weak development effect).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 144, in background change effect A and weak development effect, after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks as a breaking effect and the display of fragment image 006SG302 begins, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player when the whiteout display period ends. Here, since the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effect in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effect in weak development effect have different transparency levels when visible to the player, even though both effects involve the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, it is possible to create differences in the content of the effects. Therefore, the effect of the effects can be enhanced when the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the cracking effect in background change effect A, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the cracking effect in weak development effect.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 144, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as background change effect A when performed in the normal state with the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as a weak development effect when performed in the time-saving state or probability-changing state, these fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as background change effect A when performed in the normal state and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as a weak development effect when performed in the time-saving state or probability-changing state are also compared. Since the transparency of 302 and 302 differs when they are visible to the player, even though both depict the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, differences in the animation can be created. Therefore, the effect of the animation can be enhanced when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a background change animation A in the normal state, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a weak development animation in the time-saving or probability-changing state.

(Variation 5)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, examples were given in which a cracking effect is executed as an effect within the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect as a result of a character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect, a sound corresponding to the displayed character (for example, a character voice) may be output. In this way, the cracking effect can be made more distinct when a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301A and when a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. In particular, as shown in Figure 145 as Modification 5, when a character voice corresponding to the character is output when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect, the character voice and the cracking sound should be output at the same volume (Vol 1 in the example of Figure 145) so that at least a portion of the output period of the character voice and the output period of the cracking sound overlap.

Furthermore, in this modified example 5, as shown in Figure 145, the cracking sound output when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed may be output at a louder volume (Vol. 2 in the example of Figure 145) than the cracking sound output when the crack is displayed. This allows for a clearer distinction between the cracking effect when the crack appears on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. Moreover, the cracking effect is executed as part of background change effect A or reach suggestion effect, meaning that these background change effect A and reach suggestion effects were executed in a successful pattern, and the cracking pattern of these cracking effects can be clearly perceived by the player.

(Variation 6)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as a cracking effect for the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, an example was given in which the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A is moved and displayed until the end of the display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect for these effects may be rotated in addition to being moved during the period from the start to the end of the display. Moreover, the number of rotations of the fragment image 006SG302 from the start to the end of the display may differ depending on which effect the cracking effect is performed in.

For example, as shown in Figure 146 as Modification 6, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive breakage effect, the second consecutive breakage effect, and the dialogue予告 effect rotates R3 times from the start to the end of display. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and strong development effect A rotates R2 (R3 > 2) times, which is fewer than R3, from the start to the end of display. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect rotates R1 (R2 > R1) times, which is fewer than R2, from the start to the end of display.

Thus, in this modified version 6, even between effects with different timings that can be executed during variable display, having an effect where the number of rotations from the start to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302 is the same increases the correlation within each combination of effects, such as the combination of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the dialogue予告 effect; the combination of background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and strong development effect A; and the combination of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. Therefore, the effect of the effects within these combinations can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as described above, in this modified version 6, the number of rotations from the start to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302 differs depending on which type of cracking effect is being displayed. In particular, for example, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in a pseudo-consecutive effect has a greater number of rotations from the start to the end of display than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in a cut-in effect. Therefore, the variations of cracking effects that are executed as a first consecutive cracking effect, a second consecutive cracking effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect can be increased, and the effect of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be enhanced.

In this modified example 6, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect are shown as examples of rotating displays. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. While the fragment images 006SG302 are rotating, when the fragment images 006SG302 reach a first rotation angle, the player can view the background image through the fragment images 006SG302, and when the fragment images 006SG302 reach a second rotation angle, at least a part of the background image may be made invisible to the player through the fragment images 006SG302. By doing so, the effect of the display when these fragment images 006SG302 are shown can be enhanced. Furthermore, as described above, if the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 changes depending on the rotation angle of the fragment image 006SG302, instead of rotating all fragment images 006SG302 synchronously, at least some of the fragment images 006SG302 may be rotated at a different angle from the other fragment images 006SG302. For example, when fragment image 006SG302 has the first rotation angle described above, some of the other fragment images 006SG302 may have the second rotation angle described above, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

(Variation 7)
Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a pseudo-consecutive effect in which a crack is displayed in the image display area of the image display device 5 and then a crack effect is executed in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32, the present invention is not limited thereto. As a modified example 7, as shown in Figure 147(A), the pseudo-consecutive effect may be such that, after a preliminary operation period in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the movable body 32 falls, a crack is displayed as part of the crack display period. Moreover, as shown in Figure 147(B), the crack display period may be composed of a pre-crack display period and a post-crack display period, as in the background change effect A of the above embodiment, so that the crack is displayed in two stages before the crack effect is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 147(B), the length of the pre-crack display period in the pseudo-continuous effect may be made different from the pre-crack display period in the background change effect A of the above embodiment. By doing so, even though the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks in two stages in both the background change effect A of the above embodiment and the pseudo-continuous effect of this modified example 7, by differentiating the period until the second stage of cracks is displayed between the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect, the number of effect patterns until the crack effect is executed can be increased, thereby enhancing the effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301.

Furthermore, in this modified example 7, the pseudo-consecutive effect is exemplified as an effect in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the character's actions and the movable body 32 operate, as in the background change effect A in the above embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the reach suggestion effect may also be an effect in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the character's actions and the movable body 32 operate, as in the background change effect A in the above embodiment. In this case as well, the crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may consist of a pre-crack display period and a post-crack display period, and the length of the pre-crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may be different from the pre-crack display period of the background change effect A in the above embodiment. In this way, even though the background change effect A of the above embodiment and the reach suggestion effect of this modified example 7 both involve cracking the glass plate image 006SG301 in two stages, by differentiating the time until the second stage of cracking is displayed between background change effect A and reach suggestion effect, the number of effect patterns until the cracking effect is executed can be increased, thereby enhancing the effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301.

(Variation 8)
In the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and glass plate image 006SG301A, which serve as images indicating impending breakage, are shown in the Layer 4 image drawing area and Layer 5 image drawing area, which are lower than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold storage display area 5U. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the glass plate image 006SG301, which serves as an image indicating impending breakage, and the glass plate image 006SG301A, which serves as an alternative image to the glass plate image 006SG301, may be displayed not only in the Layer 4 image drawing area, which is lower than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold storage display area 5U, but also in the Layer 4 image drawing area, which is higher than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold storage display area 5U.

For example, in this modified example 8, as shown in Figures 148(A1) to (A5), in background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a layer image rendering area higher than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U. Furthermore, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the foreground, cracks are displayed radiating outwards from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the pre-crack state (see Figure 148(A2)), when the cracks gradually radiate outwards and change into the crack state, a portion of the cracks can be displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U (see Figure 148(A3)).

If a portion of the crack overlaps the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U in this manner, the visibility of the first hold display 006SG101 (second hold display) and the active display 006SG103 may be reduced if they are already displayed. Therefore, in this case, the execution of the active change effect, which changes the display color of the active display 006SG103, is restricted, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 does not change.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 148 (B1) to (B5), in background change effect B, as explained in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305 can be displayed in a layer image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U. Furthermore, in response to the character image 006SG305 appearing in the upper right of the screen, a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including a small fracture area is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 148 (B1)). Then, in response to the character image 006SG305 beginning to descend, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the existing crack display area 006SG324, thereby gradually changing the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 148 (B2)).

However, in this case, since the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a layer 4 image rendering area lower than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U, even if the crack were to extend and extend into the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U, the crack would not be displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U.

Furthermore, even when the character image 006SG305 moves across the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, the effect image 006SG330 may be displayed in a layer image rendering area higher than the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, rather than overlapping the character image 006SG305 (see Figure 148 (B3)). Subsequently, the active change effect is executed, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes (see Figure 148 (B4)).

Thus, in background change effect A, where the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U may decrease when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the execution period overlaps with the active change effect (an effect using a changing character), thereby restricting the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103. On the other hand, in background change effect B, where the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U does not decrease when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103 is enabled. Therefore, even though both effects display a cracked premonition image, the display layer and the presence or absence of the active change effect execution differ, creating a suitably different impression and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Note that the target of the change effect may also be the first hold display 006SG101 or the second hold display.

Furthermore, in background change effect A, a portion of the cracks is displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, reducing the visibility of these areas. In such a situation, if the display pattern of the hold display or active display changes, it becomes difficult to determine whether the change is due to the effect or the crack pattern, potentially causing distrust among players. Therefore, it is preferable to enable the background change effect in background change effect B, where the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U does not decrease even when the crack pattern is present.

Furthermore, in this modified example 8, while the execution of the active change effect is restricted when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state during background change effect A, the active change effect can be executed after, for example, the cracking effect is executed, the fragment image 006SG302 scatters, and the whiteout image 006SG303 becomes invisible. In other words, it may be executed at a timing different from the original execution timing (for example, at the start of the variation or during a reach). Alternatively, the active change effect may be executed in a simplified form (for example, without displaying the change character, subtly changing the active display at the timing shown in Figure 148 (A3)). By performing the change effect during a period that does not overlap with the period when the active display becomes difficult to see due to the cracking effect, the effects of both the cracking effect and the change effect can be enhanced.

(Variation 9)
Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates a form in which it is determined that when strong development performance A is performed, it will develop into strong S reach performance A, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the break performance may include fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N, etc., which suggest that one of multiple types of strong S reach performances A, B, J, and N with different levels of expectation will be performed.

To explain in more detail, as shown in Figures 149(A) to (F), in the strong development sequence A, a cracking sequence is executed. After the whiteout image 006SG303 finishes displaying and before the fragment image 006SG302 finishes displaying and disappears, fragment image 006SG342M, suggesting that strong S-reach sequence A or strong S-reach sequence B will be executed, fragment image 006SG342J, suggesting that strong S-reach sequence J will be executed, fragment image 006SG342N, suggesting that strong S-reach sequence N will be executed, and multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed (see Figure 149(G)).

Then, if fragment image 006SG342M remains displayed alone while fragment images 006SG342J and 006SG342N remain hidden, and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is announced that Strong S Reach Performance A or Strong S Reach Performance B will be executed (see Figure 150 (A1), (A2), (A2')), and if fragment image 006SG342J remains displayed alone while the other fragment images 006SG If fragments 342M and 006SG342N are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, the player is notified that the Strong S Reach演出 J will be executed (see Figures 150 (B1) and (B2)). If fragment image 006SG342N is displayed alone while other fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342J are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, the player is notified that the Strong S Reach演出 N will be executed (see Figures 150 (C1) and (C2)).

By doing so, the correlation between the fragment image in the strong development sequence A and the strong S-reach sequence that follows can be enhanced. Therefore, even in sequences where the same fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a distinctly different impression can be created, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this modified version, the type of strong S-reach animation being performed is indicated by non-transparent fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N, which display the faces of characters of the type appearing in various strong S-reach animations. However, the indication is not limited to the above; various fragment images can be used as long as they allow for the identification of the type of strong S-reach animation being performed. For example, fragment images displaying relevant information such as the reach title name or background image that allows for the identification of the type of strong S-reach animation may also be used.

Furthermore, the type of execution is indicated by the display of one of the multiple fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N while others remain hidden. However, this indication may also be conveyed by, for example, displaying one of the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, or 006SG342N in a larger size, in a different color, displaying an effect image, or displaying it in an emphasized manner. Alternatively, the strong S-reach animation may be executed while two or more fragment images remain displayed.

(Variation 10)
Furthermore, although the above embodiment illustrates a configuration in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in a single layer 5 image drawing area, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be displayed in two or more layer image drawing areas.

For example, in this modified example 10, as shown in Figure 151, among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 that can be displayed in the crack pattern F used in the strong development effect A, the larger fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a transparent manner in the layer 5-1 image drawing area, and the smaller fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in an opaque manner in the layer 5-2 image drawing area, which is higher than the layer 5-1 image drawing area. In this case, the glass plate image 006SG301, which is displayed as a crack premonition image, is displayed in both the layer 5-1 and layer 5-2 image drawing areas at the crack timing. Furthermore, one of the larger fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area is depicted with the face of a character corresponding to the type of strong S reach effect, as explained in modified example 9.

Thus, one of the larger fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the Layer 5-1 image rendering area depicts a character, while the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the Layer 5-2 image rendering area is transparent, allowing at least a portion of the background image displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, which is lower than the Layer 5-2 rendering area, to be recognized. By overlapping the display periods of the two fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes, a memorable effect can be provided.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 151(B), the layer 5-1 image rendering area and the layer 5-2 image rendering area consist of a first display area L1 that does not overlap with the movable body 32 when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, and a second display area L2 enclosed by a dashed line representing the movable body 32. When the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the amount of fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1 is greater than the amount of fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2. This allows for the optimal display of the fragment image 006SG302 even when the movable body 32 overlaps with the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, one of the multiple fragment images 006SG302, specifically the first fragment image 006SG302, is displayed in a manner that it moves from the first display area L1 into the second display area L2, while one of the multiple fragment images 006SG302, specifically the second fragment image 006SG302, is displayed in a manner that it moves within the first display area L1 without entering the second display area L2. In this way, by providing fragment images 006SG302 that pass through the first display area L1, while simultaneously conveying the idea of breakage through fragment images 006SG302 that do not enter the second display area L2, a dynamic and engaging presentation can be achieved.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates a form in which a glass plate image 006SG301, which mimics a glass plate, is applied as an example of a crack precursor image, the present invention is not limited to this, and crack precursor images mimicking objects other than glass, such as panels, doors, or rocks, may also be applied. Also, when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301, the transmittance may be displayed at 100% or less than 100%. Additionally, the crack precursor images may be displayed in multiple layer image rendering areas, allowing for individual crack effects to be displayed.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as an example of a fragment image, a configuration was shown in which a glass fragment image 006SG302, which mimics a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 as a pre-breakage image, can be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as an image that mimics at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a fragment image that mimics an image different from the glass plate image 006SG301 may also be displayed in part. Also, although the fragment image is displayed on a higher display layer than the pre-breakage image, it may also be displayed on a lower display layer than the pre-breakage image.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment specified crack patterns A to G as the crack patterns for the crack effect, the present invention is not limited to these, and it may be possible to perform crack effects based on other types of crack patterns.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which the crack effect can be executed during the execution of a pre-announcement effect or other effect that suggests the likelihood of a big win, the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect may be executed independently and separately from other effects. In this case, the likelihood of a big win may differ depending on the type of crack pattern, so that the crack effect may be executed as one of the pre-announcement effects, or it may be executed as a change effect when the effect stage, effect mode, or game state changes.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the cracking effect was illustrated by setting that some kind of impact (force) is applied from the rear to approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as a cracking precursor image, thereby initiating the cracking. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cracking may be initiated by setting that some kind of impact (force) is applied from the front to a predetermined position in the cracking precursor image. Also, the force may be applied to multiple locations in the cracking precursor image at predetermined timings, or at multiple timings.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates two types of pre-cracking effects, one in which the glass plate image 006SG301, serving as a pre-cracking image, changes to a cracked pattern before the cracking begins, and another in which the cracking begins immediately without changing to a cracked pattern, the present invention is not limited to these examples. Regardless of the type of pre-cracking effect, all cracking effects may begin after the glass plate image 006SG301, serving as a pre-cracking image, changes to a cracked pattern, or all cracking effects may begin immediately without changing to a cracked pattern.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern, object images (such as characters), decorative patterns, and background images displayed in the layer image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with a second visibility that is less visible than the first visibility. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern, the various images displayed in the layer image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed with first visibility without reducing their visibility, and for example, the cracks may be made more noticeable by displaying a colored effect image in the area representing the cracks.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment primarily uses character image 006SG305 as an example of an object image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of character may be other than those described above. Also, it is possible to change the character to a person, an object such as an iron ball or rock, or a target object, among other things.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies forms in which the cracking effect can be initiated in response to the movement of an object image, in response to the movement of the movable body 32, or independently of the movement of either the object image or the movable body 32, the present invention is not limited to these forms. In all effects, the cracking may be initiated in response to the movement of an object image, in all effects, in response to the movement of the movable body 32, or in all effects, independently of the movement of either the object image or the movable body 32. Also, while the movable body 32 is used as an example of a movable body (logo), a movable body on the game board 2 located elsewhere may be used, or a movable body on the game machine frame 3 other than the game board 2 may be used. Furthermore, the cracking effect may be initiated in response to the movement of a movable body such as the special variable prize ball device 7.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the cracking effect begins, a whiteout image 006SG303 with 0% transparency is displayed as an effect image on a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 during the period immediately following the start of the cracking effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to display the whiteout image 006SG303 at the start of the cracking effect to make it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates a configuration in which a whiteout image 006SG303 with 0% transmittance is displayed on a display layer above the glass plate image 006SG301, making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 at the start of the cracking effect, the present invention is not limited to this. The transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased at the start of the cracking effect, that is, the fragment image 006SG302 may be faded in, making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 at the start of the cracking effect.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which a glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying cracks is drawn and arranged in the Layer 4 image drawing area, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is drawn and arranged in the Layer 5 image drawing area as an image of the glass plate actually breaking (changing to a fragment image 006SG302), the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the glass plate image 006SG301 may be drawn and arranged in the Layer 4 image drawing area, and a fragment image 006SG302 may be drawn and arranged in the Layer 5 image drawing area as an image of the broken glass plate image 006SG301, without drawing or arranging the glass plate image 006SG301A.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies the display of glass plate image 006SG301 and glass plate image 006SG301A in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the present invention is not limited thereto. The transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying the cracked pattern and the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying the cracked pattern may be different. For example, by making the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying the cracked pattern higher than that of glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying the cracked pattern (making glass plate image 006SG301 an opaque image), the timing of the crack display and the execution timing of the cracking effect can be made clearer than in the above embodiment.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which changes to a cracked pattern, is started in the layer 5 image drawing area at the same time that the glass plate image 006SG301, displayed in a cracked pattern, is hidden in the layer 4 image drawing area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display timing of the glass plate image 006SG301, displayed in a cracked pattern, and the display timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which changes to a cracked pattern, may overlap at least partially.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked pattern was exemplified as a crack precursor image in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack precursor image may be any image other than the cracked glass plate image 006SG301, as long as it suggests that the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 will crack.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as a cracking effect for background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and weak development effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A is shown to break when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick (see Figure 102), hammer (see Figure 106), punch (see Figure 108), etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a cracking effect for background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and weak development effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be shown to break when a character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 with a kick (see Figure 102), hammer (see Figure 106), punch (see Figure 108), etc. In addition to the kick, hammer, punch, etc. described above, the glass plate image 006SG301A may also be shown to break when a character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 with a slashing action such as a sword. In particular, as background change effects in this embodiment, in addition to background change effect A, in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks when a character acts on it with a kick (breaks due to the impact of the kick), and background change effect B, in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks without any action from the character or movable body 32 (see Figure 87), as described above, background change effect C can be executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks when a character acts on it with a sword (breaks due to the slash of the sword). The proportion to which the game is controlled to a jackpot state may be varied depending on whether or not the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 and the manner in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing so, the number of possible glass plate 006SG301A breaking effects can be increased, and the player's attention to the breaking effects can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a form was illustrated in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout image 006SG303 may not be displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 (the timing when the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A begins). By doing this, the sense of speed from the display of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to the actual breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A is enhanced, providing a dynamic and memorable breakage effect.

Furthermore, if the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed as part of the cracking effect as described above, instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301, the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 itself may be displayed as if it were cracking. By doing so, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, thus preventing the player from feeling uneasy due to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 during the cracking effect.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates a configuration in which a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, the present invention is not limited to this. When a cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, a non-transparent fragment image 006SG302 may also be displayed. In particular, when a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, a portion of the background image that was displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 immediately before the execution of the cracking effect may be displayed in the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a form in which the crack effect can be performed as a first consecutive crack effect, a second consecutive crack effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the crack effect may also be performed as an effect other than the first consecutive crack effect, the second consecutive crack effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect. For example, during a variable display, after it has been announced that the game is controlled to a less advantageous jackpot state for the player (for example, a non-probability-changing jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot ends, or a probability-changing jackpot C with 2 rounds), or after the jackpot state following the end of the variable display, an upgrade animation may be performed to announce that the game is controlled to a more advantageous jackpot state for the player (for example, a probability-changing jackpot A with 10 rounds that is controlled to a probability-changing state after the jackpot ends). Alternatively, during a variable display, after it has been announced that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, a revival animation may be performed to announce that the game is controlled to a jackpot state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when executing crack effects as a first consecutive crack effect, a second consecutive crack effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect, the example given was that the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A are executed after the actions of the character or movable body 32 and the display of cracks are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and cases may be provided in which the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A are executed without the actions of the character or movable body 32 or the display of cracks. By doing so, a sense of surprise can be given to the player by executing the crack effect, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the crack effects for the first consecutive crack effect, the second consecutive crack effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect were exemplified as using the glass plate image 006SG301 (and the glass plate image 006SG301A) as the target of the crack effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and images other than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A may be used as the target of the crack effect (for example, the operation prompt image 006SG310 in the case of the dialogue予告 effect or the cut-in effect).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the crack effects of the first consecutive crack effect, second consecutive crack effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed as an image higher than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image, thereby temporarily making at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the background image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in these crack effects, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed as an image between the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the background change effect A and the break effect of the reach indication effect were exemplified as having the character act on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the back to the front of the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these break effects may also be achieved by drawing and arranging the character image in a drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figures 3 and 4), so that the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the front to the back of the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, while examples were given of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 as a normal planar image in the fragment effects of the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the present invention is not limited thereto. In fragment effects of effects that, by their execution, suggest a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot state than when other effects are executed, such as the strong development effect and cut-in effect, the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed as a stereoscopic 3D image. In this way, when the strong development effect or cut-in effect is executed, the display of the 3D fragment image 006SG302 as a fragment effect can make the player recognize that there is a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, examples were given of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the first consecutive breakage effect, second consecutive breakage effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the movement and display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different for breakage effects in effects that, by being executed, suggest a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot state than when other effects are executed, such as the strong development effect and cut-in effect, and for breakage effects in effects other than these strong development effect and cut-in effect. By doing this, for example, by making the movement speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a strong development or cut-in animation slower than the movement speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a first consecutive break animation, second consecutive break animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, and result notification animation, it is possible to make the player aware that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is high when strong development animations or cut-in animations are being executed, based on the movement speed of the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, the fragment images 006SG302 have transparency as the fragment images for the first consecutive fragment effects, second consecutive fragment effects, dialogue予告 effects, background change effects A, background change effects B, reach suggestion effects, weak development effects, strong development effects A, strong development effects B, cut-in effects, and result notification effects, while the fragment images 006SG302 do not have transparency as the fragment images for the pseudo-consecutive effects and weak development effects are shown as examples. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the presence or absence of transparency in the fragment images 006SG302 may differ between fragment effects in effects that suggest a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot state than when other effects are executed, such as strong development effects and cut-in effects, and fragment effects in effects other than these strong development effects and cut-in effects. In this way, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the execution of the cracking effect allows the player to recognize whether or not there is a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot state.

As described above, the present invention is
A gaming machine that performs variable display of specific identification information and, when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, can control the game to a favorable state that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means,
A means of controlling the performance,
Display means and
Equipped with a light-emitting means,
The aforementioned game control means is
Based on multiple types of variable display patterns, the variable display of the specific identification information is performed.
It can be controlled to a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more easily performed and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information.
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the specified identification information that has not yet been initiated.
It is possible to display a corresponding display in the corresponding display area that corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information being executed.
Upon the commencement of the variable display of the specified identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display.
As a variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display.
In the aforementioned normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed,
Based on variable display pattern information corresponding to multiple types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed.
It is possible to perform the same switching display when a variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when a variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information.
In the aforementioned display means, it is possible to display a cracked image on a specific display layer.
The background image can be displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the aforementioned specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed on a display layer with a higher priority than the aforementioned specific display layer.
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the aforementioned cracked image is displayed, the emission control of the light-emitting means is performed using a specific brightness data table.
The emission control of the light-emitting means is performed using the specific luminance data table until a specific timing during the display period of the cracked image, and thereafter the specific timing, the emission control of the light-emitting means is performed using the luminance data table corresponding to the background image.
It is characterized by the following:
According to the present invention, when a variable display of specific identification information is initiated, a switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to an active display. Furthermore, while the switching display is being performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the scrolling display before the scrolling display of the decorative identification information begins. This allows for effective utilization of the time required for the switching display. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer compared to the special state, and the interest of the start of the variable display of decorative identification information in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous, can be enhanced. Moreover, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display screen is likened to glass, and after displaying a crack (precursor image of cracking) on the display screen, multiple fragment images are displayed as if the display screen had cracked, the light emission control of the light emission means can be suitably performed, enhancing the effect and increasing the interest. Thus, the present invention prevents players from feeling uncomfortable due to unnatural displays of decorative identification information and hold indicators, thereby keeping players interested from the start to the end of the variable display and improving the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, it has high marketability.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used spherical game balls (pachinko balls) as an example of a game medium, it is not limited to spherical game media; for example, non-spherical game media such as tokens may also be used.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine, it can also be applied to slot machines, for example, where a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, and one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device capable of displaying multiple types of identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded according to the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to Big Bonus, Regular Bonus, Assist Time (AT), and the special state corresponds to Assist Time (AT), etc.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which a jackpot game state is considered advantageous because it allows game balls to enter the large prize slot, resulting in more prize balls being dispensed than when game balls enter the starting prize slot or general prize slot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any game state that is advantageous to the player, such as making it easier for game balls to enter the prize slots or making it easier to control the game into a jackpot state, may be considered an advantageous state, including a time-saving state or a probability variation state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines and slot machines that enclose a gaming medium and award points based on the occurrence of winnings. Moreover, a gaming machine capable of gameplay only needs to be one that allows for gameplay, and is not limited to pachinko machines or slot machines; it may also be a general-purpose game machine.

1. Pachinko game machine 4A, 1st special symbol display device 4B, 2nd special symbol display device 5, image display device 100, microcomputer for game control 120, CPU for performance control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that displays identification information in a variable manner and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
It is possible to perform a predetermined performance that suggests the system is controlled to the aforementioned advantageous state,
The aforementioned predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a first premonition image of cracking, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the first premonition image of cracking.
The second predetermined performance includes a third predetermined part that displays a second premonition image of cracking, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the second premonition image of cracking.
The execution periods for the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance do not overlap.
The execution period differs between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in at least multiple directions, including a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The fragment image displayed while moving in the aforementioned specific direction requires a longer period of time to become invisible in the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed while moving in the aforementioned predetermined direction.
The fragment image displayed in the fourth predetermined part moving in the specific direction requires a longer period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part moving in the specific direction.
In the first predetermined performance, a predetermined background image can be displayed as the background image before the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed.
As a background image after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed, any of a plurality of background images can be displayed, which is different from the predetermined background image and includes a first background image and a second background image that suggests a higher probability of being controlled to the favorable state than the first background image.
The object image can be displayed in one of several modes.
Depending on which of the multiple forms of object images is displayed when the predetermined background image is displayed, it is possible to suggest which of the multiple background images will be displayed after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed.
It is possible to further perform a specific effect that displays a specific fragment image in a different manner from the fragment image in the second predetermined part,
The aforementioned specific performance can be executed when the advantageous state is not controlled.
When the first predetermined performance is executed, the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in the first mode,
When the aforementioned specific performance is executed, the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a second mode different from the first mode.
In one performance mode, it is possible to switch between and display multiple types of background images, including a first specific background image and a second specific background image.
When switching the background image from the first specific background image to the second specific background image, it is possible to perform a background fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the first specific background image, and a background fade-in display that gradually decreases the transparency of the second specific background image.
When initiating the variable display of the aforementioned identification information, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the aforementioned identification information.
When the variable display of the identification information ends, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the identification information is gradually reduced.
The aforementioned identification information fade-out display and the aforementioned background fade-out display can be executed at the same time.
The aforementioned identification information fade-in display and the aforementioned background fade-in display can be executed at the same time.
The execution period for the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period for the identification information fade-out display.
The execution period for the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period for the identification information fade-in display.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features .